Home

TI-84 Plus and TI-84 Plus Silver Edition

1. TI 84 Plus Silver Edition Ji TEXAS INSTRUMENTS f Graphing Keys eazy gus mare Editing Keys re Goni ID wee Ca pie Advanced Co Gran EO Eo Gay Z Function Keys oa C Ga EI C5 JLZ an CA SD en ae O SEIE Scientific Cindy 2 3 Calculator Keys T 2 S Q Sets oe fa a Using the Color Coded Keyboard The keys on the Tl 84 Plus are color coded to help you easily locate the key you need The light colored keys are the number keys The keys along the right side of the keyboard are the common math functions The keys across the top set up and display graphs The key provides access to applications such as the Inequality Graphing Transformation Graphing Conic Graphing Polynomial Root Finder and Simultaneous Equation Solver and Catalog Help The primary function of each key is printed on the keys For example when you press MATH the MATH menu is displayed Using the and Keys The secondary function of each key is printed above the key When you press the key the character abbreviation or word printed above the other keys becomes active for the next keystroke For example when you press and then MATH the TEST menu is displayed This guidebook describes this keystroke combination as TEST Many keys also have a third function These functions are printed above the keys in the same color as the key The third functions enter alphabetic characters and special symbols as well as access SO
2. Negation negation returns the negative of value You can use with real or complex numbers expressions lists and matrices Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 37 value EOS rules Chapter 1 determine when negation is evaluated For example 4 returns a negative number because squaring is evaluated before negation Use parentheses to square a negated number as in 4 2 Note On the TI 84 Plus the negation symbol is shorter and higher than the subtraction sign which is displayed when you press Pi n Pi z is stored as a constant in the TI 84 Plus In calculations the TI 84 Plus uses 3 1415926535898 for r S 141592654 Ane 3 141592654 4 1626 18 MATH Operations MATH Menu To display the MATH menu press MATH MATH NUM CPX PRB 1 RE rac Displays the answer as a fraction 2 bDec Displays the answer as a decimal So B Calculates the cube 4 N Calculates the cube root gt XJ Calculates the x root Of EMIn Finds the minimum of a function 7 Max Finds the maximum of a function 8 nDeriv Computes the numerical derivative Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 38 MATH NUM CPX PRB oe Taint Computes the function integral 0 summation Returns the sum of elements of list from start to end where start lt end A lLogBASE Returns the logarithm of a specifed value determined from a specified base logBASE value
3. ccccccsssccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeseeseesessaaanenaaananaas 29 Special Features Of the TESA PIUS sacram e A a ENa E 30 Oter M 84 PIUS Feat CS anp axe onne a A eNA a TNA EEE EA REEN RN 31 Error COMGIRIOMS ana a a E aed a ease eh ue a E 33 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations ccccsssseseeeeseeeeeneeeeeenseeeeenseseeenenseeeeeneeseeenensensas 35 Getting Started Con FID ocurrio ieie une aE KEEA EEEN 35 Keyboard Mat Operations mpiousi aiana aa a aea ea a a Aai aaea 36 MATH ODGTAUOMN Ss snede a a a a A 38 USING the EQUATION Solver misii eE A E a A Ea AAE AOA 42 MATH NUM N mber Operations ense e a ae TE a ia a A aE 45 Entering and Using Complex Numbers ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaasaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeaaeseeeeeeees 50 MATH CPX Complex Operations cccccccccsssssssssseceeeeeceeeeeeesseeseceeeeeeseaeeeuaasgeeeeeeeeesessaesaaseseseeeees 54 MATH PRB Probability Operations sisirain e a a a A E Ra 56 PINGEE Op rati ons eae a e a ea a ra a e aeaa 59 TEST Relational Operations sarine E OE AEE EETA 62 TEST LOGIC Boolean Operations sarisin nseri an Nain AAS a AADAT era Taisit 63 Chapter 3 FUNCTION Graphing sso E a E a EAEE 65 Getting Started Graphing a Circle ou eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaassaaeeeeeeeeeesssaneaaaesseeeeeeessenas 65 DENMA G aPN S e a A 66 SELLING the Graph MOQES mireganle SaDa Eaa AE aE aa 67 DE TIMING FUNCIONS cierre vesaleusan aa les
4. sinh is the hyperbolic arcsine function cosh is the hyperbolic arccosine function tanh is the hyperbolic arctangent function Each is valid for real numbers expressions and lists Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 213 sinh value cosh value tanh value sinh 86 1353 4H 86137308 tanh 2493661443 Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 274 Chapter 16 Programming Getting Started Volume of a Cylinder Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details A program is a set of commands that the TI 84 Plus executes sequentially as if you had entered them from the keyboard Create a program that prompts for the radius R and the height H of a cylinder and then computes its volume 1 Press gt L to display the PRGM NEW menu E Er EDIT HBCreate Hew 2 Press to select 1 Create New The Name prompt is displayed and alpha lock is on Press C Y LINDER and then press to name the program CYLINDER oe CYLINDER You are now in the program editor The colon in the first column of the second line indicates the beginning of a command line 3 Press gt 2 to select 2 Prompt from the PRGM I O menu Prompt is copied to the command line Press RL H to enter the variable names for radius and height Press ENTERJ CYLIHDER kH 4 Press 2nd r ALPHA R x2 ALPHA H STO ALPHA V FROGRAM CYLINDER t FH
5. E L1 to specify Xlist L1 for plot 1 Press ia Hh L2 to specify Ylist L2 for plot 1 Press Slisteli YlisteLl gt to select as the Mark for each data Mark n E point on the scatter plot 9 Press 9 to select 9 ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu The window variables are adjusted automatically and plot 1 is displayed This is a scatter plot of the time versus length data Since the scatter plot of time versus length data appears to be approximately linear fit a line to the data 10 Press gt 4 to select 4 LinReg ax b linear regression model from the STAT CALC menu Fre aList Store kesEkl Calculate Chapter 12 Statistics 179 11 Fill in each argument in the stat wizard displayed nRedtax b Press L1 for Xlist and L2 for Ylist list Li Press to Store ReqEQ and then press ee et F4 to paste Y1 Press to select Ee v4 Calculate A 12 Press to execute LinReg ax b The linear regression for the data in L1 and L2 is calculated Values for a and b are displayed in a temporary result screen The linear regression equation is stored in Y1 Residuals are calculated and stored automatically in the list name RESID which becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu Note 13 The stat wizard pastes the populated command in the home screen history for repeated use if needed press a 4 to view the home screen history as show in the screen 14 Pr
6. 1 7 6 L 35 7 95 is the area 165 1 is u and 6 35 is o 6 Press to paste the function and again finutorm 25 155F to calculate the result 175 3448285 The result is displayed on the home screen it shows that five percent of the women are taller than 175 5 centimeters Now graph and shade the top 5 percent of the population 7 Press WINDOW and set the window variables to these values Xmin 145 Ymin 02 Xres 1 Xmax 185 Ymax 08 Xscl 5 Yscl 0 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 217 8 Press DISTR gt to display the DISTR DRAW menu 9 Press to open a wizard for the input of the ShadeNorm parameters 10 Enter 175 5448205 for the lower bound and Shadehorm press gt Enter 1 2nd FE 99 for the upper bound eee e and press Enter the mean u of 165 1 forthe m 165 1 normal curve and press Enter a standard Ti deviation o of 6 35 11 Press to select Draw and then press to plot and shade the normal curve Area is the area above the 95th percentile low is the lower bound up is the upper bound AFGd 05 lom 17E 54E urF LE99 Inferential Stat Editors Displaying the Inferential Stat Editors When you select a hypothesis test or confidence interval instruction from the home screen the appropriate inferential statistics editor is displayed The editors vary according to each test or interval s input requirements Below is the inferential stat
7. 1L 7 x 4L 2 1 F 4 badd ENTER 147 fins 147 Bnd Ans 2A 58823529 ENTER Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 24 Continuing an Expression You can use Ans as the first entry in the next expression without entering the value again or pressing ANS On a blank line on the home screen enter the function The TI 84 Plus pastes the variable name Ans to the screen then the function 5 2 oo ee ENTER i Ans 93 9 x 9 9 24 75 ENTER Storing Answers To store an answer store Ans to a variable before you evaluate another expression Calculate the area of a circle of radius 5 meters Next calculate the volume of a cylinder of radius 5 meters and height 3 3 meters and then store the result in the variable V nd n 5 G2 5 ENTER 8 53981634 3 3 nat ae po 1813939 Hg V 259 1813939 ENTER TI 84 Plus Menus Using a TI 84 Plus Menu You can access most Tl 84 Plus operations using menus When you press a key or key combination to display a menu one or more menu names appear on the top line of the screen e The menu name on the left side of the top line is highlighted Up to seven items in that menu are displayed beginning with item 1 which also is highlighted e Anumber or letter identifies each menu item s place in the menu The order is 1 through 9 then O then A B C and so on The LIST NAMES PRGM EXEC and PRGM EDIT menus only label items 1 through 9 and 0 e When
8. To restore the default settings in the EasyData App while a data collection device is connected to the TI 84 Plus choose File and select 1 New Chapter 14 Applications 264 Starting and Stopping Data Collection Starting Data Collection To start sampling select Start press Z00M Sampling will automatically stop when the number of samples set in the Time Graph Settings menu is reached The TI 84 Plus will then display a graph of the sampled data Stopping Data Collection To stop sampling before it automatically stops select Stop press and hold Z00M at any time during the sampling process When sampling stops a graph of the sampled data is displayed Saving Collected Data Collected data is automatically transferred to the Tl 84 Plus and stored in lists L1 through L4 when data collection is complete When you exit the EasyData App a prompt reminds you of the lists in which time distance velocity and acceleration are stored Time in Tist Li Distance in Tisk Le Velocity in Tist L3 Acceleration in Tist LY ancl Oh This manual describes basic operation for the EasyData 2 application For more information about the EasyData 2 App visit www vernier com Chapter 14 Applications 265 Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions Browsing the TI 84 Plus CATALOG What Is the CATALOG The CATALOG is an alphabetical list of all functions and instructions on the Tl 84 Plus You also can acce
9. dbd date date2 DEC Answers valueyDec Degree DelVar variable DependAsk DependAuto det matrix DiagnosticOff DiagnosticOn dim istname dim matrixname Result Returns a list of the cumulative sums of the elements in list starting with the first element Returns a matrix of the cumulative sums of matrix elements Each element in the returned matrix is a cumulative sum of a matrix column from top to bottom Returns an integer from 1 to 7 with each integer representing a day of the week Use dayOfWk to determine on which day of the week a particular date would occur The year must be 4 digits month and day can be 1 or 2 digit Calculates the number of days between date and date2 using the actual day count method Displays answers as integers or decimal numbers Displays a real or complex number expression list or matrix in decimal format Sets degree angle mode Deletes from memory the contents of variable Sets table to ask for dependent variable values Sets table to generate dependent variable values automatically Returns determinant of matrix Sets diagnostics off mode r r and R are not displayed as regression model results Sets diagnostics on mode r r and R are displayed as regression model results Returns the dimension of distname Returns the dimension of matrixname as a list Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd LIST OPS 6 cumSum 2nd
10. Program Output PROGRAM PAUSE pramPAUSE laas a a 16 Dise as Fause O1seGrarh Pause DisF Lbi Goto Lbi label and Goto go to are used together for branching LbI specifies the abel for a command label can be one or two characters A through Z O through 99 or 0 Lbl abel Goto causes the program to branch to label when Goto is encountered Goto label Program Output PROGFEAM CUBE s LEl 939 Input A Goto 99 Chapter 16 Programming 285 IS gt IS gt increment and skip adds 1 to variable If the answer is gt value which can be an expression the next command is skipped if the answer is lt value the next command is executed variable cannot be a system variable 1S gt variable value command if answer lt value command if answer gt value Program Output PROGRAM ISKIF PrgmISKIF A 6 ISA 6 Done Dise HOT gt 6 Disr gt 6 Note IS gt is not a looping instruction DS lt DS lt decrement and skip subtracts 1 from variable If the answer is lt value which can be an expression the next command is skipped if the answer is gt value the next command is executed variable cannot be a system variable DS lt variable value command if answer value command if answer lt value Program Output PROGRAM OSE IP PramOsk IP 1 A MOT gt amp FOS CAs DI Done O01isF Dise HOT gt 6 Note DS lt is not a loop
11. Trace T Test W0 istname freglist alternative drawflag Data list input T Test u0 X Sx n alternative drawflag Summary stats input tvm_FV N 1 PV PMT P Y C Y tvm _I N PV PMT FV P Y C Y tvm_N 1 PV PMT FV P Y C Y tvm_Pmt N I PV FV P Y C Y tvm_PV NI PMTFY P Y C Y Result Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item Writes text on graph beginning at pixel row column where DRAW O lt row lt 57 and Q lt column lt 94 Sets sequence graphs to plot with respect to time Converts seconds to units of time that can be more easily understood for evaluation The list is in days hours minutes seconds format Computes a confidence interval Computes a confidence interval Computes the probability density function pdf for the Student t distribution at a specified x value with specified degrees of freedom df Displays the graph and enters TRACE mode Performs a test with frequency freglist alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Performs a test with frequency freglist alternative 1 iS lt alternative 0 is alternative is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Computes the future value Computes the annual interest rate Computes the number of payment periods Computes the amount of each payment Computes the present value DRAW 0
12. Women s left hand data lt Women s right hand data Use 4 and gt to examine minX Q1 Med Q3 and maxX for each plot Notice the outlier to the women s right hand data What is the median for the left hand For the right hand With which hand were the women more accurate guessers according to the box plots Examine the men s results Redefine plot 1 to use MLEFT redefine plot 2 to use MRGHT Press TRACE _ Men s left hand data Men s right hand data Press 4 and gt to examine minX Q1 Med Q3 and maxX for each plot What difference do you see between the plots Compare the left hand results Redefine plot 1 to use WLEFT redefine plot 2 to use MLEFT and then press to examine minX Q1 Med Q3 and maxxX for each plot Who were the better left hand guessers men or women Compare the right hand results Define plot 1 to use WRGHT define plot 2 to use MRGHT and then press to examine minX Q1 Med Q3 and maxX for each plot Who were the better right hand guessers In the original experiment boys did not guess as well with right hands while girls guessed equally well with either hand This is not what our box plots show for adults Do you think that this is because adults have learned to adapt or because our sample was not large enough Chapter 17 Activities 307 Graphing Piecewise Functions Problem The fine for speeding on a road with a speed limit of 45 kilometers per hour kph is 50 p
13. to enter the expression nR7H and store it to peat the variable V 5 Press gt 3 to select 3 Disp from the PROGRAM CYLINDER PRGM I O menu Disp is pasted to the command alah Ra H line Press A LOCK YIVO LUME IS Dise VOLUME IS A V to set up the program to a display the text VOLUME IS on one line and the calculated value of v on the next 6 Press QUIT to display the home screen Chapter 16 Programming 215 7 Press to display the PRGM EXEC menu The EDIT HEL items on this menu are the names of stored LIHDER programs 8 Press to paste prgmCYLINDER to the current cursor location If CYLINDER is not item 1 on your PRGM EXEC menu move the cursor to CYLINDER before you press ENTER 9 Press to execute the program Enter 1 5 for the radius and then press ENTER Enter 3 for the height and then press ENTER The text VOLUME IS the value of v and Done are displayed 1 eet ee te Repeat steps 7 through 9 and enter different values for R and H Creating and Deleting Programs What Is a Program A program is a set of one or more command lines Each line contains one or more instructions When you execute a program the TI 84 Plus performs each instruction on each command line in the same order in which you entered them The number and size of programs that the TI 84 Plus can store is limited only by available memory Operating Systems versions and programming e Programs created with OS 2 43
14. 3 Read the message below the RESET MEMORY menu e To cancel the reset and return to the HOME screen press ENTER e To continue with the reset select 2 Reset The message MEM cleared is displayed on the HOME screen When you clear memory the contrast sometimes changes If the screen is faded or blank adjust the contrast by pressing a or Grouping and Ungrouping Variables Grouping Variables Grouping allows you to make a copy of two or more variables residing in RAM and then store them as a group in user data archive The variables in RAM are not erased The variables must exist in RAM before they can be grouped In other words archived data cannot be included in a group Once grouped the variables can be deleted from RAM to open memory When the variables are needed later they can be ungrouped for use To create a group of variables 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 336 em Mamt Del Clear Entries LlrAllLists Archive PUMA CAI ve Reset SHG Our 3 4 T 6 r Select 8 Group to display GROUP UNGROUP menu Pe ae UMGROUP reate Hew Press to display the GROUP menu GROUP Hame H Enter a name for the new group and press ENTER Note A group name can be one to eight characters long The first character must be a letter from A to Z or 8 The second through eighth characters can be letters numbers or 0 GROUP Hame GROUPA Select the typ
15. Because of the protection feature you must press before you can edit an element of a formula generated list The protection feature does not allow you to delete an element of a list to which a formula is attached To delete an element of a list to which a formula is attached you must first detach the formula in any of the ways described above Switching Stat List Editor Contexts Stat List Editor Contexts The stat list editor has four contexts e View elements context e View names context Chapter 12 Statistics 190 e Edit elements context e Enter name context The stat list editor is first displayed in view elements context To switch through the four contexts select 1 Edit from the STAT EDIT menu and follow these steps 1 Press 4 to move the cursor onto a list name and switch to view names context Press gt and 4 to view list names stored in other stat list editor columns 2 Press to switch to edit elements context You may edit any element in a list All elements of the current list are displayed in braces in the entry line Press gt and 4 to view more list elements 3 Press again to switch to view elements context Press gt and 4 to view other list elements The current element s full value is displayed in the entry line 4 Press again to switch back to edit elements context You may edit the current element in the entry line 5 Press 4 until the cursor is on
16. Faran j 1 nx d gt 0 where n numerator degrees of freedom d denominator degrees of freedom Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 245 F pdf x numerator df denominator df Elati Flat Platz Note For this example FrdF WYER edt tas 24 19 Xmin 0 lt Walyer aT Xmax 5 at Murer 24 df Denom 19 Ymin 0 Faste Ymax 1 Fcdf Fcdf computes the F distribution probability between owerbound and upperbound for the specified numerator df degrees of freedom and denominator df numerator df and denominator df must be integers gt 0 F cdf owerbound upperbound numerator df denominator df mo a 2 4523 24 i 9749989576 ers ses df Hurner z4 df Denon 19 Faste binompdf binompdf computes a probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability of success p on each trial x can be an integer or a list of integers O lt p lt 1 must be true numtrials must be an integer gt 0 If you do not specify x a list of probabilities from O to numtrials is returned The probability density function pdf is fx PFa py Vx Oda where n numtrials binompdf numtrials p x binomedft iD 63 03 a4 57 1 0956 259 nA trials 5 Pi 5 value i3 4 5 aste Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 246 binomcdf binomcdf computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified num
17. For example store sin X to Y1 in the Y editor and press GRAPH Then store cos X to Y2 and press again The function Y2 is graphed on top of Y1 the original function Graphing a Family of Curves If you enter a list Chapter 11 as an element in an expression the Tl 84 Plus plots the function for each value in the list thereby graphing a family of curves In Simul graphing order mode it graphs all functions sequentially for the first element in each list and then for the second and so on 2 4 6 sin X graphs three functions 2 sin X 4 sin X and 6 sin X Plotki Flokz Flot lee or eran Floti Flot Floks le erg erga Note When using more than one list the lists must have the same dimensions Chapter 3 Function Graphing 77 Exploring Graphs with the Free Moving Cursor Free Moving Cursor When a graph is displayed press 4 gt 4 or to move the cursor around the graph When you first display the graph no cursor is visible When you press 4 gt 4 or the cursor moves from the center of the viewing window As you move the cursor around the graph the coordinate values of the cursor location are displayed at the bottom of the screen if CoordOn format is selected The Float Fix decimal mode setting determines the number of decimal digits displayed for the coordinate values To display the graph with no cursor and no coordinate values press or ENTER When you press 4 gt 4 or
18. e Press a key or key combination for a different menu such as or LIST e Press a key or key combination for a different screen such as Y or TABLE VARS and VARS Y VARS Menus VARS Menu You can enter the names of functions and system variables in an expression or store to them directly Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 2 To display the VARS menu press VARS All VARS menu items display secondary menus which show the names of the system variables 1 Window 2 Zoom and 5 Statistics each access more than one secondary menu VARS Y VARS 1 Window X Y T 8 and U V W variables 2 ZOOM ZXIZY ZT ZO and ZU variables 3 GDB Graph database variables A Picture Picture variables 5 Staristics XY EQ TEST and PTS variables 6 Table TABLE variables TR SEEING String variables Selecting a Variable from the VARS Menu or VARS Y VARS Menu To display the VARS Y VARS menu press gt 1 Function 2 Parametric and 3 Polar display secondary menus of the Y function variables VARS Y VARS le F noctions Yn functions 2 Parametric XnT YnT functions also found on the YVARS shortcut menu S2 POLAE rn functions also found on the YVARS shortcut menu Ae OMA OF ties Lets you select deselect functions Note e The sequence variables u v w are located on the keyboard as the second functions of 7 8 and 9 e These Y function variables are also on the YVAR shortcut
19. is a reminder that you can change ATbI from this table view The entry line is cleared when you press any key Press until you see the sign changes in the value of Y1 How many sign changes occur and at what X values In this case you can also see the roots of the function by finding when Y1 0 You can explore changes in X by pressing to display the A Tbl prompt entering a new value and searching for your answer Chapter 7 Tables 115 Setting Up the Table TABLE SETUP Screen To display the TABLE SETUP screen press TBLSET TABELE SETUP ee x TbliStart ATbl TbiStart table start defines the initial value for the independent variable TblStart applies only when the independent variable is generated automatically when Indpnt Auto is selected ATbI table step defines the increment for the independent variable Indpnt Auto Indpnt Ask Depend Auto Depend Ask Selections Table Characteristics Indpnt Auto Values are displayed automatically in both the independent Depend Auto variable column and in all dependent variable columns Indpnt Ask The table is empty When you enter a value for the independent Depend Auto variable all corresponding dependent variable values are calculated and displayed automatically Indpnt Auto Values are displayed automatically for the independent variable Depend Ask To generate a value for a dependent variable move the cursor to that cell and press
20. l TEXAS INSTRUMENTS TI 84 Plus and TI 84 Plus Silver Edition Guidebook Note This guidebook for the TI 84 Plus or Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition with operating system OS version 2 55MP If your calculator has a previous OS version your screens may look different and some features may not be available You can download the latest OS education ti com guides Important Information Texas Instruments makes no warranty either express or implied including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely on an as is basis In no event shall Texas Instruments be liable to anyone for special collateral incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the purchase or use of these materials and the sole and exclusive liability of Texas Instruments regardless of the form of action shall not exceed the purchase price of this product Moreover Texas Instruments shall not be liable for any claim of any kind whatsoever against the use of these materials by any other party 2004 2010 Texas Instruments Incorporated Vernier EasyData Vernier LabPro and Vernier Go Motion are a trademarks of Vernier Software amp Technology Contents IMPORTA E INTOR IMAL ON aea E E EA ii Chapter 1 Operating the TI 84 Plus Silver Edition cccscsseseeseeesenseeeeenseeeeeneeseeeeenseeensn
21. press 2 e f you previously had turned off the graphing calculator by pressing OFF the TI 84 Plus displays the home screen as it was when you last used it and clears any error The information screen displays first unless you chose not to see it again If the home screen is blank press 4 to scroll through the history of previous calculations e If Automatic Power Down APD had previously turned off the graphing calculator the TI 84 Plus will return exactly as you left it including the display cursor and any error Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 3 e Ifthe Tl 84 Plus is turned off and connected to another graphing calculator or personal computer any communication activity will wake up the TI 84 Plus To prolong the life of the batteries APD turns off the Tl 84 Plus automatically after about five minutes without any activity Turning Off the Graphing Calculator To turn off the TI 84 Plus manually press OFF e All settings and memory contents are retained by the Constant Memory function e Any error condition is cleared Batteries The TI 84 Plus uses five batteries four AAA alkaline batteries and one button cell backup battery The backup battery provides auxiliary power to retain memory while you replace the AAA batteries To replace batteries without losing any information stored in memory follow the steps in Appendix C Setting the Display Contrast Adjusting the Dis
22. press 5 5 Q Press to store 5 5 to Q 2 Press F3 to display the 2x2 matrix template Press 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt to enter the values Press MATRIX 1 to store the matrix to A 3 On the sending unit press MEM to display the MEMORY menu Out Jen Hant 0el Clear Entries ClrAllListe Archive UnArchi ve 4 On the sending unit press 2 to select M FREE FZE 2 Mem Mgmt Del The MEMORY a Sbe 26H MANAGEMENT menu is displayed 5 On the sending unit press 5 to select 5 Matrix The MATRIX editor screen is displayed 6 On the sending unit press to RAM archive A An asterisk will appear RE signifying that A is now archived 7 Connect the graphing calculators with the USB unit to unit cable Push both ends in firmly 8 On the receiving unit press 2nd LINK D SEND SSeS to display the RECEIVE menu Press 1 to MFeceive select 1 Receive The message Waiting is displayed and the busy indicator is on Chapter 19 Communication Link 344 9 On the sending unit press LINK to RECEIVE display the SEND menu It 10 Press 2 to select 2 All The All SELECT screen is displayed 11 Press until the selection cursor gt is next to A MATRX Press ENTER 12 Press until the selection cursor is next to Q REAL Press ENTER A square dot next to A and Q indicates that each is selected to send 13 On the sending unit press gt to dis
23. sort descending sorts list elements from high to low values Complex lists are sorted based on magnitude modulus SortA and SortD each can sort in either of two ways e With one Jistname SortA and SortD sort the elements in istname and update the list in memory e With two or more lists SortA and SortD sort keylistname and then sort each dependlist by placing its elements in the same order as the corresponding elements in keylistname This lets you sort two variable data on X and keep the data pairs together All lists must have the same dimension The sorted lists are updated in memory SortA istname SortD listname SortA keylistname dependlist1 dependlist2 dependlist n SortD keylistname dependlist1 dependlist2 dependlist n 13 4 os Di 2 1s Note SortA and SortD are the same as SortA and SortD on the LIST OPS menu CirList ClirList clears deletes from memory the elements of one or more istnames ClrList also detaches any formula attached to a Jistname ClrList Jistname listname listname n Note To clear from memory all elements of all list names use CIrAllLists Chapter 18 SetUpEditor With SetUpEditor you can set up the stat list editor to display one or more istnames in the order that you specify You can specify zero to 20 listnames Additionally if you want to use Jistnames which happen to be archived the SetUp Editor will automatically unarchive the istnames and pla
24. 2 53 MP parentheses may be pasted in an expression to indicate how the input is interpreted If you are using trigonometric functions or performing polar and rectangular conversions the unexpected results may be caused by an angle mode setting The Radian and Degree angle mode settings control how the TI 84 Plus interprets angle values To change the angle mode settings follow these steps 1 Press to display the Mode settings 2 Select Degree or Radian 3 Press to save the angle mode setting Appendix B Reference Information 391 ERR DIM MISMATCH Error Your Tl 84 Plus displays the ERR DIM MISMATCH error if you are trying to perform an operation that references one or more lists or matrices whose dimensions do not match For example multiplying L1 L2 where L1 1 2 3 4 5 and L2 1 2 produces an ERR DIM MISMATCH error because the number of elements in L1 and L2 do not match ERR INVALID DIM Error The ERR INVALID DIM error message may occur if you are trying to graph a function that does not involve the stat plot features The error can be corrected by turning off the stat plots To turn the Stat plots off press STAT PLOT and then select 4 PlotsOff Link Receive L1 or any file to Restore Message Your Tl 84 Plus displays the Link Receive L1 or any file to Restore message if it has been disabled for testing and not re enabled To restore your calculator to full functionality after testing link to another Tl 84 Plus and t
25. 3 nCr PRB 3 nCr 5 MAT PRB 3 nCr z MAT PRB 3 nCr ALPHA F1 ALPHA F1 3 gt n d lt gt Un d r NUM A gt n d lt gt Un d APPS 1 Finance O MODE Normal 2nd DISTR DISTR 2 normalcdf 2nd DISTR DISTR 1 normalpdf Appendix A Functions and Instructions 366 Function or Instruction Arguments Result Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item not value valueA nPr valueB value nPr list list nPr value listA nPr listB npv interest rate CFO CFList CF Freq valueA or valueB Output row column text Output row column value Param Pause Pause value Plot type Xlistname Ylistname mark Plot tpe Xlistname freqlist Returns 0 if value is 4 0 value can be a real number expression or list Returns the number of permutations of valueA taken valueB at a time Returns a list of the permutations of value taken each element in ist at a time Returns a list of the permutations of each element in ist taken value at a time Returns a list of the permutations of each element in istA taken each element in istB at a time Computes the sum of the present values for cash inflows and outflows Returns 1 if valueA or valueB is 0 valued and valueB can be real numbers expressions or lists Displays text beginning at specified row and column Displays value beginning at specified row and column Sets parametric
26. 6 ga Tat Sa a S Ir Re MathPrint Classic variance returns the variance of the elements in ist The default value for freglist is 1 Each freglist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in ist Complex lists are not valid variance is freqlist j Cil 2 5F Warlancectils s a War ance a lle alles al 15 5 MathPrint Classic Chapter 11 Lists 177 Chapter 12 Statistics Getting Started Pendulum Lengths and Periods Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details A group of students is attempting to determine the mathematical relationship between the length of a pendulum and its period one complete swing of a pendulum The group makes a simple pendulum from string and washers and then suspends it from the ceiling They record the pendulum s period for each of 12 string lengths Length cm Time sec Length cm Time sec 6 5 0 51 24 4 1 01 11 0 0 68 26 6 1 08 13 2 0 73 30 5 1 13 15 0 0 79 34 3 1 26 18 0 0 88 37 6 1 28 23 1 0 99 41 5 1 32 This example is quoted and adapted from Contemporary Precalculus Through Applications by the North Carolina School of Science and Mathematics by permission of Janson Publications Inc Dedham MA 1 800 322 MATH 1992 All rights reserved 1 Press to set Func graphing mode 2 Press 5 to select 5 SetUpEditor SetUpEditor is pasted to the home screen Press ENTER
27. A small forest of 4 000 trees is under a new forestry plan Each year 20 percent of the trees will be harvested and 1 000 new trees will be planted Will the forest eventually disappear Will the forest size stabilize If so in how many years and with how many trees 1 Press MODE Press JDJDJD to select MAM scr ens Si OLE sae eres Seq graphing mode eG DEGREE FUNC FAR FOL BG C DOT Saat FIHUL FEAL arbi rerai 2 Press FORMAT and select Time axes format and ExprOn format if necessary AEC E ceed Gridin 3 Press Y If the graph style icon is not dot Pioti Flot Flotz il is di whi n s press 4 4 press ENTER until is displayed and Jaaa i Parte Sur then press gt gt ucehlin3 Bigga AERIS 4 Press gt 3 to select iPart integer part weehing Wa because only whole trees are harvested After ree thee each annual harvest 80 percent 80 of the trees remain Press 8 u 1 DJ to define the number of trees after each harvest Press 1000 to define the new trees Press 4000 to define the number of trees at the beginning of the program Note Be sure to press u not U u is the second function of the 7 key 5 Press 0 to set nMin 0 Press 50 to set nMax 50 nMin and nMax evaluate forest size over 50 years Set the other window variables PlotStart 1 Xmin 0 Ymin 0 PlotStep 1 Xmax 50 Ymax 6000 Xscl 10 Yscl 1000 Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 1
28. Answers display in radians Degree mode interprets angle values as degrees Answers display in degrees Func Par Pol Seq Graphing modes define the graphing parameters Chapters 3 4 5 and 6 describe these modes in detail Func function graphing mode plots functions where Y is a function of X Chapter 3 Par parametric graphing mode plots relations where X and Y are functions of T Chapter 4 Pol polar graphing mode plots functions where r is a function of Chapter 5 Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 16 Seq Sequence graphing mode plots sequences Chapter 6 Connected Dot Connected plotting mode draws a line connecting each point calculated for the selected functions Dot plotting mode plots only the calculated points of the selected functions Sequential Simul Sequential graphing order mode evaluates and plots one function completely before the next function is evaluated and plotted Simul simultaneous graphing order mode evaluates and plots all selected functions for a single value of X and then evaluates and plots them for the next value of X Note Regardless of which graphing mode is selected the Tl 84 Plus will sequentially graph all stat plots before it graphs any functions Real atbi re 0i Real mode does not display complex results unless complex numbers are entered as input Two complex modes display complex results e atbi rectangular complex mode displays complex
29. Consider repeating this activity with the mode set to 7054 the number of decimal places desired The first screen LE f8te die1 shows four decimal places The second screen shows the decimal setting at Float ord u a be a ae ee Using the DRAW Menu DRAW Menu To display the DRAW menu press DRAW The TI 84 Plus s interpretation of these instructions depends on whether you accessed the menu from the home screen or the program editor or directly from a graph DRAW POLINES GTO 1 ClrDraw Clears all drawn elements 2 Line Draws a line segment between 2 points 32 Horizontal Draws a horizontal line 4 Vertical Draws a vertical line 5 Tangent Draws a line segment tangent to a function 6 DrawF Draws a function 7 Shade Shades an area between two functions 8 DrawlInv Draws the inverse of a function 9 Circle Draws a circle 04 Text Draws text on a graph screen A Pen Activates the free form drawing tool Before Drawing on a Graph The DRAW instructions draw on top of graphs Therefore before you use the DRAW instructions consider whether you want to perform one or more of the following actions e Change the mode settings on the mode screen e Change the format settings on the format screen You can press FORMAT or use the shortcut on the mode screen to go to the format graph screen Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 122 e Enter or edit functions in the Y editor e Select or deselect funct
30. Creating and Deleting Programs ccccccecceeeeeeeeeceeeseaneasseseeeeeeeeseenseaaaaaeeseeeeeeeessessaaaaneeeeeeeees 276 Entering Command Lines and Executing Programs ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesanaaasseeeeeeees 278 EAIA POOF IS aa AE A AA 279 Copying and Renaming Programs merigeriiic sipar aana a EETA E EAE VERDANKEN tase ER 280 PROEM CTL COMON Instructions sc 050 0a a a a a a a a a a a 281 PRGM VO Inp t Qu tput INSTFUCTIONS cceccccceccccsseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaauaassseeeseeeeesssessaaaaaseeeseeeess 288 Calling Other Programs as Subroutines cccccccecteteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeesenans 293 Running an Assembly Language Program ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaanaasseeeeeeees 294 Chapter 17 PRCTIVITIGS sn ccsseadcanovaunsnannnateauacsecsatcawaieaautannaiecautessctuseaseisawatesneienanentesiaienedieaieteawniennndd 296 The QUA GrATIC FORMULA ac mhetete th a a aaa a a a a 296 BOX WIETE esea a a a a a a a te 299 Comparing Test Results Using Box Plots cccccccceccecsesteeeseseeeeeeeeesesseeaaaaaeseeeeeeeessenseaaaaaseeseenes 306 Graphing Piecewise Functions ceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeceeaaeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeessanaaaeneeeeeeeeeees 308 Grapning negualiti ES a a a 309 Solving a System of Nonlinear Equations cccccssssssssssssessssseeseeeseseseeeseeseeeseesseeeseseeseeeseeeeeees 310 Using a Program
31. Each Flash based graphing calculator has a unique product ID SEHF FROD A 3 02 37 E AA which you may need if software upgrades Hele education ki com JOu contact technical become available Support YOU can Also use this 14 digit ID to you can l register your calculator electronically a7 aa ae at education ti com or Pg y i identify your calculator in the event that it is lost or stolen Displaying the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE Menu Mem Mgmt Del displays the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE menu The two lines at the top report the total amount of available RAM RAM FREE and Archive ARC FREE memory By selecting menu items on this screen you can see the amount of memory each variable type is using This information can help you determine if you need to delete variables from memory to make room for new data such as programs or Apps To check memory usage follow these steps Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu Note The and JV in the top or bottom of the left column indicate that you can scroll mitten tisnt Del up or down to view more variable types ClrAllListes ad Se Archive 6 UMAR CHI ve r Reset 2 Select 2 Mem Mgmt Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE menu The TI 84 Plus expresses memory quantities in bytes Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 327 3 Select variable types from the list to display memory usage Notes Real List Y Vars and Prgm variable types n
32. If you trace a function beyond the left or right side of the screen the viewing window automatically pans to the left or right Xmin and Xmax are updated to correspond to the new viewing window Quick Zoom While tracing you can press to adjust the viewing window so that the cursor location becomes the center of the new viewing window even if the cursor is above or below the display This allows panning up and down After Quick Zoom the cursor remains in TRACE Leaving and Returning to TRACE When you leave and return to TRACE the trace cursor is displayed in the same location it was in when you left TRACE unless Smart Graph has replotted the graph Using TRACE in a Program On a blank line in the program editor press TRACE The instruction Trace is pasted to the cursor location When the instruction is encountered during program execution the graph is displayed with the trace cursor on the first selected function As you trace the cursor coordinate values are updated When you finish tracing the functions press to resume program execution Exploring Graphs with the ZOOM Instructions ZOOM Menu To display the ZOOM menu press ZOOM You can adjust the viewing window of the graph quickly in several ways All ZOOM instructions are accessible from programs ZOOM MEMORY Ls ZABOK Draws a box to define the viewing window 2 JOOMA Magnifies the graph around the cursor 32 ZOOM QUE Views more of a graph around the cursor A
33. In edit elements context you can attach a formula to a list name only if you switched to it from view names context Chapter 12 Statistics 192 View Names Context In view names context the entry line displays the list name and the list elements AEC 15 18 250006 To remove a list from the stat list editor press DEL Remaining lists shift to the left one column The list is not deleted from memory To insert a name in the current column press INS Remaining columns shift to the right one column Enter Name Context In enter name context the Name prompt is displayed in the entry line and alpha lock is on At the Name prompt you can create a new list name paste a list name from L1 to L6 from the keyboard or paste an existing list name from the LIST NAMES menu Chapter 11 The L symbol is not required at the Name prompt To leave enter name context without entering a list name press CLEAR The stat list editor switches to view names context STAT EDIT Menu STAT EDIT Menu To display the STAT EDIT menu press STAT EDIT CALC TESTs Le EOE Cas Displays the stat list editor Ze GOTAN Sorts a list in ascending order Bt GOFLO Sorts a list in descending order ae Ord Wad Egle Deletes all elements of a list 5 gt SeCUPEGLTTOr Stores specified lists in the stat list editor Chapter 12 Statistics 193 SortA SortD SortA sort ascending sorts list elements from low to high values SortD
34. SMe TT ese results 451465 4 rlib4rr9 O36 9422759 9165 2 m be H D biH z az 6 5 pe Il AIET AE Drawn results Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 226 1 PropZTest 1 PropZTest one proportion z test item 5 computes a test for an unknown proportion of successes prop It takes as input the count of successes in the sample x and the count of observations in the sample n 1 PropZTest tests the null hypothesis Ho prop pg against one of the alternatives below e Ha prop po prop p0 e Ha prop lt po prop lt p0 e Ha prop gt po prop gt p0 Input 1 FroreTest Oo 4 a Se 4644 7 crite FO Fo loulate Oraw Calculated 1 FrorzTast results Fror t JHE z 59510 F SrO 0963 n 4648 Boe Drawn results Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 22 2 PropZTest 2 PropZTest two proportion z test item 6 computes a test to compare the proportion of Successes p4 and p2 from two populations It takes as input the count of successes in each sample x4 and xg and the count of observations in each sample n4 and n gt 2 PropZTest tests the null hypothesis Ho P1 P2 using the pooled sample proportion Pp against one of the alternatives below e Hg P1 P2 p1 4p2 e Hg P1 lt P2 p1 lt p2 Ha p4 gt P2 p1 gt p2 Input Fror Test Fl Calculate Oraw Calculated results ni 6 eae Nz 62 Hew Drawn results Chapter 13 Inferenti
35. Te Fis dka Etin ALPHA F1 ALPHA F2 F4 Opens FRAC Opens FUNC OpensMTRX Opens YVAR menu menu menu menu Shortcut menus allow quick access to the following Chapter 1 Operating the TIl 84 Plus Silver Edition 6 e Templates to enter fractions and selected functions from the MATH MATH and MATH NUM menus as you would see them in a textbook Functions include absolute value summation numeric differentiation numeric integration and log base n e Matrix entry e Names of function variables from the VARS Y VARS menu Initially the menus are hidden To open a menu press plus the F key that corresponds to the menu that is F1 for FRAC F2 for FUNC F3 for MTRX or F4 for YVAR To select a menu item either press the number corresponding to the item or use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and then press ENTER All shortcut menu items except matrix templates can also be selected using standard menus For example you can choose the summation template from three places FUNC shortcut menu nDer ive FnInte WIBASEL MATH MATH menu HATH HUM CPs PRE 1r retMaxc AUer ie Pfrnilnte summation 2 LODEASE Bi Solver Catalog CATALOG FSUMMAaLION 2x Lar tang Tangent i tanh The shortcut menus are available to use where input is allowed If the calculator is in Classic mode or if a screen is displayed that does not support MathPrint display entries will
36. The sum of squares SS that make up the mean squares are I FactorSS gt n 3 3 i 1 I ErrorSS gt n 1 Sx 2 i 1 The degrees of freedom df that make up the mean squares are Factordf I 1 numeratordf for F I Errordf gt n 1 denominatordf for F i l where J number of populations x the mean of each list ee oS the standard deviation of each list ni the length of each list z the mean of all lists 2 SampF Test Below is the definition for the 2 SampF Test Sxl Sx2 Sample standard deviations having n 1 and n 1 degrees of freedom df respectively 2 F F statistic 1 Appendix B Reference Information 385 df x n 1 n 1 Fpdf with degrees of freedom df n 1 and n l p reported p value 2 SampF Test for the alternative hypothesis gt Ol p f x n 1 ny 1 dx F 2 SampF Test for the alternative hypothesis lt o e p f x n 1 ny 1 dx 0 2 SampF Test for the alternative hypothesis o 05 Limits must satisfy the following Lbnd s foun Lay 1 dx f f x n 1 n 1 dx 0 Ubnd where Lbnd Ubnd lower and upper limits The F statistic is used as the bound producing the smallest integral The remaining bound is selected to achieve the preceding integral s equality relationship 2 SampT Test The following is the definition for the 2 SampTTest The two sample statistic with degrees of freedo
37. To define a function from the home screen or a program begin on a blank line and follow these steps 1 Press enter the expression and then press again 2 Press STO Chapter 3 Function Graphing 68 3 Press F4 to display the YVAR shortcut menu move the cursor to the function name and then press ENTER expression gt Yn Teena Floti Flet Flote Dore 1B When the instruction is executed the Tl 84 Plus stores the expression to the designated variable Yn selects the function and displays the message Done Evaluating Y Functions in Expressions You can calculate the value of a Y function Yn at a specified value of X A list of values returns a list Yn value Y n valuel value2 value3 value n Floti Figke Flok Selecting and Deselecting Functions Selecting and Deselecting a Function You can select and deselect turn on and turn off a function in the Y editor A function is selected when the sign is highlighted The Tl 84 Plus graphs only the selected functions You can select any or all functions Y1 through Y9 and YO To select or deselect a function in the Y editor follow these steps 1 Press Y to display the Y editor 2 Move the cursor to the function you want to select or deselect 3 Press to place the cursor on the function s sign 4 Press to change the selection status When you enter or edit a function it is selected automatically When you c
38. When you press GRAPH the TI 84 Plus plots the selected parametric equations It evaluates the X and Y components for each value of T from Tmin to Tmax in intervals of Tstep and then plots each point defined by X and Y The window variables define the viewing window As the graph is plotted X Y and T are updated Smart Graph applies to parametric graphs Window Variables and Y VARS Menus You can perform these actions from the home screen or a program e Access functions by using the name of the X or Y component of the equation as a variable AITE J 94 69163r5 e Store parametric equations Sine Tac eait Floti Flot Flot one eitThsint 3 cose Ta sya War Boos To Done Set Fraftf i Floti Flok2 Flot Done dT oos 3 e Store values directly to window variables SH Tmax SEH Exploring Parametric Graphs Free Moving Cursor The free moving cursor in parametric graphing works the same as in Func graphing In RectGC format moving the cursor updates the values of X and Y if CoordOn format is selected X and Y are displayed In PolarGC format X Y R and 8 are updated if CoordOn format is selected R and 90 are displayed Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing 95 TRACE To activate TRACE press TRACE When TRACE is active you can move the trace cursor along the graph of the equation one Tstep at a time When you begin a trace the trace cursor is on the first selected function at Tmin If ExprOn i
39. ZDecimal Sets AX and AY to 0 1 5 ZSquare Sets equal size pixels on the X and Y axes 6 ZStandard Sets the standard window variables TE LPL Sets the built in trig window variables 8 ZInteger Sets integer values on the X and Y axes o gt ZOOmstat Sets the values for current stat lists O ZoomFit Fits YMin and YMax between XMin and XMax A ZQuadrantl Displays the portion of the graph that is in quadrant 1 Chapter 3 Function Graphing 80 ZOOM B Note You can adjust all window variables from the VARS menu by pressing 1 Window and Aa AE ZFracli 3 ZFracli 4 ZFracl 5 ZFracl 8 LE tac TO MEMORY Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 5 If possible Sets AX and AY to 4 Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 4 if possible Sets AX and AY to x Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 1 if possible Sets AX and AY to x Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of if possible Sets AX and AY to t Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of g if possible Sets AX and AY to d Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 5 if possible Sets AX and AY to 10 then selecting the variable from the X Y T 0 or UNIW menu Zoom Cursor When you select 1 ZBox 2 Zoom In or 3 Zoom Out the cursor on the graph becomes the zoom cursor a smaller v
40. absit Se C4139 gt Rect gt Rect display as rectangular displays a complex result in rectangular form It is valid only at the end of an expression It is not valid if the result is real complex result gt Rect returns atbi ee 24142155621 gt Polar Polar display as polar displays a complex result in polar form It is valid only at the end of an expression It is not valid if the result is real complex result gt Polar returns re i i 235 Polar E 1 4142135621 MATH PRB Probability Operations MATH PRB Menu To display the MATH PRB menu press 4 MATH NUM CPX PRB Le rand Random number generator Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 56 MATH NUM CPX PRB 2 APT Number of permutations Se TC Number of combinations 4A Factorial Dr andinki Random integer generator 6 randNorm Random from Normal distribution ke randBin Random from Binomial distribution 8 xrandIntNoRep Random ordered list of integers in a range rand rand random number generates and returns one or more random numbers gt 0 and lt 1 To generate a list of random numbers specify an integer gt 1 for numtrials number of trials The default for numtrials is 1 rand numtrials Note To generate random numbers beyond the range of 0 to 1 you can include rand in an expression For example rand5 generates a random number gt 0 and lt 5 With each rand execution the Tl 84 Plus gen
41. angle 16 61 370 rei complex polar 370 re i complex polar 17 50 Real 17 370 Sci notation 15 373 Seq graphing 16 373 Sequential graphing order 17 373 Simul graphing order 17 374 modified box plot type Lk 209 multiple entries on a line 12 multiplication 36 381 multiplicative inverse 37 N number of payment periods variable 253 263 n d 18 50 nCr number of combinations 57 366 nDeriv numerical derivative 40 366 negation 30 37 381 nonrecursive sequences 105 normal distribution probability normalcdf 242 366 Normal notation mode 15 366 normal probability plot type lt 210 normalcdf normal distribution probability 242 normalpdf probability density function 242 366 NormProbPlot plot type lt lt 210 not equal to 62 380 not Boolean operator 63 367 nPr permutations 57 367 npv net present value 258 367 numerical derivative 40 89 96 101 numerical integral 40 90 O Omit 338 351 one proportion z confidence interval 1 PropZInt 232 369 one proportion z test 1 PropZTest 227 369 one sample confidence interval TInterval 229 376 one variable statistics 1 Var Stats 200 377 or Boolean operator 63 367 order of evaluating equations 29 Output 142 291 367 Overwrite 338 350 Overwrite All 338 P P Y number of payment periods per year variable 253 263 P gt Rx P gt Ry polar to rectangular conversions 61 3
42. cosh hyperbolic arccosine 273 356 cosine cos 36 cosine cos 356 cross pixel mark 132 210 cube 39 380 cube root 39 cube root 380 cubic regression CubicReg 201 356 CubicReg cubic regression 201 356 cumSum cumulative sum 158 170 357 cumulative sum cumSum 158 170 cumulative sum cumSum 357 cursors 8 14 405 D Data input option 218 219 dayOfWk day of week 357 days between dates dbd 261 days between dates dbd 357 390 dbd days between dates 261 357 390 decimal mode float or fixed 16 decrement and skip DS lt 286 decrement and skip DS lt 358 definite integral 40 89 96 defragmenting 340 Degree angle mode 16 60 357 degrees notation 60 379 delete variable contents DelVar 287 357 deleting items from memory 329 DependAsk 116 118 357 DependAuto 116 118 357 derivative See numerical derivative 36 det determinant 155 357 determinant det 155 determinant det 357 DiagnosticOff 196 357 DiagnosticOn 196 357 diagnostics display mode r r2 R2 196 differentiation 42 89 96 101 dim dimension 155 169 357 dimensioning a list or matrix 155 169 357 Disp display 290 358 DispGraph display graph 291 358 display contrast 4 display cursors 8 Displaying the Clock Settings 9 DispTable display table 291 358 DISTR distributions menu 241 DISTR DRAW distributions drawing menu 248 distribution functions binomcdf 247 355 bino
43. displayed with everything pre selected To select items to send 1 Press LINK on the sending unit to display the LINK SEND menu Chapter 19 Communication Link 347 Select the menu item that describes the data type to send The corresponding SELECT screen is displayed Press 4 and to move the selection cursor gt to an item you want to select or deselect Press to select or deselect the item Selected names are marked with a m Note An asterisk to the left of an item indicates the item is archived 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select or deselect additional items Sending the Selected Items After you have selected items to send on the sending unit and set the receiving unit to receive follow these steps to transmit the items To set the receiving unit see Receiving Items 1 Press on the sending unit to display the TRANSMIT menu SELECT LARREA IHTransmi Confirm that Waiting is displayed on the receiving unit which indicates it is set to receive Press to select 1 Transmit The name and type of each item are displayed line by line on the sending unit as the item is queued for transmission and then on the receiving unit as each item is accepted PROGRAMI FEGH Receiving GOB 1 G0E PROGRAML FRG Li LIST G0B 1 G0E KL LIST Li LIST FEL LIST Lz LIST Done L gt LIST Done Note Items sent from the RAM of the sending unit are transmitted to the RAM of the receiving unit Item
44. from the DRAW POINTS menu 2 Move the cursor to the point you want to erase 3 Press to erase the point To continue erasing points repeat steps 2 and 3 To cancel Pt Off press CLEAR Changing Points with Pt Change To change toggle on or off a point on a graph follow these steps 1 Select 3 Pt Change point change from the DRAW POINTS menu 2 Move the cursor to the point you want to change 3 Press to change the point s on off status To continue changing points repeat steps 2 and 3 To cancel Pt Change press CLEAR Drawing Points from the Home Screen or a Program Pt On point on turns on the point at X x Y y Pt Off turns the point off Pt Change toggles the point on or off mark is optional it determines the point s appearance specify 1 2 or 3 where 1 dot default 2 U box 3 cross Pt On x y mark Pt Off x mark Pt Change x y PL One 2s 5329 Done o PL OneS 5 3 Done Pt One6 5 13 Done Note If you specified mark to turn on a point with Pt On you must specify mark when you turn off the point with Pt Off Pt Change does not have the mark option Drawing Pixels TI 84 Plus Pixels A pixel is a square dot on the TI 84 Plus display The Pxl pixel instructions let you turn on turn off or reverse a pixel dot on the graph using the cursor When you select a pixel instruction from Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 132 the DRAW POINTS menu the Tl 84 Plus return
45. lt 19100 sinh x x lt 5 x 10 cosh x 1 lt x lt 5x 10 tanh x rales ee x real mode 0 lt x lt 10100 yx complex mode Ix lt 10100 x 5 lt x lt 69 where x is a multiple of 5 Function Results Function Range of Result sin x tan x 90 to 90 or 1 2 to m 2 radians cos x 0 to 180 or 0 to m radians Appendix B Reference Information 399 Appendix C Service and Warranty Information Texas Instruments Support and Service For general information Home Page education ti com KnowledgeBase and _ education ti com support e mail inquiries Phone 800 TI CARES 800 842 2737 For U S Canada Mexico Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands only International education ti com international information For product hardware service Customers in the U S Canada Mexico Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands Always contact Texas Instruments Customer Support before returning a product for service All other customers Refer to the leaflet enclosed with this product hardware or contact your local Texas Instruments retailer distributor Battery Information When to Replace the Batteries The TI 84 Plus uses five batteries four AAA alkaline batteries and one button cell backup battery The backup battery provides auxiliary power to retain memory while you replace the AAA batteries When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level the TI 84 Plus Displays this message whe
46. minimum value returns the smaller of valuweA and valueB or the smallest element in Jist If listA and istB are compared min returns a list of the smaller of each pair of elements If ist and value are compared min compares each element in Jist with value max maximum value returns the larger of valueA and valueB or the largest element in Jisz If listA and istB are compared max returns a list of the larger of each pair of elements If dist and value are compared max compares each element in J ist with value min valueA valueB max valueA valueB min ist max ist min JistA listB max istA listB min Jist value max ist value Note min and max also are available on the LIST MATH menu Icm gcd Icm returns the least common multiple of valued and valueB both of which must be nonnegative integers When Jist4 and listB are specified Icm returns a list of the least common multiple of each pair of elements If dist and value are specified Icm finds the least common multiple of each element in ist and value gcd returns the greatest common divisor of valueA and valueB both of which must be nonnegative integers When istA and listB are specified gcd returns a list of the greatest common divisor of each pair of elements If Zist and value are specified gcd finds the greatest common divisor of each element in ist and value Icm valueA valueB gcd valueA valueB Icm istA listB gcd istA listB Ilcm ist valu
47. modulus With one list SortA and SortD sort the elements of istname and update the list in memory SortA istname SortD listname Chapter 11 Lists 168 With two or more lists SortA and SortD sort keylistname and then sort each dependlist by placing its elements in the same order as the corresponding elements in keylistname All lists must have the same dimension SortA keylistname dependlistl dependlist2 dependlist n SortD keylistname dependlistl dependlist2 dependlist n 15 6 474L4 SortAcLlasbs3 io 6 43 Done f 1 2 354L5 Ly lt 1 2 Si i4 5 GF Ls aa 1 2 Note e Inthe example 5 is the first element in L4 and 1 is the first element in L5 After SortA L4 L5 5 becomes the second element of L4 and likewise 1 becomes the second element of L5 e SortA and SortD are the same as SortA and SortD on the STAT EDIT menu Chapter 12 e You cannot sort a locked list Using dim to Find List Dimensions dim dimension returns the length number of elements of Jisz dim ist Go dared al Using dim to Create a List You can use dim with to create a new Jistname with dimension length from 1 to 999 The elements are zeros length gt dim listname tH g AS Using dim to Redimension a List You can use dim with to redimension an existing istname to dimension length from 1 to 999 e The elements in the old istname that are within the new dimension are not changed e Extra list element
48. not a copy of an existing program name Press to complete the sequence The sequence of the arguments should be as follows AsmComp premASM1 prgmASM2 Press to compile your program and generate the output program Chapter 16 Programming 295 Chapter 17 Activities The Quadratic Formula Note This example uses MathPrint mode for real answers and Classic mode for non real complex results You can also use the Polynomial Root Finder Simultaneous Equation Solver application to solve these types of problems with a quick set up This application comes preloaded on your Tl 84 Plus and can be downloaded from education ti com Use the quadratic formula to solve the quadratic equations 2x 11x 14 0 and 2x 6x 5 0 Graphing the Functions Before you begin look at the graphs of the functions to see the approximate locations of the solutions 1 Press Y to display the Y editor Floti Platz Flok 2 Press 2 X T 9 n x2 11 14 for Y1 and then press ENTER 3 Press 2 6 5 for Y2 riett Flote Piot Wy B2 118 i4 4 Press and select 4 ZDecimal The graph of the functions displays You can see that the graph of the first function 2x 11x 14 0 crosses the x axis so it has a real solution The graph of the second function does not cross the x axis so it has a complex solution Chapter 17 Activities 296 Entering a Calculation Begin with the equation 2x 11x 14 0 1 Press 2
49. oO template or out of the template If you press during an insertion the cursor becomes an underlined A A If you press during an insertion the underlined cursors becomes an underlined 1 Note If you highlight a small character such as a colon or a comma and then press ALPHA or 2nd the cursor does not change because the cursor width is too narrow Graphs and editors sometimes display additional cursors which are described in other chapters Interchangeable Faceplates The TI 84 Plus Silver Edition has interchangeable faceplates that let you customize the appearance of your unit To purchase additional faceplates refer to the TI Online Store at education ti com Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 8 Removing a Faceplate 1 Lift the tab at the bottom edge of the faceplate away from the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition case 2 Carefully lift the faceplate away from the unit until it releases Be careful not to damage the faceplate or the keyboard Installing New Faceplates 1 Align the top of the faceplate in the corresponding grooves of the T1 84 Plus Silver Edition case 2 Gently click the faceplate into place Do not force 3 Make sure you gently press each of the grooves to ensure the faceplate is installed properly See the diagram for proper groove placement Using the Clock Use the clock to set the time and date select the clock display format and turn the clock on and off The c
50. r or the coefficient of determination r On displays a statistical regression calculation with the correlation coefficient r and the coefficient of determination r2 as appropriate Stat Wizards On Off On Selection of menu items in STAT CALC DISTR DISTR DISTR DRAW and seq in LIST OPS displays a screen which provides syntax help wizard for the entry of required and optional arguments into the command or function The function or command will paste the entered arguments to the Home Screen history or to most other locations where the cursor is available for input Some calculations will compute directly from the wizard If a command or function is accessed from CATALOG the command or function will paste without wizard support Run the Catalog Help application APPS for more syntax help when needed Off The function or command will paste to the cursor location with no syntax help wizard Set Clock Use the clock to set the time date and clock display formats Using TI 84 Plus Variable Names Variables and Defined Items On the TI 84 Plus you can enter and use several types of data including real and complex numbers matrices lists functions stat plots graph databases graph pictures and strings The Tl 84 Plus uses assigned names for variables and other items saved in memory For lists you also can create your own five character names Variable Type Names Real numbers including A B Z 9 fraction
51. stored to variable and the program resumes execution Input ext variable Input Strz variable Program Output PEOGRAM HINFUT ee neut A 72 T Y allea n Was eet Ee e ai DATA 4 5 62 Oise ita Oi 14 6 5b Dise Yitlia cia ie 14 l Dise Vit DATA Done Chapter 16 Programming 289 Note When a program prompts for input of lists and Yn functions during execution you must include the braces around the list elements and quotation marks around the expressions Prompt During program execution Prompt displays each variable one at a time followed by At each prompt enter a value or expression for each variable and then press ENTER The values are stored and the program resumes execution Prompt variableA variableB variable n Program Output PROGRAM WI HOOb Prarll THOOb Prompt smin AMin lG Promet sma AMax 718 Prompt mir mine 73 Prompt Ymax Ymas 73 Done Note Y functions are not valid with Prompt Displaying the Home Screen Disp display without a value displays the home screen To view the home screen during program execution follow the Disp instruction with a Pause instruction Disp Displaying Values and Messages Disp with one or more values displays the value of each Disp valueA valueB valueC value n e If value is a variable the current value is displayed e f value is an expression it is evaluated and the result is displayed on
52. 0 and P Y must be set to 1 1 Press to select 1 Finance from the APPLICATIONS menu 2 Press to select 1 TVM Solver from the CALC VARS menu The TVM Solver is displayed 3 Enter the data N 7 PV 1250 PMT 0 FV 2000 P Y 1 C Y 12 4 Move the curstor to I and press SOLVE You need to look for an interest rate of 6 73 to grow 1250 to 2000 in 7 years Using the TVM Solver Using the TVM Solver The TVM Solver displays the time value of money TVM variables Given four variable values the TVM Solver solves for the fifth variable The FINANCE VARS menu section describes the five TVM variables N 1 PV PMT and FV and P Y and CIY PMT END BEGIN in the TVM Solver corresponds to the FINANCE CALC menu items Pmt_End payment at the end of each period and Pmt_Bgn payment at the beginning of each period To solve for an unknown TVM variable follow these steps 1 Press to display the TVM Solver The screen below shows the default values with the fixed decimal mode set to two decimal places Chapter 14 Applications 293 A zp 8 8 PC Ji BEGIH A PS PMT Fil PAY bey PMT 2 Enter the known values for four TVM variables Note Enter cash inflows as positive numbers and cash outflows as negative numbers 3 Enter a value for P Y which automatically enters the same value for C Y if P Y C Y enter a unique value for C Y Select END or BEGIN to specify the payment method Place the cu
53. 1 Press MODE Press D to select Par mode Press gt to select Simul for simultaneous graphing of all three parametric i i i B DOT equations in this example REAL Jathi a 2 Press JE EI EI DI to go to the Format TEACHT Graph screen Press H AAD to select MA ERENT CLASSIC ned ANSHERS Gi DEC FRAC AxesOff which turns off the axes E PEE n TES STAT OLAGhOZTIC of STAHTHICHRD Q OFF SET CLOCK babe ee Sii Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing 91 10 11 Press Y Press 30 25 ANGLE 1 to select to define X1T in terms of T Press 30 25 2nd ANGLE 1 DJ Z F1 1 to select n d 9 8 gt 2 gt to define Y1T The vertical component vector is defined by X2T and Y2T Press 0 to define X2T Press F4 to define Y2T The horizontal component vector is defined by X3T and Y3T Press F4 to define X3T Press 0 to define Y3T Press 4 4 4 to change the graph style to for X3T and Y3T Press 4 to change the graph style to for X2T and Y2T Press a to change the graph style to for X1T and Y1T These keystrokes assume that all graph styles were set to originally Press WINDOW Enter these values for the window variables Tmin 0 Xmin 10 Ymin 5 Tmax 5 Xmax 100 Ymax 15 Tstep 1 Xscl 50 Yscl 10 Note You can check all WINDOW variables including AX and AY by pressing 1 Window Press GRAPH The plotting action simultaneously shows the ball i
54. 267 ABCO 1234 EFGH PEro ABCO 1234 EFGH Note A string must be enclosed in quotation marks The quotation marks do not count as string characters Storing Strings to String Variables String Variables The Tl 84 Plus has 10 variables to which you can store strings You can use string variables with string functions and instructions To display the VARS STRING menu follow these steps 1 Press to display the VARS menu Move the cursor to 7 String WARS Wario OOM BDE Picture Statistics lable MO LP E i a gt p 10 2 Press to display the STRING secondary menu Storing a String to a String Variable To store a string to a string variable follow these steps 1 Press enter the string and press 2 Press STO 3 Press 7 to display the VARS STRING menu 4 Select the string variable from Str1 to Str9 or Str0 to which you want to store the string Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 268 The string variable is pasted to the current cursor location next to the store symbol gt 5 Press to store the string to the string variable On the home screen the stored string is displayed on the next line without quotation marks HELLO 5tr 2 HELL Displaying the Contents of a String Variable To display the contents of a string variable on the home screen select the string variable from the VARS STRING menu and then press ENTER Th
55. 356 turn clock on ClockOn 356 turning on and off axes 5 calculator 3 coordinates 75 expressions 76 functions 70 grid 75 labels 76 points 131 stat plots 70 212 tvm_FV future value 257 376 tvm_l interest rate 376 tvm_I interest rate 256 tvm_N payment periods 256 376 tvm_Pmt payment amount 256 376 tvm_PV present value 256 376 two proportion z confidence interval 2 PropZInt 232 369 two proportion z test 2 PropZTest 228 369 two sample F Test formula 385 two sample test formula 386 two variable statistics 2 Var Stats 200 377 U u sequence function 103 Un d 18 50 UnArchive 21 330 377 ungrouping 336 user variables 383 uv uvAxes axes format 107 377 uw uwAxes axes format 107 377 V v sequence function 103 value operation on a graph 87 variables complex 19 displaying and storing values 21 equation solver 43 graph databases 19 graph pictures 19 independent dependent 118 list 19 162 matrix 19 145 real 19 recalling values 21 solver editor 43 Statistical 206 string 268 test and interval output 240 types 19 user and system 20 383 VARS and Y VARS menus 27 variance of a list variance 176 variance of a list variance 377 variance variance of a list 176 377 VARS menu GDB 27 Picture 27 Statistics 27 String 27 Table 27 Window 27 Zoom 2 7 Vertical draw line 125 377 viewing window 73 vw uvAxes axes format 107 377 Ww w se
56. 60 90 and so on 1 Press to display the mode screen Press gt to select Degree mode Press gt to select Par parametric graphing mode SEQUENTIAL SIMUL Press gt D to select G T graph RRA arbi rerai FULL HORIZ table split screen mode INERT 4 Press D gt to display the format screen Press gt to select ExprOff Press Y to display the Y editor for Par graphing Fisti Fist Fists mode Press to store cos T fitBcos T f YitBsiniT to X1T Press to store sin T Wop to Y1T Press to display the window editor Enter these values for the window variables Tmin 0 Xmin 2 3 Ymin 2 5 Tmax 360 Xmax 2 3 Ymax 2 5 Tstep 15 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 Press TRACE On the left the unit circle is graphed parametrically in Degree mode and the trace cursor is activated When T 0 from the graph trace coordinates you can see from the table on the right that the value of X1T cos T is 1 and Y1T sin T is 0 Press gt to move the cursor to the next 15 angle increment As you trace around the circle in steps of 15 an approximation of the standard value for each angle is highlighted in the table Press TBLSET and change Indpnt to Ask Chapter 9 Split Screen 137 7 Press TABLE to make the table portion of the split screen active Using Split Screen Setting a Split Screen Mode To set a split screen mode press
57. CLEAR Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 129 Placing Text on a Graph from the Home Screen or a Program Text places on the current graph the characters comprising value which can include Tl 84 Plus functions and instructions The top left corner of the first character is at pixel row column where row is an integer between 0 and 57 and column is an integer between 0 and 94 Both row and column can be expressions a ro s944 CO Paty eB a Text vow column value value value can be text enclosed in quotation marks or it can be an expression The Tl 84 Plus will evaluate an expression and display the result with up to 10 characters T1 2n5 2n t6 Classic Split Screen On a Horiz split screen the maximum value for vow is 25 On a G T split screen the maximum value for row is 45 and the maximum value for column is 46 Using Pen to Draw on a Graph Using Pen to Draw on a Graph Pen draws directly on a graph only You cannot execute Pen from the home screen or a program You can capture the image you created using Tl Connect software and save it to your computer for homework or teaching material or store it as a picture file on your TI 84 Plus see Storing Graph Pictures below To draw on a displayed graph follow these steps 1 Select A Pen from the DRAW menu 2 Place the cursor on the point where you want to begin drawing Press to turn on the pen Move the cursor As you move the cursor you
58. DMS t MODE Dot 2nd DRAW DRAW 6 DrawF Draws the inverse of expression by plotting X values on the 2nd DRAW y axis and Y values on the x axis Decrements variable by 1 skips commandaA if variable lt value Returns e Returns e raised to power Returns a list of e raised to a list of powers Returns value times 10 to the exponent Returns ist elements times 10 to the exponent Returns matrix elements times 10 to the exponent DRAW 8 Drawlinv t PRGM CTL B DS lt e 2nd e 2nd ex 2nd EE 2nd EE 2nd EE Appendix A Functions and Instructions 358 Function or Instruction Arguments gt Eff nominal rate compounding periods Else See lf Then Else End Eng Equ gt String Y var Strn expr string ExpReg X istname Ylistname freqlist regequ ExprOff ExprOn Fcdf owerbound upperbound numerator df denominator df gt F lt 4 gt D Fill value matrixname Fill value listname Fix Float Result Computes the effective interest rate Identifies end of For Ilf Then Else Repeat or While loop Sets engineering display mode Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 1 Finance CALC C Eff t CTL 7 End t Eng Converts the contents of a Y var to a string and stores it in 2nd CATALOG Str Converts string to an expression and executes it Fits an exponential regression model to X istname and Ylistname with
59. ENTER Indpnt Ask The table is empty enter values for the independent variable To Depend Ask generate a value for a dependent variable move the cursor to that cell and press ENTER Setting Up the Table from the Home Screen or a Program To store a value to TblStart ATbl or TblInput from the home screen or a program select the variable name from the VARS TABLE secondary menu TbliInput is a list of independent variable values in the current table When you press TBLSET in the program editor you can select IndpntAuto IndpntAsk DependAuto and DependAsk Chapter 7 Tables 116 Defining the Dependent Variables Defining Dependent Variables from the Y Editor In the Y editor enter the functions that define the dependent variables Only functions that are selected in the Y editor are displayed in the table The current graphing mode is used In parametric mode you must define both components of each parametric equation Chapter 4 Editing Dependent Variables from the Table Editor To edit a selected Y function from the table editor follow these steps 1 Press TABLE to display the table then press gt or to move the cursor to a dependent variable column 2 Press 4 until the cursor is on the function name at the top of the column The function is displayed on the bottom line 4 Press or The new values are calculated The table and the Y function are updated automatically Note You also
60. Fit item D performs a test to confirm that sample data is from a population that conforms to a specified distribution For example a GOF can confirm that the sample data came from a normal distribution In the example list 1 16 25 22 8 10 list 2 16 2 21 6 16 2 14 4 12 6 The Chi square j bseryeydiLi Goodness of Fit Expected L input screen Calculate Craw Calculated GZGUF Test Note Press gt gt to select TESTS Press several times to select D X GOF Test Press ENTER To enter data for df degree of freedom press Type 4 results 22951499912 995107739 B 1 6H2464 Drawn results 225 O91 F 1995 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 234 2 SampF Test 2 SampF Test two sample F test item E computes an F test to compare two normal population standard deviations o4 and c2 The population means and standard deviations are all unknown 2 SampF Test which uses the ratio of sample variances Sx1 Sx2 tests the null hypothesis Ho 64 05 against one of the alternatives below e Ha 64409 01 402 s Fi 04 lt 09 01 lt 02 e Ha 64 gt 09 01 gt 02 In the example SAMP4 7 4 18 17 3 5 1 10 11 2 SAMP5 1 12 1 3 3 5 5 2 11 1 3 Data Stats Input em P Desk faces Gets S115 F432 nisi re J FHH6B 9335 T gl i707 Poz Pale ate Draw Calculate Oraw Calculated results hz 11 66
61. For this example YYBtedt tas Xmin 4 5 Xmax 4 5 Ymin 0 Ymax 4 tcdf tcdf computes the Student z distribution probability between owerbound and upperbound for the specified df degrees of freedom which must be gt 0 tcdf owerbound upperbound df togt i 2 5 183 960 465644 x pdf y pdf computes the probability density function pdf for the Nea chi square distribution at a specified x value df degrees of freedom must be an integer gt 0 To plot the y distribution paste 1 pdf to the Y editor The probability density function pdf is 1 df 2 df 2 1 x 2 fa ex raya gt 0 Kx Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 244 X pdf x d Flaki Flot Flot Note For this example STA BXe edt oa Bo Xmin 0 Xmax 30 Ymin 02 Ymax 132 y cdf 1 cdf computes the y chi square distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified df degrees of freedom which must be an integer gt 0 y cdf lowerbound upperbound df Mecdtth 19 023 9 ER J lower 9 foe 19661 oe 19 8235 Paste F pdf Fpdf computes the probability density function pdf for the F distribution at a specified x value numerator df degrees of freedom and denominator df must be integers gt 0 To plot the F distribution paste F pdf to the Y editor The probability density function pdf is T n d 2 ny ni2 1 n d 2 I
62. It tests the null hypothesis Ho y u o against one of the alternatives below Ha WAU 40 Ha u lt uo u lt u0 Ha u gt uo u gt u0 In the example L1 299 4 297 7 301 298 9 300 2 297 Data Input thet ee Stats Mot 3h med Listli Frei H FLLO Heo Calculate Oraw Calculated results HX SAR AR z 7633 n 6 BAHH Drawn results Stats Inet Oata HELIS Mo SAH mes eae TRARA AAA w r EE HO Fo Calculate Draw HX SHE HHHH z r293 F 2156 x 299 0533 n 6 BAHH Note All STAT TESTS examples assume a fixed decimal mode setting of 4 Chapter 1 If you set the decimal mode to Float or a different fixed decimal setting your output may differ from the output in the examples Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 223 T Test T Test one sample test item 2 performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean u when the population standard deviation o is unknown It tests the null hypothesis Ho u uo against one of the alternatives below Ha u uo u u0 Ha u lt po u lt u0 Ha u gt uo u gt u0 In the example TEST 91 9 97 8 111 4 122 3 105 4 95 Data Stats Input Sae Stats nee hats Stats 214 145 ist TEST 163 JEEG G Frey 1 ae 11 466937 8 TE SHO Feo nE Calculate Dram Hi lt PO HO Ca culate Draw Calculated results Drawn results Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Dis
63. Li Li a b 1 355333335 MathPrint Diasgnosticlt ft one Linkedtaxths Lis L il Classic Chapter 12 Statistics 197 STAT CALC Menu STAT CALC Menu To display the STAT CALC menu press gt EDIT Q W D O o o u 0O a w N am IVar Stats Zar o EATS Med Med LinReg axtb QuadReg CubicReg Q artkeg LinReg a bx LnReg ExpReg PwrReg Logistic SinReg Manual Linear Fit CALC Calculates 1 variable statistics Calculates 2 variable statistics Calculates a median median line Fits a linear model to data Fits a quadratic model to data Fits a cubic model to data Fits a quartic model to data Fits a linear model to data Fits a logarithmic model to data Fits an exponential model to data Fits a power model to data Fits a logistic model to data Fits a sinusoidal model to data Fits a linear equation interactively to a scatter plot For each STAT CALC menu item if neither X istname nor Ylistname is specified then the default list names are L1 and L2 If you do not specify freqlist then the default is 1 occurrence of each list element STAT WIZARDS in STAT CALC When STAT WIZARDS is set to ON in MODE a wizard will open by default The wizard will prompt for required and optional arguments In STAT CALC select Calculate to paste the popu lated command to home screen and display the results to a temporary view Note After a calculation statistical variables are available in
64. Note 1E99 and 1E99 specify infinity If you want to view the area left of upperbound for example specify owerbound 1E99 ShadeNorm ShadeNorm draws the normal density function specified by mean u and standard deviation o and shades the area between l owerbound and upperbound The defaults are u 0 and o 1 ShadeNorm lowerbound upperbound 0 en 56 Note For this example Shadenorn AP TEP Xmin 55 lower 6H 63 6 Xmax 72 lassic Oe Ymin 05 Ymax 2 AFed 7 56859 Towepi UF 66 Shade_t Shade_t draws the density function for the Student z distribution specified by df degrees of freedom and shades the area between Jowerbound and upperbound Shade_t owerbound upperbound df Shade_te 1 1e99 Note For this example Shade_h 4 08 Xmin 3 lower i HFFeriledd Classic Xmax 3 df 4 Ymin 15 Ora Ymax 5 AF d 81s05 df Toe 1 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 249 Shadey Shadey draws the density function for the y chi square distribution specified by df degrees of freedom and shades the area between owerbound and upperbound Shadey lowerbound upperbound df Shadexe A gt 4 168 ifn Note For this example Xmin 0 Classic Xmax 35 Ymin 025 Ymax 1 AFed 08eefs drain Towel UF 4 ShadeF ShadeF draws the density function for the F distribution specified by numerator df degrees of freedom and denominator df and sha
65. Plus to a TI 73 with data other than real numbers pics real lists L1 through L6 or named lists with 0 as part of the name Although a transmission error does not occur these two conditions may prevent successful transmission You try to use Get with a graphing calculator instead of a CBL 2 system or CBR system You try to use GetCalc with a TI 83 instead of a TI 84 Plus or Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition Chapter 19 Communication Link 352 Insufficient Memory in Receiving Unit e During transmission if the receiving unit does not have sufficient memory to receive an item the Memory Full menu is displayed on the receiving unit e To skip this item for the current transmission select 1 Omit Transmission resumes with the next item e To cancel the transmission and exit receive mode select 2 Quit Chapter 19 Communication Link 353 Appendix A Functions and Instructions Functions return a value list or matrix You can use functions in an expression Instructions initiate an action Some functions and instructions have arguments Optional arguments and accompanying commas are enclosed in brackets For details about an item including argument descriptions and restrictions turn to the page listed on the right side of the table From the CATALOG you can paste any function or instruction to the home screen or to a command line in the program editor However some functions and instructions are not valid on the home sc
66. Problem Graph the inequality 0 4x 3x 5 lt 0 2x 4 Use the TEST menu operations to explore the values of X where the inequality is true and where it is false Note You can also investigate graphing inequalities using the Inequality Graphing application The application is pre loaded on your Tl 84 Plus and can be downloaded from education ti com Procedure 1 Press MODE Select Dot Simul and the default settings Setting Dot mode changes all graph style icons to dot in the Y editor 2 Press y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the left side of the inequality as Y4 and the right side as Y5 Floti Flokz Flot i ayas ys YB 4 235 eB M oe g 3 Enter the statement of the inequality as Y6 This function evaluates to 1 if true or 0 if false Floki Flokz Flok Ma Y Mss MuB 47 35 WeB ote eB Yac Yc Note You can use the YVARS shortcut menu to paste Y4 and Y5 in the Y editor 4 Press 6 to graph the inequality in the standard window Chapter 17 Activities 309 Press to move to Y6 Then press and gt to trace the inequality observing the value of Y n 62be9ree IY i When you trace you can see that Y 1 indicates that Y4 lt Y5 is true and that Y 0 indicates that Y4 lt Y5 is false Press Y Turn off Y4 Y5 and Y6 Enter equations to graph only the inequality gS a oat o eee gp Sad We BY ekg EB eke Press TRACE Notice that the v
67. Text t FORMAT Time 2nd CATALOG timeCnv t TESTS 8 Tinterval t TESTS 8 Tinterval 2nd DISTR DISTR 5 tpdf TRACE t TESTS 2 T Test t TESTS 2 T Test 1 Finance CALC 6 tvm_FV 1 Finance CALC 3 tvm_I 1 Finance CALC 5 tvm_N 1 Finance CALC 2 tvm_Pmt 1 Finance CALC 4 tvm_PV Appendix A Functions and Instructions 376 Function or Instruction Arguments UnArchive Un d uvAxes uwAxes 1 Var Stats X istname fregqlist 2 Var Stats X istname Ylistname freqlist variance is freqlist Vertical x vwAxes Web While condition commands End command valueA xor valueB ZBox ZDecimal ZFrac 1 2 Result Moves the specified variables from the user data archive memory to RAM To archive variables use Archive Displays results as a mixed number if applicable Sets sequence graphs to plot u n on the x axis and v n on the y axis Sets sequence graphs to plot u n on the x axis and w n on the y axis Performs one variable analysis on the data in _X istname with frequency freglist Performs two variable analysis on the data in X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist Returns the variance of the elements in ist with frequency freqlist Draws a vertical line at x Sets sequence graphs to plot v n on the x axis and w n on the y axis Sets sequence graphs to trace as webs Executes commands
68. The seed value stored to the rand function controls the values Chapter 2 randM rows columns H r and randhi augment augment appends matrixA to matrixB as new columns matrixA and matrixB both must have the same number of rows augment matrixA matrixB Matrlist Matrlist matrix stored to list fills each Jistname with elements from each column in matrix Matrblist ignores extra listname arguments Likewise Matrblist ignores extra matrix columns Matrblist matrix listnameA listname n A 436 Mater list lt lA 3 Dore ie Chapter 10 Matrices 157 Matprlist also fills a distname with elements from a specified column in matrix To fill a list with a specific column from matrix you must enter column after matrix Matrblist matrix column listname A Li 1 2 436 Materlist lt fAl 3 13 Gs Done E List matr List gt matr lists stored to matrix fills matrixname column by column with the elements from each zist If dimensions of all ists are not equal List matr fills each extra matrixname row with 0 Complex lists are not valid List matr ist4 ist n matrixname cumSum cumSum returns cumulative sums of the elements in matrix starting with the first element Each element is the cumulative sum of the column from top to bottom cumSum matrix 0 Row Operations MATRX MATH menu items A through F are row operations You can use a row operation
69. This removes lists from stat list editor columns 1 through 20 and then stores lists L1 through L6 in columns 1 through 6 Note Removing lists from the stat list editor does not delete them from memory 3 Press 1 to select 1 Edit from the STAT EDIT menu The stat list editor is displayed If elements are stored in L1 and L2 press 4 to move the cursor onto L1 and then press gt 4 to clear both lists Press to move the rectangular cursor back to the first row in L41 Chapter 12 Statistics 178 4 Press 6 5 to store the first pendulum string length 6 5 cm in L1 The rectangular cursor moves to the next row Repeat this step to enter each of the 12 string length values in the table 5 Press gt to move the rectangular cursor to the first row in L2 Press 51 to store the first time measurement 51 sec in L2 The rectangular cursor moves to the next row Repeat this step to enter each of the 12 time values in the table 6 Press y to display the Y editor If necessary press to clear the function Y1 As necessary press 4 ENTER and gt to turn off Plot1 Plot2 and Plot3 from the top line of the Y editor Chapter 3 As necessary press 4 and to deselect functions 7 Press STAT PLOT 1 to select 1 Plot1 from the STAT PLOTS menu The stat plot editor is displayed for plot 1 8 Press to select On which turns on plot 1 aE Press 7 to select scatter plot Press Wo f
70. Time axes format Press WINDOW and set the variables as shown below nMin 0 Xmin 0 Ymin 0 nMax 400 Xmax 400 Ymax 300 PlotStart 1 Xscl 100 Yscl 100 PlotStep 1 Press to graph the sequence Press gt to individually trace the number of rabbits u z and foxes v z over time n Note Press a number and then press to jump to a specific n value month while in TRACE U Ulys Lek 08 Ley UZUL i kii 08 ey v i in a aaia nao SLB Poise a Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 112 Press FORMAT gt gt ENTER to select uv axes format Press WINDOW and change these variables as shown below Xmin 84 Ymin 25 Xmax 237 Ymax 75 Xscl 50 Yscl 10 8 Press TRACE Trace both the number of rabbits X and the number of foxes Y through 400 generations TETE PETAT TETA Note When you press TRACE the equation for u is displayed in the top left corner Press 4 or to see the equation for v vo s1 Comparing TI 84 Plus and TI 82 Sequence Variables Sequences and Window Variables Refer to the table if you are familiar with the TI 82 It shows Tl 84 Plus sequences and sequence window variables as well as their Tl 82 counterparts TI 84 Plus TI 82 In the Y editor u n Un u nMin UnStart window variable v n Vn v nMin VnStart window variable w n not available w nMin not available In the window editor nMin nStart nMax nMax PlotStart nMin PlotStep not available Chapter 6 Sequence
71. Xmax so that the mean u falls between them and then select 0 ZoomFit from the ZOOM menu normalcdf normalcdf computes the normal distribution probability between owerbound and upperbound for the specified mean u and standard deviation o The defaults are u 0 and o 1 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 242 normalcdf owerbound upperbound 0 normaloedf Levos norma Tce SEs Sls 2 lower 1 c99 691 4624678 eee La iT Paste invNorm invNorm computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area under the normal distribution curve specified by mean u and standard deviation o It calculates the x value associated with an area to the left of the x value O lt area lt 1 must be true The defaults are u 0 and o 1 invNorm area U 0 InvAornm 6914624 inv aE m Bris da ares _ 691467467 36 HRRRRRE 4 LAE So oss Paste invT invT computes the inverse cumulative Student t probability function specified by Degree of Freedom df for a given Area under the curve invT area df tpdf tpdf computes the probability density function pdf for the Student z distribution at a specified x value df degrees of freedom must be gt 0 To plot the Student z distribution paste tpdf to the Y editor The probability density function pdf is ax o A ra eee P df 2 Jndf Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 243 tpdf x d eee Note
72. You can enter a program name on a command line in either of two ways e Press 4 to display the PRGM EXEC menu and select the name of the program prgmname is pasted to the current cursor location on a command line Chapter 16 Programming 293 e Select prgm from the PRGM CTL menu and then enter the program name prgmname When prgmname is encountered during execution the next command that the program executes is the first command in the second program It returns to the subsequent command in the first program when it encounters either Return or the implied Return at the end of the second program Program Output PROGRAM VOLCYL Prom VoLOYL feed azoh BS PIlnreut H Fr SmMAREAC IR 62 83183387 AeH 4 EI DisF Subroutine ft PROGRAM AREACIF Dr2 F ntk A Return Notes about Calling Programs Variables are global label used with Goto and Lbl is local to the program where it is located abe in one program is not recognized by another program You cannot use Goto to branch to a label in another program Return exits a subroutine and returns to the calling program even if it is encountered within nested loops Running an Assembly Language Program You can run programs written for the Tl 84 Plus in assembly language Typically assembly language programs run much faster and provide greater control than the keystroke programs that you write with the built in program editor Note Because an assembly
73. a list is displayed When you use a list with a function the function must be valid for every element in the list In graphing an invalid element such as 1 in y 1 0 1 is ignored tio 1N This returns an error Floti Flote Fiet This graphs X 1 and X j 0 but skips asii 6 13 X 1 When you use two lists with a two argument function the dimension of each list must be the same The function is evaluated for corresponding elements Chapter 11 Lists 167 Til 2 3sti4d 5 63 fo r Os e When you use a list and a value with a two argument function the value is used with each element in the list Til 2 33 4 fo 6 r LIST OPS Menu LIST OPS Menu To display the LIST OPS menu press LIST gt NAMES OPS MATH i JOOPA Sorts lists in ascending order 2s BOLE Sorts lists in descending order 3r 2 6g Sets the list dimension A cs a Fills all elements with a constant 5 seq Creates a sequence 6 cumSum Returns a list of cumulative sums Ts ABELSe4 Returns difference of successive elements Ss Delecty Selects specific data points 9 augment Concatenates two lists O List matr Stores a list to a matrix A Matrdlist Stores a matrix to a list Be L Designates the list name data type SortA SortD SortA sort ascending sorts list elements from low to high values SortD sort descending sorts list elements from high to low values Complex lists are sorted based on magnitude
74. access n d from the FRAC shortcut menu ALPHA F1 1 n and d can be real numbers or expressions but may not contain complex numbers MathPrint Classic 4 5 Entering and Using Complex Numbers Complex Number Modes The TI 84 Plus displays complex numbers in rectangular form and polar form To select a complex number mode press MODE and then select either of the two modes e atbi rectangular complex mode e re4 i polar complex mode Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 50 SCI EMG 4 HEnT On the Tl 84 Plus complex numbers can be stored to variables Also complex numbers are valid list elements In Real mode complex number results return an error unless you entered a complex number as input For example in Real mode In 1 returns an error in atbi mode In 1 returns an answer Real mode atb mode Irie 100E Ine 10E 4 4 ERR HOHREAL AHS lne 13 Pat it S 14159276541 Boto Entering Complex Numbers Complex numbers are stored in rectangular form but you can enter a complex number in rectangular form or polar form regardless of the mode setting The components of complex numbers can be real numbers or expressions that evaluate to real numbers expressions are evaluated when the command is executed You can enter fractions in complex numbers but the output will always be a decimal value When you use the n d template a fraction cannot contain a complex number iri EFFE DAT
75. also be sure to separate multiple arguments with a comma For example stdDev Jis freqlist might be entered as stdDev L1 or stdDev L1 L2 since the frequency list or fregiist is optional You requested a tolerance to which the algorithm cannot return an accurate result You referenced a variable that is not currently defined For example you referenced a stat variable when there is no current calculation because a list has been edited or you referenced a variable when the variable is not valid for the current calculation such as a after Med Med Electrical interference caused a link to fail or this graphing calculator is not authorized to run the application You have tried to archive a variable that cannot be archived or you have tried to unarchive an application or group Examples of variables that cannot be archived include Real numbers LRESID R T X Y Theta Statistic variables under Vars STATISTICS menu Yvars and the AppldList You have attempted to receive an incompatible variable version from another graphing calculator Appendix B Reference Information 397 Error Type Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies WINDOW RANGE A problem exists with the window variables e You defined Xmax lt Xmin or Ymax lt Ymin e You defined Omax lt Omin and step gt 0 or vice versa e You attempted to define Tstep 0 e You defined Tmax lt Tmin and Tstep gt 0 or vice versa e Window variables are too s
76. alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws TESTS freqlistl freglist2 results drawflag 0 calculates results 3 2 SampZTest alternative drawflag Data list input 2 SampZTest o4 09 Computes a two sample z test alternative 1 is lt t X1 n1 X2 n2 alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws TESTS alternative drawflag results drawflag 0 calculates results 3 2 SampZTest Summary stats input Sci Sets scientific notation display mode T Sci Select Xlistname Selects one or more specific data points from a scatter plot LIST Ylistname or xyLine plot only and then storees the selected data OPS points to two new lists X istname and Ylistname 8 Select Send variable Sends contents of variable to the CBL 2 or CBR t System I O B Send seq expression variable Returns list created by evaluating expression with regard to LIST begin end increment variable from begin to end by increment OPS 5 seq Seq Sets sequence graphing mode t Seq Sequential Sets mode to graph functions sequentially t Sequential setDate year month day Sets the date using a year month day format The year 2nd CATALOG must be 4 digits month and day can be 1 or 2 digit setDate setDtFmt integer Sets the date format 2nd CATALOG 1 M D Y setDtFmt 2 D IM Y 3 Y M D setTime houz minute Sets the time using an hour minute second format The CATALOG second hour must be in 24 hour format in which 13 1 p m setTime
77. and F specify a transaction as an ordinary annuity or an annuity due When you execute either command the TVM Solver is updated Pmt_End Pmt_End payment end specifies an ordinary annuity where payments occur at the end of each payment period Most loans are in this category Pmt_End is the default Pmt_End On the TVM Solver s PMT END BEGIN line select END to set PMT to ordinary annuity Pmt_Bgn Pmt_Bgn payment beginning specifies an annuity due where payments occur at the beginning of each payment period Most leases are in this category Pmt_Bgn On the TVM Solver s PMT END BEGIN line select BEGIN to set PMT to annuity due Using the TVM Variables FINANCE VARS Menu To display the FINANCE VARS menu press gt You can use TVM variables in TVM functions and store values to them on the home screen CALC VARS 1 N Total number of payment periods 2 I Annual interest rate a2 PV Present value 4 PMT Payment amount Sic BV Future value Os PY Number of payment periods per year Chapter 14 Applications 262 CALC VARS Te Oy an Number of compounding periods year N 1 PV PMT FV N 1 PV PMT and FV are the five TVM variables They represent the elements of common financial transactions as described in the table above I is an annual interest rate that is converted to a per period rate based on the values of P Y and CIY P Y and C Y P Y is the number of payment periods per year in a financia
78. and earlier should run correctly but may give unexpected results when you run them using OS 2 53MP and higher You should test programs created with earlier OS versions to make sure you get the desired results e Programs can run in Classic or MathPrint mode e Shortcut menus are available wherever the MATH menu can be accessed e MathPrint templates are not available for programs All input and output is in Classic format e You can use fractions in programs but you should test the program to make sure that you get the desired results e The spacing of the display may be slightly different in MathPrint mode than in Classic mode If you prefer the spacing in Classic mode set the mode using a command in your program Screen shots for the examples in this chapter were taken in Classic mode e Stat Wizards are available only for syntax help for functions in the DISTR DISTR menu and the seq function Sequence in the LIST OPS menu Run the Catalog Help application for more syntax help when programming Chapter 16 Programming 2 6 Creating a New Program To create a new program follow these steps 1 SO or ae Press 4 to display the PRGM NEW menu EXEC EDIT IREN HiCreste Hew Press to select 1 Create New The Name prompt is displayed and alpha lock is on Press a letter from A to Z or 9 to enter the first character of the new program name Note A program name can be one to eight characters long The first character mu
79. at least one comparison is false it returns 0 if no comparison is false Chapter 10 Matrices 153 iPart fPart int iPart integer part fPart fractional part and int greatest integer are on the MATH NUM menu iPart returns a matrix containing the integer part of each element of matrix fPart returns a matrix containing the fractional part of each element of matrix int returns a matrix containing the greatest integer of each element of matrix iPart matrix fPart matrix int matrix ai 5 ido i gt 0 i Ree a el i 47 15 i 4r fFPart 0 gt 22 og E Using the MATRX MATH Operations MATRX MATH Menu To display the MATRX MATH menu press gt NAMES MATH EDIT 1 det Calculates the determinant 2 ii Transposes the matrix 3 dim Returns the matrix dimensions 4 Fill Fills all elements with a constant 5 identity Returns the identity matrix 6 randM Returns a random matrix 7 augment Appends two matrices 8 Matrblist Stores a matrix to a list Chapter 10 Matrices 154 NAMES MATH EDIT 9 Listbmatr Stores a list to a matrix O cumSum Returns the cumulative sums of a matrix A ref Returns the row echelon form of a matrix B rer Returns the reduced row echelon form C rowSwap Swaps two rows of a matrix De OWI Adds two rows stores in the second row E row Multiplies the row by a number F row Multiplies the row adds to the second
80. calculate nDeriv the T 84 Plus can return a false derivative value at a nondifferentiable point fnint fnint function integral returns the numerical integral Gauss Kronrod method of expression with respect to variable given lower limit upper limit and a tolerance if not specified the default is 1E 5 fnint is valid only for real numbers terete z MathPrint m RE JaK 138 Classic fnint expression variable lower upper tolerance FRI REC She lf oe 1 1 134 4H In MathPrint mode the default is 1E 3 You can switch to Classic mode to change e for investigations Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 41 Note To speed the drawing of integration graphs when fnint is used in a Y equation increase the value of the Xres window variable before you press GRAPH Using the Equation Solver Solver Solver displays the equation solver in which you can solve for any variable in an equation The equation is assumed to be equal to zero Solver is valid only for real numbers When you select Solver one of two screens is displayed e The equation editor see step 1 picture below is displayed when the equation variable eqn is empty e The interactive solver editor is displayed when an equation is stored in eqn Entering an Expression in the Equation Solver To enter an expression in the equation solver assuming that the variable eqn is empty follow these steps 1 Select B Solve
81. can use this feature to view the function that defines a dependent variable without having to leave the table Chapter 7 Tables 117 Displaying the Table The Table To display the table press TABLE Note The table abbreviates the values if necessary Current cell Dependent variable lt values in the second and third columns Independent variable values in the first column Current cell s full value Note When the table first displays the message Press for ATbI is on the entry line This message reminds you that you can press to change ATbI at any time When you press any key the message disappears Independent and Dependent Variables The current graphing mode determines which independent and dependent variables are displayed in the table Chapter 1 In the table above for example the independent variable X and the dependent variables Y1 and Y2 are displayed because Func graphing mode is set Independent Variable Graphing Mode Dependent Variable Func function X Y1 through Y9 and YO Par parametric Ji X1T Y1T through X6T Y6T Pol polar 0 r1 through r6 Seq Sequence u n v n and w n a Clearing the Table from the Home Screen or a Program From the home screen select the CirTable instruction from the CATALOG To clear the table press ENTER From a program select 9 CirTable from the PRGM I O menu or from the CATALOG The table is cleared upon execution If IndpntAsk
82. comparing these means involves analysis of the variation in the sample data The null hypothesis Ho w4 9 p IS tested against the alternative Ha not all u4 u are equal ANOVA list ist2 list20 In the example Input AROWACLi Le Le20 Calculated results One wid ANOVA Error df 12 HHH 55 16 Hea HS 1 568 a EEEE Note SS is sum of squares and MS is mean square Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 238 Inferential Statistics Input Descriptions The tables in this section describe the inferential statistics inputs discussed in this chapter You enter values for these inputs in the inferential stat editors The tables present the inputs in the same order that they appear in this chapter Input Description Lo Hypothesized value of the population mean that you are testing o The known population standard deviation must be a real number gt 0 List The name of the list containing the data you are testing Freq The name of the list containing the frequency values for the data in List Default 1 All elements must be integers 0 Calculate Draw Determines the type of output to generate for tests and intervals Calculate displays the output on the home screen In tests Draw draws a graph of the results X Sx n Summary statistics mean standard deviation and sample size for the one sample tests and intervals o1 The known population standard deviation from the first popu
83. containing the differences between consecutive elements in ist Fills matrixname column by column with the elements from each specified listname Returns the natural logarithm of a real or complex number expression or list Fits a logarithmic regression model to X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Returns logarithm of a real or complex number expression or list Returns the logarithm of a specifed value determined from a specified base logBASE value base Fits a logistic regression model to X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item NUM 8 lcm 2nd CATALOG length 2nd DRAW DRAW 2 Line 2nd DRAW DRAW 2 Line STAT CALC 8 LinReg a bx STAT CALC 4 LinReg ax b t TESTS G LinRegTint t TESTS F LinRegTTest 2nd LIST OPS 7 AList 2nd LIST OPS 0 List gt matr N STAT CALC 9 LnReg 364 Function or Instruction Arguments Manual Fit eqguname MATHPRINT Matrblist matrix listnameA listname n Matrblist matrix column listname max valueA valueB max ist max istA listB max value list mean is freqlist median ist freqlist Med Med Xlistname Ylistname freqlist regequ Menu title textl labell text7 label
84. decimal places 7 Press CALC 5 to select 5 intersect Press to select the first curve and to select the second curve To guess move the trace cursor near the intersection Press ENTER What are the coordinates of the intersection point Press 4 to select 4 ZDecimal to redisplay the original graph Press ZOOM Select 2 Zoom In and repeat steps 4 through 8 to explore the apparent function intersection on the left side of the display Using a Program to Create the Sierpinski Triangle Setting up the Program This program creates a drawing of a famous fractal the Sierpinski Triangle and stores the drawing to a picture To begin press gt 1 Name the program SIERPINS and then press ENTER The program editor is displayed Note After you run this program press FORMAT to turn on the axes in the graph screen Program PROGRAM SIERPINS PnOLt lt ClrDraw SP lLOCSO ET AxesOft 0 gt Xmin 1 gt Xmax pe Set viewing window gt O PYmin 1 gt Ymax gt rand gt X rand gt yY Chapter 17 Activities 311 SMO hy Ly3000 Beginning of For group rand N ole NSLS Then gt OXPX OYJ ENG l If Then group I L 3S lt N and Ns 773 Then 5 5 X gt X If Then group taS 1 Y gt 3Y Ena LE 273 aN Then 24 5 14 2X oe Ge Y Ena If Then group Pt On X Draw point ERNA End of For group StorePic 6 Store picture After you execute the program above you can recall and displa
85. e f you select Y the Tl 84 Plus plots the data on the y axis and the z values on the x axis 11436673 36 M 36 513216 Y 7 418519 Defining the Plots To define a plot follow these steps 1 Press STAT PLOT The STAT PLOTS menu is displayed with the current plot definitions 2 Select the plot you want to use The stat plot editor is displayed for the plot you selected Chapter 12 Statistics 210 Floke Plot r Ture 3 Press to select On if you want to plot the statistical data immediately The definition is stored whether you select On or Off 4 Select the type of plot Each type prompts for the options checked in this table Data Data Plot Type XList YList Mark Freq List Axis Scatter 4 a Fw Oo 02 u L xyLine vj vj vj Q Q Q di Histogram K Q Q K Q Q ModBoxplot vj Q Vj vj Q Q TIF Boxplot vj Q Q vj Q Q L lt NormProbPlot Q Q m Q vi vi 5 Enter list names or select options for the plot type e Xlist list name containing independent data e Ylist list name containing dependent data e Mark 0 or or e Freq frequency list for Xlist elements default is 1 e Data List list name for NormProbPlot e Data Axis axis on which to plot Data List Displaying Other Stat Plot Editors Each stat plot has a unique stat plot editor The name of the current stat plot Plot1 Plot2 or Plot3 is highlighted in the top line of the stat plot editor To display the stat plot editor for a different p
86. e Press CLEAR to clear all program commands on the command line the leading colon remains and then enter a new program command Chapter 16 Programming 219 Note To move the cursor to the beginning of a command line press 4 to move to the end press gt To scroll the cursor down seven command lines press ALPHA To scroll the cursor up seven command lines press ALPHA 4 Inserting and Deleting Command Lines To insert a new command line anywhere in the program place the cursor where you want the new line press INS and then press ENTER A colon indicates a new line To delete a command line place the cursor on the line press CLEAR to clear all instructions and expressions on the line and then press to delete the command line including the colon Copying and Renaming Programs Copying and Renaming a Program To copy all command lines from one program into a new program follow steps 1 through 5 for Creating a New Program and then follow these steps 1 Press RCL Rel is displayed on the bottom line of the program editor in the new program Chapter 1 Press 4 to display the PRGM EXEC menu Select a name from the menu prgmname is pasted to the bottom line of the program editor Press ENTER All command lines from the selected program are copied into the new program Copying programs has at least two convenient applications e You can create a template for groups of instructions that you use freq
87. editing time scroll horizontally until no lists with formulas are displayed or rearrange the stat list editor so that no lists with formulas are displayed Handling Errors Resulting from Attached Formulas On the home screen you can attach to a list a formula that references another list with dimension O Chapter 11 However you cannot display the formula generated list in the stat list editor or on the home screen until you enter at least one element to the list that the formula references All elements of a list referenced by an attached formula must be valid for the attached formula For example if Real number mode is set and the attached formula is log L1 then each element of L1 must be greater than 0 since the logarithm of a negative number returns a complex result When you use the shortcut menus all values must be valid for use in the templates For example if you use the n d template both the numerator and denominator must be integers Notes e If an error menu is returned when you attempt to display a formula generated list in the stat list editor you can select 2 Goto write down the formula that is attached to the list and then press to detach clear the formula You then can use the stat list editor to find the Chapter 12 Statistics 189 source of the error After making the appropriate changes you can reattach the formula to a list e If you do not want to clear the formula you can select 1 Quit display th
88. exceptions Receiving from a TI 83 You can transfer all variables and programs from a TI 83 to a TI 84 Plus if they fit in the RAM of the TI 84 Plus The RAM of the TI 84 Plus is slightly less than the RAM of the TI 83 Backing Up RAM Memory Warning H Back Up overwrites the RAM memory and mode settings in the receiving unit All information in the RAM memory of the receiving unit is lost Note Archived items on the receiving unit are not overwritten You can backup the contents of RAM memory and mode settings no Flash applications or archived items to another Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition You can also backup RAM memory and mode settings to a Tl 84 Plus The backup calculator must also have OS 2 55MP installed To perform a RAM memory backup 1 Use a USB unit to unit cable to link two Tl 84 Plus units or a Tl 84 Plus and a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition together 2 On the sending unit press LINK and select H Back Up The MEMORYBACKUP screen displays iB Seen Huit On the receiving unit press LINK gt to display the RECEIVE menu Press on the receiving unit Chapter 19 Communication Link 351 Press on the sending unit A WARNING Backup message displays on the receiving unit Press ENTER on the receiving unit to continue the backup Press 2 Quit on the receiving unit to cancel the backup and return to the LINK SEND menu Note If a transmission error is returned during a backup the receiving unit is reset Mem
89. f nn probability density function 2 normalcd nn Cumulative distribution function 32 anivNorm Inverse cumulative normal distribution Ae arn Inverse cumulative Student distribution De Gpae Student t probability density ot ease Student z distribution probability 7 y 2pdE Chi square probability density 8 y4cdFf Chi square distribution probability 9 Fpdf F probability density 0 Fcd F distribution probability Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 241 DISTR DRAW A binompdef Binomial probability Be ibinomced Binomial cumulative density Cr pOrssonpdrI Poisson probability D pPOLssoncdtr Poisson cumulative density E geometpd Geometric probability F geometcdf Geometric cumulative density Note 1E99 and 1E99 specify infinity If you want to view the area left of upperbound for example specify owerbound 1E99 normalpdf normalpdf computes the probability density function pdf for the normal distribution at a specified x value The defaults are mean u 0 and standard deviation o 1 To plot the normal distribution paste normalpdf to the Y editor The probability density function pdf is 1 7 2 J2TO K x normalpdf x u 0 Ploti Flotz Flot Note For this example yd Bnormaledt ts Xmin 28 Sd Xmax 42 Xscl 1 Ymin 0 Ymax 2 Yscl 1 Note For plotting the normal distribution you can set window variables Xmin and
90. five or more it is a polynomial regression At least four points are required CubicReg X istname Ylistname freqlist regequ SE Alist L WlistiLle FresLists Store ReaEtl Calculate Chapter 12 Statistics 201 QuartReg ax bx cx dx te QuartReg quartic regression fits the fourth degree polynomial y ax bx gt cex dx e to the data It displays values for a b c d and e when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays a value for R For five points the equation is a polynomial fit for six or more it is a polynomial regression At least five points are required QuartReg X istname Ylistname freqlist regequ _ EERE mlisteli WlistiLle FreaList Store ReaEi Calculate LinReg atbx LinReg a bx linear regression fits the model equation y a bx to the data using a least squares fit It displays values for a y intercept and b slope when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays values for r andr LinReg a bx Xlistname Ylistname freqlist regequ FresListi Store Rea Ell Calculate LnReg atb In x LnReg logarithmic regression fits the model equation y atb In x to the data using a least squares fit and transformed values In x and y It displays values for a and b when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays values for r and r LnReg X istname Ylistname freglist regequ Lakes mlisteli WlistiLle FresListi Store Rea Etli Calculate ExpReg ab ExpReg expo
91. gi ad Jen 2031095367 real real real part returns the real part of a complex number or list of complex numbers real a bi returns a real re 0i returns r cos 8 MathPrint Classic real 3 41 3 Posy coraee z real ze 1 26609302563 real se tdi i 1 26609302563 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 54 imag imag imaginary part returns the imaginary nonreal part of a complex number or list of complex numbers imag atbi returns b imag re 9 returns r sin Q MathPrint Classic image 3t 4i 3 p n 4 imag Set 7 27rb4e74ee image Seed 33 7 27Trb4e74ee angle angle returns the polar angle of a complex number or list of complex numbers calculated as tan b a where b is the imaginary part and a is the real part The calculation is adjusted by z in the second quadrant or r in the third quadrant angle a bi returns tan b a angle re 0i returns O where 17 lt lt 7 MathPrint Classic angled 3 41 3 angled 3 41 i Ir 299218 29272952718 anglelze 2 293185307 angled se t4y433 7 20318530F abs 2 2 abs absolute value returns the magnitude modulus 2 99 ofa complex number or list of complex numbers You can also access abs from the FUNC shortcut menu ALPHA F2 1 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 55 abs atbi returns a be abs re 0i returns r magnitude real imag pe Codi 3 sl
92. graphing mode Suspends program execution until you press ENTER Displays value suspends program execution until you press ENTER Defines Plot 1 2 or 3 of type Scatter or xyLine for Xlistname and Ylistname using mark Defines Plot 1 2 or 3 of type Histogram or Boxplot for Xlistname with frequency freglist 2nd TEST LOGIC 4 not PRB 2 nPr PRB 2 nPr PRB 2 nPr PRB 2 nPr 1 Finance CALC 7 npv 2nd TEST LOGIC 2 or t I O 6 Output t I O 6 Output T MODE Par T CTL 8 Pause ii CTL 8 Pause t STAT PLOT STAT PLOTS 1 Plot1 2 Plot2 3 Plot3 t STAT PLOT STAT PLOTS 1 Plot1 2 Plot2 3 Plot3 Appendix A Functions and Instructions 367 Function or Instruction Arguments Plot type Xlistname freqlist mark Plot tvpe datalistname data axis mark PlotsOff 1 2 3 PlotsOn 1 2 3 Pmt_Bgn Pmt_End poissoncdf x poissonpdf x Polar complex value Polar PolarGC prgmname 2 amp Prn pmt1 pmt2 roundvalue prod is start end Result Defines Plot 1 2 or 3 of type ModBoxplot for X istname with frequency freglist using mark Defines Plot 1 2 or 3 of type NormProbPlot for datalistname on data axis using mark data axis can be X or Y Deselects all stat plots or one or more specified stat plots 1 2 or 3 Selects all stat plots or one or more specified stat plots 1 2 or 3 Specifies an a
93. gt if necessary to move the cursor onto the list name to which you want to attach the formula Note If a formula in quotation marks is displayed on the entry line then a formula is already attached to the list name To edit the formula press ENTER and then edit the formula Press ALPHA enter the formula and press ALPHA Note If you do not use quotation marks the Tl 84 Plus calculates and displays the same initial list of answers but does not attach the formula for future calculations Li LHBC 16 H Note Any user created list name referenced in a formula must be preceded by an L symbol Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Statistics 188 5 Press ENTER The Tl 84 Plus calculates each list element and stores it to the list name to which the formula is attached A lock symbol is displayed in the stat list editor next to the list name to which the formula is attached o symbol Using the Stat List Editor When Formula Generated Lists Are Displayed When you edit an element of a list referenced in an attached formula the Tl 84 Plus updates the corresponding element in the list to which the formula is attached Chapter 11 AEC E AEC S When a list with a formula attached is displayed in the stat list editor and you edit or enter elements of another displayed list then the Tl 84 Plus takes slightly longer to accept each edit or entry than when no lists with formulas attached are in view Note To speed
94. gt or enter a value to select a point near the zero of the function between the bounds and then press ENTER cero n 4 150629 O The cursor is on the solution and the coordinates are displayed even if CoordOff format is selected To move to the same x value for other selected functions press 4 or To restore the free moving cursor press 4 or gt minimum maximum minimum and maximum find a minimum or maximum of a function within a specified interval to a tolerance of 1E 5 To find a minimum or maximum follow these steps 1 Select 3 minimum or 4 maximum from the CALCULATE menu The current graph is displayed 2 Select the function and set left bound right bound and guess as described for zero Chapter 3 Function Graphing 88 The cursor is on the solution and the coordinates are displayed even if you have selected CoordOff format Minimum or Maximum is displayed in the bottom left corner To move to the same x value for other selected functions press 4 or To restore the free moving cursor press 4 or gt intersect intersect finds the coordinates of a point at which two or more functions intersect using solve The intersection must appear on the display to use intersect To find an intersection follow these steps 1 Select 5 intersect from the CALCULATE menu The current graph is displayed with First curve in the bottom left corner FiFSt Curie nzi i 2 Press o
95. home screen To increase available memory by archiving a program 1 Press MEM and then select 2 Mem Mgmt Del from the MEMORY menu 2 Select 2 Mem Mgmt Del to display the MEM MGMT DEL menu 3 Select 7 Prgm to display the PRGM menu 4 Press to archive the program An asterisk will appear to the left of the program to indicate it is an archived program To unarchive a program in this screen put the cursor next to the archived program and press ENTER The asterisk will disappear Note Archive programs cannot be edited or executed In order to edit or execute an archived program you must first unarchive it Entering Command Lines and Executing Programs Entering a Program Command Line You can enter on a command line any instruction or expression that you could execute from the home screen In the program editor each new command line begins with a colon To enter more than one instruction or expression on a single command line separate each with a colon Note A command line can be longer than the screen is wide While in the program editor you can display and select from menus You can return to the program editor from a menu in either of two ways e Select a menu item which pastes the item to the current command line e Press CLEAR When you complete a command line press ENTER The cursor moves to the next command line Chapter 16 Programming 2 8 Programs can access variables lists matrices and stri
96. in increments of t if possible Sets AX and AY to t Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of t if possible Sets AX and AY to t Sets the window variables so that you can trace in if possible Sets AX and AY to 4 increments of L 5 10 Redefines the viewing window using these dimensions AX 1 Xscl 10 AY 1 Yscl 10 Computes a z confidence interval Computes a z confidence interval Magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the cursor location Displays a greater portion of the graph centered on the cursor location Recalculates Ymin and Ymax to include the minimum and maximum Y values between Xmin and Xmax of the selected functions and replots the functions Graphs the selected functions in a user defined viewing window Redefines the viewing window so that all statistical data points are displayed Immediately stores the current viewing window Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item N Oo jo ZOOM C ZFrac1 3 N oO D ZOOM D ZFrac1 4 N oO D ZOOM E ZFract 5 N oO fo ZOOM F ZFrac1 8 ZOOM G ZFrac1 10 t ZOOM 8 ZInteger T STAT 7 Zinterval t TESTS 7 Zinterval t ZOOM 2 Zoom In t ZOOM 3 Zoom Out t ZOOM 0 ZoomFit t MEMORY 3 ZoomRcl t ZOOM 9 ZoomStat t MEMORY 2 ZoomSto 378 Function or Instruction Arguments ZPrevious ZQuadrantt1 ZSquare ZStand
97. in an expression Row operations do not change matrix in memory You can enter all row numbers and values as expressions You can select the matrix from the MATRX NAMES menu Chapter 10 Matrices 158 ref rref ref row echelon form returns the row echelon form of a real matrix The number of columns must be greater than or equal to the number of rows ref matrix rref reduced row echelon form returns the reduced row echelon form of a real matrix The number of columns must be greater than or equal to the number of rows rref matrix E BE l 2 2 2 rowSwap rowSwap returns a matrix It swaps row4 and rowB of matrix rowSwap matrix rowA rowB row row row addition returns a matrix It adds rowA and rowB of matrix and stores the results in rowB rowt matrix rowA rowB Chapter 10 Matrices 159 row row row multiplication returns a matrix It multiplies row of matrix by value and stores the results in row row value matrix row row xrow row multiplication and addition returns a matrix It multiplies rowA of matrix by value adds it to rowB and stores the results in rowB xroWw t value matrix rowA rowB POW E S E 1 23 12 3 r ii is Chapter 10 Matrices 160 Chapter 11 Lists Getting Started Generating a Sequence Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Calculate the first eight terms of the sequence 1 A Store th
98. input syntax for each hypothesis test and confidence interval instruction 2 SamrpeTest Note You can paste a hypothesis test or confidence interval instruction to a command line in a program From within the program editor select the instruction from either the CATALOG Chapter 15 or the STAT TESTS menu Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 220 STAT TESTS Menu STAT TESTS Menu To display the STAT TESTS menu press When you select an inferential statistics instruction the appropriate inferential stat editor is displayed Most STAT TESTS instructions store some output variables to memory For a list of these variables see the Test and Interval Output Variables table EDIT CALC TESTS Q J wu gt OoOo o oo u o IGT A U N H pe Q mH 0 Z Test Pee S E A 2 Samp4IresE s 2 SampTTest E PropZlest s Z PEOD4TeES Eeti ALnterval ss TInterval 2 pampa lN Cess Z2 gt oamMe LING ers LPCODAIN Cu secs Be PEOO A TN esi y Test y GOF Test 2 SampFTest LinRegTTest LinRegTInt ANOVA Test for 1 u known o Test for 1 u unknown o Test comparing 2 u s known o s Test comparing 2 u s unknown os Test for 1 proportion Test comparing 2 proportions Confidence interval for 1 u known o Confidence interval for 1 u unknown o Confidence interval for difference of 2 u s Known o s Confidence interval for difference of 2 u s unknown o s Con
99. instruction is copied to the cursor location Press ENTER When ClrDraw is executed it clears all drawings from the current graph and displays the message Done When you display the graph again all drawn points lines circles and shaded areas will be gone Han Done Note Before you clear drawings you can store them with StorePic Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 123 Drawing Line Segments Drawing a Line Segment Directly on a Graph To draw a line segment when a graph is displayed follow these steps Select 2 Line from the DRAW menu Place the cursor on the point where you want the line segment to begin and then press ENTER Move the cursor to the point where you want the line segment to end The line is displayed as you move the cursor Press ENTER H 5 SL91489 Y 6 45161 9 To continue drawing line segments repeat steps 2 and 3 To cancel Line press CLEAR Drawing a Line Segment from the Home Screen or a Program Line also draws a line segment between the coordinates X Y and X2 Y2 The values may be entered as expressions Line X7 Y X2 Y2 Line 4 8 6 930 To erase a line segment enter Line X Y X2 Y2 0 Linet 5 4 6 618 Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 124 Drawing Horizontal and Vertical Lines Drawing a Line Directly on a Graph To draw a horizontal or vertical line when a graph is displayed follow these steps 1 Select 3 Horizontal or 4 Vertical from the DRAW menu A
100. is displayed For example in Func mode FnOff FnOn 1 3 turns off all functions in the Y editor and then turns on Y1 and Y3 Floti Flektec Fok YB ZW 2K 6 Chapter 3 Function Graphing 70 Setting Graph Styles for Functions MATH Graph Style Icons in the Y Editor This table describes the graph styles available for function graphing Use the styles to visually differentiate functions to be graphed together For example you can set Y1 as a solid line Y2 asa dotted line and Y3 as a thick line icon Style Line Thick Above ls Below Path Animate Dot Description A solid line connects plotted points this is the default in Connected mode A thick solid line connects plotted points Shading covers the area above the graph Shading covers the area below the graph A circular cursor traces the leading edge of the graph and draws a path A circular cursor traces the leading edge of the graph without drawing a path A small dot represents each plotted point this is the default in Dot mode Note Some graph styles are not available in all graphing modes Chapters 4 5 and 6 list the styles for Par Pol and Seq modes Setting the Graph Style To set the graph style for a function follow these steps 1 Press Y to display the Y editor Press and 4 to move the cursor to the function Press 4 4 to move the cursor left past the sign to the graph style icon in the first column The in
101. keyboard for a keystroke 8i CLrHome Clears the display 9 ClrTable Clears the current table O GetCalc Gets a variable from another TI 84 Plus A Get Gets a variable from CBL 2 or CBR B Send Sends a variable to CBL 2 or CBR These instructions control input to and output from a program during execution They allow you to enter values and display answers during program execution To return to the program editor without selecting an item press CLEAR Chapter 16 Programming 288 Displaying a Graph with Input Input without a variable displays the current graph You can move the free moving cursor which updates X and Y and R and 9 for PolarGC format The pause indicator is on Press to resume program execution Input Program Output PROGRAM GIMPUT FramGINPUTe SFROtrt Decimal nFuUt Oise sY PrdmG INPUT Done Storing a Variable Value with Input Input with variable displays a question mark prompt during execution variable may be a real number complex number list matrix string or Y function During program execution enter a value which can be an expression and then press ENTER The value is evaluated and stored to variable and the program resumes execution Input variable You can display text or the contents of Strn a string variable of up to 16 characters as a prompt During program execution enter a value after the prompt and then press ENTER The value is
102. language program has greater control over the calculator if your assembly language program has error s it may cause your calculator to reset and lose all data programs and applications stored in memory When you download an assembly language program it is stored among the other programs as a PRGM menu item You can e Transmit it using the TIl 84 Plus communication link Chapter 19 e Delete it using the MEM MGMT DEL screen Chapter 18 To run an assembly Program the syntax is Asm assemblyprgmname Chapter 16 Programming 294 If you write an assembly language program use the two instructions below from the CATALOG to identify and compile the program Instructions Comments AsmComp premASM 1 Compiles an assembly language program written in prgmASM2 ASCII and stores the hex version AsmPrgm Identifies an assembly language program must be entered as the first line of an assembly language program To compile an assembly program that you have written 1 oO ae ee IS Follow the steps for writing a program 16 4 but be sure to include AsmPrgm as the first line of your program From the home screen press CATALOG and then select AsmComp to paste it to the screen Press to display the PRGM EXEC menu Select the program you want to compile It will be pasted to the home screen Press and then select prgm from the CATALOG Key in the name you have chosen for the output program Note This name must be unique
103. list name is the only valid input such as the stat list editor s Name prompt or the stat plot editor s XList and YList prompts Entering a User Created List Name Directly To enter an existing list name directly follow these steps 1 Press LIST gt to display the LIST OPS menu 2 Select B L which pastes to the current cursor location L is not always necessary Note You also can paste L to the current cursor location from the CATALOG al Smert i sListFmatr sMatrerkliste L 3 Enter the characters that comprise the list name Tiz3m Attaching Formulas to List Names Attaching a Formula to a List Name You can attach a formula to a list name so that each list element is a result of the formula When executed the attached formula must resolve to a list When anything in the attached formula changes the list to which the formula is attached is updated automatically e When you edit an element of a list that is referenced in the formula the corresponding element in the list to which the formula is attached is updated e When you edit the formula itself all elements in the list to which the formula is attached are updated For example the first screen below shows that elements are stored to L3 and the formula L3 10 is attached to the list name LADD10 The quotation marks designate the formula to be attached to LADD10 Each element of LADD10 is the sum of an element in L3 and 10 L124
104. numbers in the form a tbi e reA Qi polar complex mode displays complex numbers in the form re i Note When you use the n d template both n and d must be real numbers For example you can 1 1 1 1 enter 774 the answer is displayed as a decimal value but if you enter a data type error displays To perform division with a complex number in the numerator or denominator use regular division instead of the n d template Full Horiz G T Full screen mode uses the entire screen to display a graph or edit screen Each split screen mode displays two screens simultaneously Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 17 e Horiz horizontal mode displays the current graph on the top half of the screen it displays the home screen or an editor on the bottom half Chapter 9 e G T graph table mode displays the current graph on the left half of the screen it displays the table screen on the right half Chapter 9 MathPrint Classic MathPrint mode displays most inputs and outputs the way they are shown in textbooks such as 2 Classic mode displays expressions and answers as if written on one line such as 1 2 3 4 Note If you switch between these modes most entries will be preserved however matrix calculations will not be preserved n d Un d n d displays results as a simple fraction Fractions may contain a maximum of six digits in the numerator the value of the denominator may not excee
105. of them Selecting and Deselecting Parametric Equations The Tl 84 Plus graphs only the selected parametric equations In the Y editor a parametric equation is selected when the signs of both the X and Y components are highlighted You may select any or all of the equations X1T and Y1T through X6T and Y6T To change the selection status move the cursor onto the sign of either the X or Y component and press ENTER The status of both the X and Y components is changed Setting Window Variables To display the window variable values press WINDOW These variables define the viewing window The values below are defaults for parametric graphing in Radian angle mode Tmin 0 Smallest T value to evaluate Tmax 6 2831853 Largest T value to evaluate 27 Tstep 1308996 T value increment 1 24 Xmin 10 Smallest X value to be displayed Xmax 10 Largest X value to be displayed Xscl 1 Spacing between the X tick marks Ymin 10 Smallest Y value to be displayed Ymax 10 Largest Y value to be displayed Yscl 1 Spacing between the Y tick marks Note To ensure that sufficient points are plotted you may want to change the T window variables Setting the Graph Format To display the current graph format settings press FORMAT Chapter 3 describes the format settings in detail The other graphing modes share these format settings Seq graphing mode has an additional axes format setting Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing 94 Displaying a Graph
106. optional but it may help find the solution more quickly The default is bound 1 99 1E99 5 Move the cursor to the variable for which you want to solve and press SOLVE HW 3 P6 12558 m ae 26415566 3 36 bound 5 53 elefit rtL e The solution is displayed next to the variable for which you solved A solid square in the first column marks the variable for which you solved and indicates that the equation is balanced An ellipsis shows that the value continues beyond the screen Note When a number continues beyond the screen be sure to press gt to scroll to the end of the number to see whether it ends with a negative or positive exponent A very small number may appear to be a large number until you scroll right to see the exponent e The values of the variables are updated in memory e left rt diffis displayed in the last line of the editor diff is the difference between the left and right sides of the equation when evaluated at the calculated solution A solid square in the first column next to left rt indicates that the equation has been evaluated at the new value of the variable for which you solved Editing an Equation Stored to eqn To edit or replace an equation stored to eqn when the interactive equation solver is displayed press 4 until the equation editor is displayed Then edit the equation Equations with Multiple Roots Some equations have more than one solution You can enter a new initial guess
107. or new bounds to look for additional solutions Further Solutions After you solve for a variable you can continue to explore solutions from the interactive solver editor Edit the values of one or more variables When you edit any variable value the solid Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 44 squares next to the previous solution and left rt diff disappear Move the cursor to the variable for which you now want to solve and press SOLVE Controlling the Solution for Solver or solve The Tl 84 Plus solves equations through an iterative process To control that process enter bounds that are relatively close to the solution and enter an initial guess within those bounds This will help to find a solution more quickly Also it will define which solution you want for equations with multiple solutions Using solve on the Home Screen or from a Program The function solve is available only from CATALOG or from within a program It returns a solution root of expression for variable given an initial guess and lower and upper bounds within which the solution is sought The default for lower is 1E99 The default for upper is 1E99 solve is valid only for real numbers solve expression variable guess lower upper expression IS assumed equal to zero The value of variable will not be updated in memory guess may be a value or a list of two values Values must be stored for every variable in expression except variable be
108. parts The significant digits display with one digit to the left of the decimal The appropriate power of 10 displays to the right of E as in 1 234567E4 Eng engineering notation mode is similar to scientific notation However the number can have one two or three digits before the decimal and the power of 10 exponent is a multiple of three as IN 12 34567E3 Note If you select Normal notation but the answer cannot display in 10 digits or the absolute value is less than 001 the Tl 84 Plus expresses the answer in scientific notation Float 0123456789 Float floating decimal mode displays up to 10 digits plus the sign and decimal 0123456789 fixed decimal mode specifies the number of digits 0 through 9 to display to the right of the decimal for decimal answers The decimal setting applies to Normal Sci and Eng notation modes The decimal setting applies to these numbers with respect to the Answer mode setting e An answer displayed on the home screen e Coordinates on a graph Chapters 3 4 5 and 6 e The Tangent DRAW instruction equation of the line x and dy dx values Chapter 8 e Results of CALCULATE operations Chapters 3 4 5 and 6 e The regression equation stored after the execution of a regression model Chapter 12 Radian Degree Angle modes control how the TI 84 Plus interprets angle values in trigonometric functions and polar rectangular conversions Radian mode interprets angle values as radians
109. predictions using the table with the TABLE SETUP settings Indpnt Ask and Depend Auto Chapter 7 Setting Up Statistical Analyses Using Lists to Store Data Data for statistical analyses is stored in lists which you can create and edit using the stat list editor The Tl 84 Plus has six list variables in memory L1 through L6 to which you can store data for statistical calculations Also you can store data to list names that you create Chapter 11 Setting Up a Statistical Analysis To set up a Statistical analysis follow these steps Read the chapter for details Enter the statistical data into one or more lists Plot the data Calculate the statistical variables or fit a model to the data Graph the regression equation for the plotted data oO ae oS oh S Graph the residuals list for the given regression model Displaying the Stat List Editor The stat list editor is a table where you can store edit and view up to 20 lists that are in memory Also you can create list names from the stat list editor To display the stat list editor press STAT and then select 1 Edit from the STAT EDIT menu List SetUeEdi tor Chapter 12 Statistics 184 The top line displays list names L1 through L6 are stored in columns 1 through 6 after a memory reset The number of the current column is displayed in the top right corner The bottom line is the entry line All data entry occurs on this line The characteristics of this line c
110. setTmFmt integer Sets the time format 2nd CATALOG 12 12 hour format setTmFmt 24 24 hour format SetUpEditor Removes all list names from the stat list editor and then STAT restores list names L1 through L6 to columns 1 through 6 EDIT 5 SetUpEditor SetUpEditor Jistname Removes all list names from the stat list editor then sets it STAT Jistname2 up to display one or more Jistnames in the specified order EDIT listname20 starting with column 1 5 SetUpEditor Shade owerfunc Draws lowerfunc and upperfunc in terms of X on the current 2nd DRAW upperfunc Xleft Xright graph and uses pattern and patres to shade the area DRAW pattern patres bounded by lowerfunc upperfunc Xleft and Xright 7 Shade Appendix A Functions and Instructions 373 Function or Instruction Arguments Result Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item Shadey Jowerbound upperbound df ShadeF owerbound upperbound numerator df denominator df ShadeNorm lowerbound upperbound uU 0 Shade_t owerbound upperbound df Simul sin value sin value sinh value sinh value SinReg iterations Xlistname Ylistname period regequ solve expression variable guess ower upper SortA listname SortA keylistname dependlist1 dependlist2 dependlist n SortD listname SortD keylistname dependl istl dependlist2 dependlist n startTmr Draws the density function fo
111. that the TI 84 Plus can interpret the argument as degrees minutes and seconds Degree mode Radian mode J H031 353954 Degree degree designates an angle or list of angles as degrees regardless of the current angle mode setting In Radian mode you can use to convert degrees to radians value value1 value2 value3 value4 value n also designates degrees D in DMS format minutes designates minutes M in DMS format seconds designates seconds S in DMS format Note is not on the ANGLE menu To enter press Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 60 Radians radians designates an angle or list of angles as radians regardless of the current angle mode setting In Degree mode you can use to convert radians to degrees value Degree mode gt DMS gt DMS degree minute second displays answer in DMS format The mode setting must be Degree for answer to be interpreted as degrees minutes and seconds DMS is valid only at the end of a line answer gt DMS a Se 0 109 02335433 i st5 a Anz R gt Pr R gt PO P gt Rx P gt Ry R gt Pr converts rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates and returns r R gt PO converts rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates and returns 9 x and y can be lists R gt Pr x v R gt PO x y RrPrte 1 A gt Note Radian mode is set RrRPeC 1 83 42141594654 P gt Rx converts polar coordinates to rectangul
112. the GDB secondary menu VARS 3 The variable is pasted next to StoreGDB 3 Press to store the current database to the specified GDB variable Recalling Graph Databases GDB Recalling a Graph Database CAUTION When you recall a GDB it replaces all existing Y functions Consider storing the current Y functions to another database before recalling a stored GDB To recall a graph database follow these steps 1 Select 4 RecallGDB from the DRAW STO menu RecallGDB is pasted to the current cursor location Enter the number from 1 to 9 or 0 of the GDB variable from which you want to recall a GDB For example if you enter 7 the Tl 84 Plus will recall the GDB stored to GDB7 ime T Note You also can select a variable from the GDB secondary menu VARS 3 The variable is pasted next to RecallGDB Press to replace the current GDB with the recalled GDB The new graph is not plotted The TI 84 Plus changes the graphing mode automatically if necessary Deleting a Graph Database To delete a GDB from memory use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE secondary menu Chapter 18 Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 136 Chapter 9 Split Screen Getting Started Exploring the Unit Circle Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Use G T graph table split screen mode to explore the unit circle and its relationship to the numeric values for the commonly used trigonometric angles of 0 30 45
113. the VARS menu An HER GOTO FORAAT GRAFH TES TEACH t CLASSIC Uned SET CLOCK BE Rel ote LF t Eld WEC FRAC Chapter 12 Statistics 198 The following screens demonstrate the STAT WIZARDS flow for a STAT CALC menu command 1 Press press gt to select the STAT CALC EDIT TESTS f War menu Select 1 to select the 1 Var Stats di Har a ees qi LinRestax h Note In this example data has been entered in S Gucdeea L1 6 Cubickeg rtQuartred 2 The 1 Var Stats wizard opens Enter the values in the wizard Scroll down to Calculate and press ENTER see Note FreqList is an optional argument Calculate 3 The STAT CALC results are displayed rib rr 5x 11 08997295 Men 261784873 4 Press to scroll down through the data Note This is a temporary view Press 5 to view the statistic variables after clearing the temporary result screen LOr 32 4 5 Press to clear the data from the screen 6 Press 4 to view the populated command pasted Lorie 1 War State Li Done If the STAT WIZARD mode option if OFF for each STAT CALC menu item if neither Xlistname nor Ylistname is specified then the default list names are L1 and L2 If you do not specify reglist then the default is 1 occurrence of each list element Frequency of Occurrence for Data Points For most STAT CALC menu items you can specify a list of data occurrences or frequencies freqlist Each element in freglist indicates how m
114. the menu continues beyond the displayed items a down arrow 4 replaces the colon next to the last displayed item e When a menu item ends in an ellipsis the item displays a secondary menu or editor when you select it e When an asterisk appears to the left of a menu item that item is stored in user data archive Chapter 18 Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 25 FAM FREE 2494 ARC FREE 831876 Picl ror P icy ror L 12 L z 12 FEL 12 Displaying a Menu While using your Tl 84 Plus you often will need to access items from its menus When you press a key that displays a menu that menu temporarily replaces the screen where you are working For example when you press MATH the MATH menu is displayed as a full screen After you select an item from a menu the screen where you are working usually is displayed again Moving from One Menu to Another some keys access more than one menu When you press such a key the names of all accessible menus are displayed on the top line When you highlight a menu name the items in that menu are displayed Press gt and 4 to highlight each menu name Note FRAC shortcut menu items are also found on the MATH NUM menu FUNC shortcut menu items are also found on the MATH MATH menu Scrolling a Menu ii HHTH HUM CFs PRE 12 FFRrac pF Dec EEE a fine rifat CPs PRE To scroll down the menu items press To scroll up th
115. the right side of the next line e If value is text within quotation marks it is displayed on the left side of the current display line gt is not valid as text Program Output RAM A FrQnmeA Oise THE AWSWE THE AHSWER IS k IS nrz reran i one lf Pause is encountered after Disp the program halts temporarily so you can examine the screen To resume execution press ENTER Chapter 16 Programming 290 Note If a matrix or list is too large to display in its entirety ellipses are displayed in the last column but the matrix or list cannot be scrolled To scroll use Pause value DispGraph DispGraph display graph displays the current graph If Pause is encountered after DispGraph the program halts temporarily so you can examine the screen Press to resume execution DispTable DispTable display table displays the current table The program halts temporarily so you can examine the screen Press to resume execution Output Output displays text or value on the current home screen beginning at vow 1 through 8 and column 1 through 16 overwriting any existing characters Note You may want to precede Output with ClrHome Expressions are evaluated and values are displayed according to the current mode settings Matrices are displayed in entry format and wrap to the next line gt is not valid as text Output row column text Output row column value Program Output PROGRAM OUTPLT 5 tot C
116. the user defined window 4 SetFaCtCOrS Changes Zoom In and Zoom Out factors ZPrevious ZPrevious replots the graph using the window variables of the graph that was displayed before you executed the last ZOOM instruction ZoomSto ZoomSto immediately stores the current viewing window The graph is displayed and the values of the current window variables are stored in the user defined ZOOM variables ZXmin ZXmax ZXscl ZYmin ZYmax ZYscl and ZXres These variables apply to all graphing modes For example changing the value of ZXmin in Func mode also changes it in Par mode Chapter 3 Function Graphing 85 ZoomRcl ZoomRcl graphs the selected functions in a user defined viewing window The user defined viewing window is determined by the values stored with the ZoomSto instruction The window variables are updated with the user defined values and the graph is plotted ZOOM FACTORS The zoom factors XFact and YFact are positive numbers not necessarily integers greater than or equal to 1 They define the magnification or reduction factor used to Zoom In or Zoom Out around a point Checking XFact and YFact To display the ZOOM FACTORS screen where you can review the current values for XFact and YFact select 4 SetFactors from the ZOOM MEMORY menu The values shown are the defaults 00M FACTORS Fact Y Fact 4 Changing XFact and YFact You can change XFact and YFact in either of two ways e Enter a new value The origi
117. this course 1 2 3 4 It starts on the x axis at the initial value u nMin when PlotStart 1 It moves vertically up or down to the sequence It moves horizontally to the y x reference line It repeats this vertical and horizontal movement as you continue to press gt Using Web Plots to Illustrate Convergence Example Convergence 1 Press Y in Seq mode to display the sequence Y editor Make sure the graph style is set to dot and then define Min u n and u nMin as u n 8u n 1 3 6 OI Sut9 1 3 Hinin Bi 43 weohinsa wenhins Press FORMAT ENTER to set Time axes format Press WINDOW and set the variables as shown below nMin 1 Xmin 0 Ymin 10 nMax 25 Xmax 25 Ymax 10 PlotStart 1 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 PlotStep 1 Press to graph the sequence Press FORMAT and select the Web axes setting Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 110 6 Press and change the variables below Xmin 10 Xmax 10 Press to graph the sequence Press TRACE and then press gt to draw the web The displayed cursor coordinates n X u n 1 and Y u n change accordingly When you press gt a new n value is displayed and the trace cursor is on the sequence When you press gt again the n value remains the same and the cursor moves to the y x reference line This pattern repeats as you trace the web Graphing Phase Plots Graphing with uv vw and uw The phase plot axes settings
118. to Create the Sierpinski Triangle cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaees 311 Graphing CODWED A raCTONS sxcescececseces ececce a a EEE A EREA ESTEE E DENA Ea S RE E 312 Using a Program to Guess the Coefficients ccccccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeaeeaaeeesaanaaeeeaaes 313 Graphing the Unit Circle and Trigonometric Curves ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaeeeeeeenes 315 Finding the Area between Curves ccceeessseseeceeeeeeeseseeaaasaseeeeeeeeeeeessanaaeaaaeeeeeeeeesseesensaaaaaseeeeees 316 Using Parametric Equations Ferris Wheel Problem cccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaaaeaeaees 317 Demonstrating the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus cccccccccssssseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeees 319 Computing Areas of Regular N Sided Polygons ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeess 321 Computing and Graphing Mortgage Payments cccccceeececeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 323 Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management ccceceseeesenseeeeeeeeseeeeenseeeeeneaseeeeenensneenenenss 326 Checking Available MEMOFY caisson ies a aa ie nets hea beni ce ies 326 Deleting Items from Memory ccccccececceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeesesessaeeenaesnnnananenaaaanags 329 Clearing Entries and List Elements ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeasaeseeeeeeeeeeeseesaaaaaaeeeeee
119. to determine the x distance between the beginning and end of one complete period or cycle The illustration above and to the right graphically depicts a complete period or cycle e Plot the data and trace to determine the x distance between the beginning and end of N complete periods or cycles Then divide the total distance by N After your first attempt to use SinReg and the default value for iterations to fit the data you may find the fit to be approximately correct but not optimal For an optimal fit execute SinReg 16 X istname Ylistname 2nlb where b is the value obtained from the previous SinReg execution Manual Linear Fit Manual Linear Fit allows you to visually fit a linear function to a scatter plot Manual Linear Fit is an option in the CALC menu After entering List data and viewing the StatPlot select the Manual Fit function 1 Press to display the Stat menu Press gt to select EDIT TESTS CALC Press several times to scroll down to select Ue atbxi D Manual Fit Press ENTER This displays a free floating Exrkeg cursor at the center of the display screen Pwrkeg Logistic PSinkegd WManual Fit 3 z A E C 2 Press the cursor navigation keys 4 LJ L to move the cursor to the desired location Press to select uy the first point 3 Press the cursor navigation keys 4 v LJ gt to move the cursor to the second location Press ENTER This displays a line containing the two p
120. to the data using the median median line resistant line technique calculating the summary points x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 and y3 Med Med displays values for a slope and b y intercept Med Med XJistname Ylistname freglist regequ Med Med Liz Lyu Yz UEB E alistila WlistiLle FresListi Store RFegeEtl Calculate Chapter 12 Statistics 200 LinReg axtb LinReg ax b linear regression fits the model equation y ax tb to the data using a least squares fit It displays values for a slope and b y intercept when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays values for r and r LinReg ax b X istname Ylistname freqlist regequ mlisteli WlistiLle FresListi Store RFegeEti Calculate QuadReg ax bx c QuadReg quadratic regression fits the second degree polynomial y ax bx c to the data It displays values for a b and c when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays a value for R For three data points the equation is a polynomial fit for four or more it is a polynomial regression At least three data points are required QuadReg XJistname Ylistname freqlist regequ CIMERE Aalist Li WlistiLlez FresListi Store Rea Elli Calculate CubicReg ax bx7 cx d CubicReg cubic regression fits the third degree polynomial y ax bx2 cx d to the data It displays values for a b c and d when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays a value for R For four points the equation is a polynomial fit for
121. torm laida 1b Lum il4c4ds 160606 i 3 24 oH Bs 12 AnstI reo Lt 9 24 3 24 9 34 MathPrint Classic tvm_PV tvm_PV computes the present value tvm_PVI N 1 PMT FV P Y C Y MathPrint Classic tvm_N tvm_N computes the number of payment periods Chapter 14 Applications 256 tvm_N I PVY PMTFV P Y C Y Lum MOGs SABE LUM MOGs 90606 3 36 47 36 4r 3 MathPrint Classic tvm_FV tvm_FV computes the future value tvm_FV N 1 PV PMT P Y C Y tum FYEG S Doai tum FYEG B 358 Dr 2ra arr Sil al 1 1 1 MathPrint Classic Calculating Cash Flows Calculating a Cash Flow Use the cash flow functions menu items 7 and 8 to analyze the value of money over equal time periods You can enter unequal cash flows which can be cash inflows or outflows The syntax descriptions for npv and irr use these arguments e interest rate is the rate by which to discount the cash flows the cost of money over one period e CFO0 Is the initial cash flow at time 0 it must be a real number e CFList is a list of cash flow amounts after the initial cash flow CF0 e CFFregq is a list in which each element specifies the frequency of occurrence for a grouped consecutive cash flow amount which is the corresponding element of CF List The default is 1 if you enter values they must be positive integers lt 10 000 For example express this uneven cash flow in lists 2000 2000 2000 400
122. trace cursor is displayed on the Y1 function The function that you are tracing is displayed in the top left corner 5 Press and gt to trace along Y1 one X dot at a time evaluating Y1 at each X You also can enter your estimate for the maximum value of X 6 Press 3 8 When you press a number key while in TRACE the X prompt is displayed in the bottom left corner nzc 106582 I T cb0 nase S4O4s LPH 41L conse a Tt ene enn Tt ene enn Chapter 17 Activities 303 7 Press ENTER The trace cursor jumps to the point on the Y1 function evaluated at X 3 8 Press 4 and gt until you are on the maximum Y value This is the maximum of Y1 X for the X pixel values The actual precise maximum may lie between pixel values Zooming In on the Graph TIC ene enn S TSH yy TTC ene enn nase S4O4s LEH esl To help identify maximums minimums roots and intersections of functions you can magnify the viewing window at a specific location using the ZOOM instructions 1 Press to display the ZOOM menu This menu is a typical T l 84 Plus menu To select an item you can either press the number or letter next to the item or you can press until the item number or letter is highlighted and then press ENTER Press 2 to select 2 Zoom In The graph is displayed again The cursor has changed to indicate that you are using a ZOOM instruction With the cursor near the maximu
123. uv vw and uw show relationships between two sequences To select a phase plot axes setting press FORMAT press gt until the cursor is on uv vw or uw and then press ENTER Axes Setting X axis y axis uv u n v n VW v n w n uw u n w n Example Predator Prey Model Use the predator prey model to determine the regional populations of a predator and its prey that would maintain population equilibrium for the two species This example uses the model to determine the equilibrium populations of foxes and rabbits with initial populations of 200 rabbits u nMin and 50 foxes v nMin These are the variables given values are in parentheses number of rabbits rabbit population growth rate without foxes 05 rabbit population death rate with foxes 001 number of foxes Os RED lI fox population growth rate with rabbits 0002 Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 111 Rn Wn 1 fox population death rate without rabbits 03 time in months R 1 1 M KW _1 Wa 1 1 GRp 17D Press in Seq mode to display the sequence Y editor Define the sequences and initial values for R and W as shown below Enter the sequence R as u n and enter the sequence W as v n uin u n 1 x 1 0 05 0 001x vin 1 v n v n 1 x 1 0 0002 xu n 1 0 03 Floti Floke Flake mhlin MOE LETE IE LET eke EL HWonhinsB t4aes Bl a 1 ek 1k anhini BiH wenhins Press FORMAT ENTER to select
124. value matrix Chapter 10 Matrices 151 Negation Negating a matrix returns a matrix in which the sign of every element is changed matrix abs abs absolute value MATH NUM menu returns a matrix containing the absolute value of each element of matrix abs matrix C 23 69 235 14 E Bo 25 14 C round round MATH NUM menu returns a matrix It rounds every element in matrix to decimals lt 9 If decimals is omitted the elements are rounded to 10 digits round matrix decimals Inverse Use the function or F 1 to invert a matrix matrice must be square The determinant cannot equal zero Chapter 10 Matrices 152 matrix MATRIS A 2 2 AJ 1 i Z C 4 1 2 P Liga al Powers To raise a matrix to a power matrix must be square You can use 2 x2 3 MATH menu or power for integer power between 0 and 255 hawa WS matrix matrix power MATRISLAl 2 x2 Tal i 2 37 54 a i EH 118 A 1853 1558 2337 Z406 MathPrint Classic Relational Operations To compare two matrices using the relational operations and TEST menu they must have the same dimensions and compare matrixA and matrixB on an element by element basis The other relational operations are not valid with matrices matrixA matrixB returns 1 if every comparison is true it returns 0 if any comparison is false matrixA matrixB returns 1 if
125. value of variable where the local maximum of expression occurs between lower and upper with specified tolerance Returns the value of variable where the local minimum of expression occurs between lower and upper with specified tolerance Returns the function integral of expression with respect to variable between lower and upper with specified tolerance Deselects all Y functions or specified Y functions Selects all Y functions or specified Y functions Executes commands through End incrementing variable from begin by increment until variable gt end Returns the fractional part or parts of a real or complex number expression list or matrix Computes the F distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified numerator df degrees of freedom and denominator df Displays answers as fractions if possible Displays a real or complex number expression list or matrix as a fraction simplified to its simplest terms Sets full screen mode Sets function graphing mode Displays the garbage collection menu to allow cleanup of unused archive memory Returns the greatest common divisor of valueA and valueB which can be real numbers or lists Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item D x MATH 7 fMax D ma MATH 6 fMin D I MATH 9 fnint VARS Y VARS 4 On Off 2 FnOff 2nd DISTR DISTR 9 F pdf Answ
126. 0 4000 3000 Chapter 14 Applications 25 CF0 2000 CFList 2000 3000 4000 CFFreg 2 1 2 npv irr npv net present value is the sum of the present values for the cash inflows and outflows A positive result for npv indicates a profitable investment npv interest rate CF0 CFList CF Freq irr internal rate of return is the interest rate at which the net present value of the cash flows is equal to zero irr CF0 CFList CFFreq 1000 0 5000 3000 2000 2500 l g 72506 As Se HFB SABE Lio HA SHES L 1 297H 65 LIBRE AR 2586 A a aa ZHRB is e Calculating Amortization Calculating an Amortization Schedule Use the amortization functions menu items 9 0 and A to calculate balance sum of principal and sum of interest for an amortization schedule bal bal computes the balance for an amortization schedule using stored values for I PV and PMT npmt is the number of the payment at which you want to calculate a balance It must be a positive integer lt 10 000 roundvalue specifies the internal precision the calculator uses to calculate the balance if you do not specify roundvalue then the Tl 84 Plus uses the current Float Fix decimal mode setting Chapter 14 Applications 258 bal npmi roundvalue 1466 66 P4 2 oe 1BBRRE AR 768 31 FMHT 541 65 91 124P So a4 Y 68 eee 12 63 91 jbalcizs 992444 xPrn LInt xPrn computes the
127. 02 6 Press TRACE Tracing begins at nMin the start of the forestry plan Press gt to trace the sequence year by year The sequence is displayed at the top of the screen The values for n number of years X X n because n is plotted on the x axis and Y tree count are displayed at the bottom When will the forest stabilize With how many trees U iFOFEC Buts Litioogy Defining and Displaying Sequence Graphs TI 84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities The steps for defining a sequence graph are similar to the steps for defining a function graph Chapter 6 assumes that you are familiar with Chapter 3 Function Graphing Chapter 6 details aspects of sequence graphing that differ from function graphing Setting Sequence Graphing Mode To display the mode screen press MODE To graph sequence functions you must select Seq graphing mode before you enter window variables and before you enter sequence functions Sequence graphs automatically plot in Simul mode regardless of the current plotting order mode setting TI 84 Plus Sequence Functions u v and w The Tl 84 Plus has three sequence functions that you can enter from the keyboard u v and w They are second functions of the 7 8 and 9 keys Press u to enter u for example You can define sequence functions in terms of e The independent variable n e The previous term in the sequence function such as u n 1 e The term that precedes the previous term in the s
128. 23 356 ClrHome clear home screen 292 356 ClrList clear list 194 356 CirTable clear table 292 356 coefficients of determination r2 R2 196 colon separator 278 combinations nCr 57 366 compiling an assembly program 294 354 complex modes a bi rei 17 50 355 370 numbers 17 50 370 compounding periods per year variable C Y 253 263 concatenation 270 381 confidence intervals 36 220 conj conjugate 54 356 Connected plotting mode 17 356 connecting two calculators 346 349 contrast display 4 convergence sequence graphing 110 conversions gt Dec to decimal 39 357 gt DMS to degrees minutes seconds 61 358 Eff to effective interest rate 261 4F3 4D 50 Frac to fraction conversion 39 360 An d3 4Un d 49 gt Nom to nominal interest rate conversion 261 366 gt Polar to polar conversion 56 368 Rect to rectangular conversion 56 371 EqubString equation to string conversion 270 359 List matr list to matrix conversion 158 173 364 Matrblist matrix to list conversion 157 174 365 P gt Rx PeRy polar to rectangular conversion 61 369 R gt Pr R gt PO rectangular to polar conversion 372 R gt Pr R PO rectangular to polar conversion 61 StringbEqu string to equation conversion 271 375 convert time timeCnv 376 CoordOff 75 356 CoordOn 75 356 correlation coefficient r 196 cos cosine 36 356 cos arccosine 36 356 cosh hyperbolic cosine 273 356
129. 25 3 675 L1 45 5 67 MathPrint abst 2563 2 abst ii 2a 3 6073 L1 45 3 673 Classic Note abs is also available on the MATH CPX menu Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 46 round round returns a number expression list or matrix rounded to decimals lt 9 If decimals is omitted value is rounded to the digits that are displayed up to 10 digits round value decimals iPart fPart iPart integer part returns the integer part or parts of real or complex numbers expressions lists and matrices iPart value iFart 6 iPartciee o 6275 3 E i i S 141592654 fPart fractional part returns the fractional part or parts of real or complex numbers expressions lists and matrices 13 1Partems fPart value Note The way the fractional result is displayed depends on the Answers mode setting To convert from one format to another use XF4 PD on the FRAC shortcut menu ALPHA F1 4 int int greatest integer returns the largest integer lt real or complex numbers expressions lists and matrices int value Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 47 intes 56 inte 33 int 24 E intg 3 293 B Note For a given value the result of int is the same as the result of iPart for nonnegative numbers and negative integers but one integer less than the result of iPart for negative noninteger numbers min max min
130. 25 3h List matr List matr lists stored to matrix fills matrixname column by column with the elements from each list If the dimensions of all lists are not equal then List matr fills each extra matrixname row with 0 Complex lists are not valid Chapter 11 Lists 173 List matr ist list2 list nymatrixname Matrplist Matrlist matrix stored to lists fills each distname with elements from each column in matrix If the number of istname arguments exceeds the number of columns in matrix then Matrlist ignores extra listname arguments Likewise if the number of columns in matrix exceeds the number of listnhame arguments then Matrlist ignores extra matrix columns Matrblist matrix listnamel listname2 listname n ll 2 3 lt 1 43 4 3 6 gt L Mateklist A Li i2 D aLz Lz3 Lz Done ia Bs Matrblist also fills a istname with elements from a specified column in matrix To fill a list with a specific column from matrix you must enter a column after matrix Matrblist matrix column listname gt 13 Gs L preceding one to five characters identifies those characters as a user created Jistname listname may comprise letters 8 and numbers but it must begin with a letter from A to Z or 0 Llistname Generally L must precede a user created list name when you enter a user created list name where other input is valid for example on the home screen Without the L the TIl
131. 3 To find the numerical integral of a function follow these steps 1 Select 7 f x dx from the CALCULATE menu The current graph is displayed with Lower Limit in the bottom left corner Press 4 or to move the cursor to the function for which you want to calculate the integral Set lower and upper limits as you would set left and right bounds for zero The integral value is displayed and the integrated area is shaded Lower Limit 1 2E TEixidy 3 4273117 Note The shaded area is a drawing Use ClirDraw Chapter 8 or any action that invokes Smart Graph to clear the shaded area Chapter 3 Function Graphing 90 Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing Getting Started Path of a Ball Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Graph the parametric equation that describes the path of a ball hit at an initial soeed of 30 meters per second at an initial angle of 25 degrees with the horizontal from ground level How far does the ball travel When does it hit the ground How high does it go Ignore all forces except gravity For initial velocity v and angle 9 the position of the ball as a function of time has horizontal and vertical components Horizontal X1 t tvgcos Vertical Y1 t tvosin gt The vertical and horizontal vectors of the ball s motion also will be graphed Vertical vector X2 t 0 Y2 t Y1 t Horizontal vector X3 t X1 t Y3 t 0 Gravity constant g 9 8 m sec
132. 42 equations with multiple roots 44 errors diagnosing and correcting 33 messages 394 examples applications area between curves 316 areas of regular n sided polygons 321 box plots 306 box with lid 299 defining a 299 defining a table of values 300 setting the viewing window 302 tracing the graph 303 zooming in on the graph 304 zooming in on the table 301 cobweb attractors 312 fundamental theorem of calculus 319 guess the coefficients 313 inequalities 309 mortgage payments 323 parametric equations ferris wheel problem 317 piecewise functions 308 quadratic formula 406 converting to a fraction 297 displaying complex results 298 entering a calculation 297 Sierpinski triangle 311 solving a system of nonlinear equations 310 unit circle and trig curves 315 examples Getting Started coin flip 35 compound interest 253 drawing a tangent line 121 financing a car 252 forest and trees 102 generating a sequence 161 mean height of a population 215 path of a ball 91 pendulum lengths and periods 178 polar rose 97 roots of a function 115 sending variables 344 solving a system of linear equations 144 unit circle 137 volume of a cylinder 275 examples miscellaneous calculating outstanding loan balances 259 convergence 110 daylight hours in Alaska 204 predator prey model 111 examplesdGetting Started graphing a circle 65 exponential regression ExpReg 202 359 expr string to expression conversion 270 359 ExpReg exponential regres
133. 45413 at L3 16 ADDIS L3 14 LADD 11 12 133 The next screen shows another list L4 The elements of L4 are the sum of the same formula that is attached to L3 However quotation marks are not entered so the formula is not attached to L4 Chapter 11 Lists 165 On the next line 6 gt L3 1 L3 changes the first element in L3 to 6 and then redisplays L3 L 164 L4 111 12 133 BeLeC1399L L 6 Z So The last screen shows that editing L3 updated LADD10 but did not change L4 This is because the formula L3 10 is attached to LADD10 but it is not attached to L4 LADO Ly lt 4 14 133 11 12 133 Note To view a formula that is attached to a list name use the stat list editor Chapter 12 Attaching a Formula to a List on the Home Screen or in a Program To attach a formula to a list name from a blank line on the home screen or from a program follow these steps 1 Press enter the formula which must resolve to a list and press again Note When you include more than one list name in a formula each list must have the same dimension 2 Press STO 3 Enter the name of the list to which you want to attach the formula e Press 2nd and then enter a TI 84 Plus list name L1 through L6 e Press LIST and select a user created list name from the LIST NAMES menu e Enter a user created list name directly using L 4 Press ENTER 4 6 934 1 2 9 5L L LIST SEL 4 LLIST L276 46 453 Note
134. 57 173 354 Automatic Power Down APD 3 404 automatic regression equation 196 automatic residual list RESID 195 axes format sequence graphing 107 axes displaying AxesOn AxesOff 75 355 AxesOff 75 355 AxesOn 75 355 backing up calculator memory 348 351 bal amortization balance 258 355 batteries 4 400 below graph style 71 binomcdf 247 355 binompdf 246 355 block 340 Boolean logic 63 box pixel mark 0O 132 210 Boxplot plot type LE 209 busy indicator 8 C C Y compounding periods per year variable 253 263 y2cdf chi square cdf 355 y pdf chi square pdf 355 y2 Test chi square test 355 CALCULATE menu 87 Calculate output option 218 220 cash flow calculating 257 formula 389 irr internal rate of return 258 363 npv net present value 258 367 CATALOG 266 CBL 2 293 346 361 CBR 293 346 361 check memory 326 checkTmr check timer 355 Chi 234 chi square cdf y2cdf 245 355 chi square goodness of fit test 234 chi square pdf y2pdf 244 355 chi square test y2 Test 233 234 355 Circle draw circle 128 355 Clear Entries 326 356 clearing all lists CIrAllLists 326 356 drawing ClrDraw 123 356 entries Clear Entries 326 356 home screen ClrHome 292 356 list ClrList 194 356 table ClrTable 292 356 Clock 9 Clock Off 11 Clock On 10 ClockOff turn clock off 356 ClockOn turn clock on 356 CIrAllLists clear all lists 326 356 ClrDraw clear drawing 1
135. 69 panning 80 Par Param parametric graphing mode 16 367 parametric equations 94 parametric graphing CALC calculate operations on a graph 96 defining and editing 94 free moving cursor 95 graph format 94 graph styles 93 moving the cursor to a value 96 selecting and deselecting 94 setting parametric mode 93 tracing 96 window variables 94 Y editor 93 zoom operations 96 parentheses 29 path graph style 71 Pause 284 367 pausing a graph 76 Pen 130 permutations nPr 57 367 phase plots 111 Pic pictures 134 pictures Pic 134 pixels in Horiz G T modes 133 141 Plot1 210 367 Plot2 210 367 Plot3 210 367 PlotsOff 212 368 PlotsOn 212 368 plotting modes 17 plotting stat data 208 PMT payment amount variable 253 263 Pmt_Bgn payment beginning variable 262 368 Pmt_End payment end variable 262 368 poissoncdf 247 368 poissonpdf 247 368 Pol Polar polar graphing mode 16 98 368 polar equations 98 polar form complex numbers 52 polar graphing 410 CALC calculate operations on a graph 101 defining and displaying 98 equations 98 free moving cursor 100 graph format 99 graph styles 98 mode Pol Polar 16 98 368 moving the cursor to a value 100 selecting and deselecting 98 tracing 100 window variables 99 Y editor 98 ZOOM operations 101 PolarGC polar graphing coordinates 75 368 pooled option 218 220 power 36 380 381 power of ten 10 37 power of ten 10 381 present value 253 256 previo
136. 7 min valueA valueB min ist Result Fits a linear equation to a scatter plot Displays most entries and answers the way they are displayed in textbooks such as re Fills each listname with elements from each column in matrix Fills a listname with elements from a specified column in matrix Returns the larger of valueA and valueB Returns largest real or complex element in ist Returns a real or complex list of the larger of each pair of elements in JistA and JistB Returns a real or complex list of the larger of value or each list element Returns the mean of list with frequency freglist Returns the median of list with frequency freglist Fits a median median model to X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Generates a menu of up to seven items during program execution Returns smaller of valueA and valueB Returns smallest real or complex element in ist Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item STAT CALC D Manual Fit MATHPRINT 2nd LIST OPS A Matrlist 2nd LIST OPS A Matpr gt list NUM 7 max 2nd LIST MATH 2 max 2nd LIST MATH 2 max 2nd LIST MATH 2 max LIST MATH 3 mean LIST MATH 4 median STAT CALC 3 Med Med t CTL C Menu NUM 6 min 2nd LIST MATH 1 min 365 Function or Instruction Arguments min J
137. 7 the cursor moves from the same position Graphing Accuracy The free moving cursor moves from pixel to pixel on the screen When you move the cursor to a pixel that appears to be on the function the cursor may be near but not actually on the function The coordinate value displayed at the bottom of the screen actually may not be a point on the function To move the cursor along a function use TRACE The coordinate values displayed as you move the cursor approximate actual math coordinates accurate to within the width and height of the pixel As Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax get closer together as in a Zoom In graphing accuracy increases and the coordinate values more closely approximate the math coordinates Free moving cursor appears to be on the curve n s 6L 0 12 Y 7 419354H Exploring Graphs with TRACE Beginning a Trace Use TRACE to move the cursor from one plotted point to the next along a function To begin a trace press TRACE If the graph is not displayed already press to display it The trace cursor is on the first selected function in the Y editor at the middle X value on the screen The cursor coordinates are displayed at the bottom of the screen if CoordOn format is selected The Y expression is displayed in the top left corner of the screen if ExprOn format is selected Chapter 3 Function Graphing 78 Moving the Trace Cursor To move the TRACE cursor do this To the previous or next plotted poin
138. 84 Plus may misinterpret a user created list name as implied multiplication of two or more characters L need not precede a user created list name where a list name is the only valid input for example at the Name prompt in the stat list editor or the Xlist and Ylist prompts in the stat plot editor If you enter L where it is not necessary the Tl 84 Plus will ignore the entry Chapter 11 Lists 174 LIST MATH Menu LIST MATH Menu To display the LIST MATH menu press LIST 4 NAMES OPS MATH te mini Returns minimum element of a list 2 max Returns maximum element of a list 3 mean Returns mean of a list 4 median Returns median of a list 5 sum Returns sum of elements in a list 62 prod Returns product of elements in list 7 stdDev Returns standard deviation of a list 8 variance Returns the variance of a list min max min minimum and max maximum return the smallest or largest element of ist4 If two lists are compared it returns a list of the smaller or larger of each pair of elements in ist4 and istB For a complex list the element with smallest or largest magnitude modulus is returned min istA istB max istA listB mingil Z 3g Loa F mingil Z 3g 3 2 il 1 o1h3 fer max 1 2 45 75 2 ja 3 2 33 MathPrint Classic Note min and max are the same as min and max on the MATH NUM menu mean median mean returns the mean value of list median returns the median v
139. 88 t Drawn results F 2 1985 F 265 F 2 19865 F 264 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions LinRegTTest LinRegTTest linear regression test item F computes a linear regression on the given data and a t test on the value of slope B and the correlation coefficient p for the equation y a fx It tests the null hypothesis Ho B 0 equivalently p 0 against one of the alternatives below e H B40 and p0 B amp p 40 e H B lt O and p lt 0 B amp p lt 0 e H B gt 0 and p gt 0 B amp p gt 0 The regression equation is automatically stored to RegEQ VARS Statistics EQ secondary menu If you enter a Y variable name at the RegEQ prompt the calculated regression equation is automatically stored to the specified Y equation In the example below the regression equation is stored to Y1 which is then selected turned on In the example L3 38 56 59 64 74 L4 41 63 70 72 84 Input Calculate Calculated Te Ploti Flok Flot results by Hig 3 609641 3 BEGG a 2 6596 When LinRegTTest is executed the list of residuals is created and stored to the list name RESID automatically RESID is placed on the LIST NAMES menu Note For the regression equation you can use the fix decimal mode setting to control the number of digits stored after the decimal point Chapter 1 However limiting the number of digits to a small number could affect the accuracy of the fit Chapt
140. A TYPE i i Pai t Boto gt You can use division to compute the answer C1 i3 01 139 i Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 51 Note about Radian Versus Degree Mode Radian mode is recommended for complex number calculations Internally the TI 84 Plus converts all entered trigonometric values to radians but it does not convert values for exponential logarithmic or hyperbolic functions In degree mode complex identities such as e i0 cos i sin are not generally true because the values for cos and sin are converted to radians while those for e are not For example e i45 cos 45 i sin 45 is treated internally as e4 i45 cos 1 4 i sin 1 4 Complex identities are always true in radian mode Interpreting Complex Results Complex numbers in results including list elements are displayed in either rectangular or polar form as specified by the mode setting or by a display conversion instruction In the example below polar complex re 9i and Radian modes are set MathPrint m c lie 1 325654296 t Classic C2 Cleat 3256542966 Rectangular Complex Mode Rectangular complex mode recognizes and displays a complex number in the form a bi where a is the real component b is the imaginary component and i is a constant equal to 1 Ine ola 321415926541 To enter a complex number in rectangular form enter the value of a real component press or enter
141. AD ADDRESS BAD GUESS BOUND BREAK DATA TYPE DIM MISMATCH Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies You have attempted to use edit or delete an archived variable For example the expression dim L1 produces an error if L1 is archived You have attempted to archive a variable and there is not enough space in archive to receive it A function or instruction does not have the correct number of arguments See Appendix A for function and instruction syntax Appendix A displays the arguments and punctuation needed to execute the function or instruction For example stdDev is freg ist is a function of the TI 84 Plus The arguments are shown in italics The arguments in brackets are optional and you need not type them You must also be sure to separate multiple arguments with a comma For example stdDev is freglist might be entered as stdDev L1 or stdDev L1 L2 since the frequency list or freqlist is optional You have attempted to send or receive an application and an error e g electrical interference has occurred in the transmission e Ina CALC operation you specified a Guess that is not between Left Bound and Right Bound e For the solve function or the equation solver you specified a guess that is not between lower and upper e Your guess and several points around it are undefined Examine a graph of the function If the equation has a solution change the bounds and or the initial guess e Ina CALC op
142. ATRX EDIT menu Press 1 to select 1 A 2 Press 2 4 to define a 2x4 matrix The rectangular cursor indicates the current element Ellipses indicate additional columns beyond the screen 3 Press 1 to enter the first element The MATRISLA 2 x4 rectangular cursor moves to the second column of td me the first row Chapter 10 Matrices 144 4 Press 2 3 3 to complete the first fiATET Inl 2 4 row for X 2Y 3Z 3 5 Press 2 3 4 3 to enter the second row for 2X 3Y 4Z 3 6 Press QUIT to return to the home screen If Pret ci necessary press to clear the home screen Press gt to display the MATRX MATH menu Press 4 to wrap to the end of the menu Select B rref to copy rref to the home screen 7 Press 1 to select 1 A from the MATRX NAMES menu Press ENTER The reduced row echelon form of the matrix is displayed and stored in Ans 1X 1Z 3 therefore X 3 Z 1 2Z2 3 therefore Y 3 22 Defining a Matrix What Is a Matrix A matrix is a two dimensional array You can display define or edit a matrix in the matrix editor You can also define a matrix using the MTRX shortcut menu ALPHA F3 The TI 84 Plus has 10 matrix variables A through J You can define a matrix directly in an expression A matrix depending on available memory may have up to 99 rows or columns You can store only real numbers in Tl 84 Plus matrices Fractions are stored as real numbers and can be used
143. As the graph is plotted X Y R and 9 are updated Smart Graph applies to polar graphs Window Variables and Y VARS Menus You can perform these actions from the home screen or a program e Access functions by using the name of the equation as a variable These function names are available on the YVARS shortcut menu ALPHA F4 prep 2 Chapter 5 Polar Graphing 99 e Store polar equations ee ey Floti FOkE Flot Done sre P e Select or deselect polar equations Fn ff i Floti Flot Flot Done P41 BSE eS e Store values directly to window variables Femi r al Exploring Polar Graphs Free Moving Cursor The free moving cursor in Pol graphing works the same as in Func graphing In RectGC format moving the cursor updates the values of X and Y if CoordOn format is selected X and Y are displayed In PolarGC format X Y R and 0 are updated if CoordOn format is selected R and 0 are displayed TRACE To activate TRACE press TRACE When TRACE is active you can move the trace cursor along the graph of the equation one Ostep at a time When you begin a trace the trace cursor is on the first selected function at Omin If ExprOn format is selected then the equation is displayed In RectGC format TRACE updates the values of X Y and 0 if CoordOn format is selected X Y and 8 are displayed In PolarGC format TRACE updates X Y R and 9 if CoordOn format is selected R and 9 are displayed To move
144. B 2 PropZint t TESTS 5 1 PropZTest t TESTS 6 2 PropZTest 2nd DRAW POINTS 3 Pt Change 2nd DRAW POINTS 2 Pt Off 2nd DRAW POINTS 1 Pt On STAT CALC A PwrReg 2nd DRAW POINTS 6 Pxl Change 2nd DRAW POINTS 5 Pxl Off 2nd DRAW POINTS 4 Pxl On 2nd DRAW POINTS 7 pxl Test 2nd ANGLE ANGLE 7 P gt Rx Appendix A Functions and Instructions 369 Function or Instruction Arguments Result Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item P gt Ry 7 9 QuadReg X istname Ylistname freglist regequ QuartReg X isiname Ylistname freqlist regequ Radian rand numtrials randBin numtrials prob zumsimulations randint ower upper numtrials randiIntNoRep lowerint upperint randM rows columns randNorm u o 2umtrials re i Real real value RecallGDB n RecallPic n Returns Y given polar coordinates r and 9 or a list of polar ANGLE coordinates Fits a quadratic regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Fits a quartic regression model to X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Sets radian angle mode Returns a random number between 0 and 1 fora specified number of trials numtrials Generates and displays a random real number from a specified Binomial distribution Generates a
145. ClrAllLists instruction is pasted to the program editor The lists are cleared when the program is executed Archiving and UnArchiving Variables Archiving and UnArchiving Variables Archiving lets you store data programs or other variables to the user data archive ARC where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently Archiving also allows you to free up RAM for variables that may require additional memory Archived variables cannot be edited or executed They can only be seen and unarchived For example if you archive list L1 you will see that L1 exists in memory but if you select it and paste the name L1 to the home screen you won t be able to see its contents or edit it Note Not all variables may be archived Not all archived variables may be unarchived For example system variables including r t x y and 8 cannot be archived Apps and Groups always exist in Flash ROM so there is no need to archive them Groups cannot be unarchived However you can ungroup or delete them Archive UnArchive Variable Type a a Complex numbers Se are Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 330 Archive UnArchive Variable Type yes no yes no Lists L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 and user defined names Programs Functions ae Y 2 Y9 YO no i applicable Parametric X1T and Y1T X6T no not equations and Y6T applicable Polar functions en Sequence functions cee Stat plots Plot1 Plot2 Plot3 ee Graph databas
146. ENTRY Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 23 When you press ENTRY all the expressions and instructions separated by colons are pasted to the current cursor location You can edit any of the entries and then execute all of them when you press ENTER Example For the equation A nr use trial and error to find the radius of a circle that covers 200 square centimeters Use 8 as your first guess 8 STO R ALPHA SETENE 2nd x R x2 ENTER T E a oes 2nd ENTRY 2nd 4 7 nd Ens C 95 TEE ENTER 21 6619298 Ta Fotki nkt 195 3565097 Continue until the answer is as accurate as you want Clearing ENTRY Clear Entries Chapter 18 clears all data that the Tl 84 Plus is holding in the ENTRY storage area Using Ans in an Expression When an expression is evaluated successfully from the home screen or from a program the T1 84 Plus stores the answer to a storage area called Ans last answer Ans may be a real or complex number a list a matrix or a string When you turn off the T l 84 Plus the value in Ans is retained in memory You can use the variable Ans to represent the last answer in most places Press ANS to copy the variable name Ans to the cursor location When the expression is evaluated the TI 84 Plus uses the value of Ans in the calculation Calculate the area of a garden plot 1 7 meters by 4 2 meters Then calculate the yield per square meter if the plot produces a total of 147 tomatoes
147. ER The table updates showing the changes in X in increments of 0 1 Notice that the maximum value for Y1 in this table view is 410 26 which occurs at X 3 7 Therefore the maximum occurs where 3 6 lt X lt 3 8 5 With X 3 6 highlighted press 4 01 to set ATbI 0 01 6 Press and 4 to scroll the table Four equivalent maximum values are shown 410 26 at X 3 67 3 68 3 69 and 3 70 Chapter 17 Activities 301 7 Press or 4 to move the cursor to 3 67 Press gt to move the cursor into the Y1 column aL The value of Y1 at X 3 67 is displayed on the bottom line in full precision as 410 261226 56 B7 6H A E Ay wi re 4 8 Press to display the other maximum aL The value of Y1 at X 3 68 in full precision is 410 264064 at X 3 69 is 410 262318 and at X 3 7 is 410 256 647 07 Oh oh m om 4146 464864 The maximum volume of the box would occur at 3 68 if you could measure and cut the paper at 01 centimeter increments Setting the Viewing Window You also can use the graphing features of the TI 84 Plus to find the maximum value of a previously defined function When the graph is activated the viewing window defines the displayed portion of the coordinate plane The values of the window variables determine the size of the viewing window 1 Press to display the window editor where you can view and edit the values of the window variables The standa
148. Graphing 113 Keystroke Differences Between TI 84 Plus and TI 82 Sequence Keystroke Changes Refer to the table if you are familiar with the Tl 82 It compares Tl 84 Plus sequence name syntax and variable syntax with Tl 82 sequence name syntax and variable syntax TI 84 Plus TI 82 nin u n Un v n I Vn w n u n 1 Un 1 v n 1 Vn 1 w n 1 On TI 84 Plus press 2nd u 2nd v 2nd w 2nd u OKTO 0 0 2nd v OKTO 0 0 2nd w OKTO 0 0 On TI 82 press 2nd n Y VARS LY VARS not available 2nd Un 1 2nd Vn not available Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 114 Chapter 7 Tables Getting Started Roots of a Function Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Evaluate the function Y X 2X at each integer between 10 and 10 How many sign changes occur and at what X values 1 Press to set Func graphing mode Press Y Press MATH 3 to select 3 Then Floti Plokz Plots press 2 to enter the function Y1 X 2x Press TBLSET to display the TABLE SETUP screen Press 10 to set TblStart 10 Press 1 to set ATbI 1 Press to select Indpnt Auto automatically generated independent values Press to select Depend Auto automatically generated dependent values Press TABLE to display the table screen Note The message on the entry line Press for ATbl
149. INDOW Set these window variables Tmin 1 Xmin 0 Ymin 0 Tmax 360 Xmax 360 Ymax 1000 Tstep 12 Xscl 10 Yscl 100 Note To increase the graph speed change Tstep to 24 7 Press TRACE After the graph is drawn press 240 to move the trace cursor to T 240 which is equivalent to 20 years of payments Chapter 17 Activities 324 YIT ZFRACT sR T e40 ee ee PH SEBS saas The graph shows that for the 240th payment X 240 358 03 of the 800 payment is applied to principal Y 358 03 Note The sum of the payments Y3T Y1T Y2T is always 800 8 Press to move the cursor onto the function for interest defined by X2T and Y2T Enter 240 VeprLInecTse T e40 n c4e ee eb be be os The graph shows that for the 240th payment X 240 441 97 of the 800 payment is interest Y 441 97 9 Press QUIT 9 to paste 9 bal to the home screen Check the figures from the graph At which monthly payment will the principal allocation surpass the interest allocation Chapter 17 Activities 325 Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management Checking Available Memory MEMORY Menu At any time you can check available memory or manage existing memory by selecting items from the MEMORY menu To access this menu press MEM MEMORY ne AOU caw Displays information about the graphing calculator including current OS version number 2 Mem Mgmt Del Reports memory availability and variable usage 3 Clear Entries Clears ENTRY l
150. LVE and shortcut menus For example when you press and then MATH the letter A is entered This guidebook describes this keystroke combination as A Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 2 If you want to enter several alphabetic characters in a row you can press A LOCK to lock the alpha key in the On position and avoid having to press multiple times Press a second time to unlock it Note The flashing cursor changes to Gi when you press ALPHA even if you are accessing a function or a menu TI 84 Plus Silver Edition TEXAS INSTRUMENTS A F1 F4 eae shortcut 2nd menus for Accesses the A functionality second function OO an including templates printed above each w oom mace for fractions n d key and other i bP functions ALPHA Accesses the third Were Cars Z Z we Cass GE pres aie Be Cn Can Ea Co above each key OO OOS MOTI cS S00 ZOOG Hooo Turning On and Turning Off the TI 84 Plus Turning On the Graphing Calculator To turn on the TI 84 Plus press ON An information screen displays reminding you that you can press F1 F4 to display the shortcut menus This message also displays when you reset RAM gt To continue but not see this information screen again press 1 gt To continue and see this information screen again the next time you turn on the TI 84 Plus
151. Let bal 0 RND PV lterate from m 1 to pmt2 L RND RND12 i x bal m 1 Peet bal m 1 1 RND PMT then bal bal pmt2 Prn bal pmt2 bal pmt1 SInt pmt2 pmtl 1 x RND PMT Prn where RND round the display to the number of decimal places selected RND12 round to 12 decimal places Balance principal and interest are dependent on the values of PMT PV 1 and pmrl and pmi 2 Cash Flow 1 s 1 1 1 i npx CFot SCE ert O j 1 l Net present value is dependent on the values of the initial cash flow CF subsequent cash flows CFj frequency of each cash flow nj and the specified interest rate i irr 100 x i where i satisfies npv 0 Appendix B Reference Information 389 Internal rate of return is dependent on the values of the initial cash flow CFQ and subsequent cash flows CF i I 100 Interest Rate Conversions Ef 100 x eP ETD _ 4 where x 01 x Nom CP Nom CPx In x 1 100 x CP x fe 1 where x Olx Ef Eff effective rate CP compounding periods Nom _ nominal rate Days between Dates With the dbd function you can enter or compute a date within the range Jan 1 1950 through Dec 31 2049 Actual actual day count method assumes actual number of days per month and actual number of days per year dbd days between dates Number of Days II Number of Days Number of Days YI YB
152. MATRIX MATH 0 cumSum 2nd CATALOG dayOfWk 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 1 Finance CALC D dbd Answers DEC MATH 2 gt Dec t Degree t CTL G DelVar t TBLSET Depend Ask t TBLSET Depend Auto 2nd MATRIX MATH 1 det 2nd CATALOG DiagnosticOff 2nd CATALOG DiagnosticOn 2nd LIST OPS 3 dim 2nd MATRIX MATH 3 dim Appendix A Functions and Instructions 357 Function or Instruction Arguments length dim listname rows columns gt dim matrixname Disp Disp valueA valueB valueC value n DispGraph DispTable value DMS Dot DrawF expression Drawlnv expression DS lt variable value commandA commands D e power e list Exponent valueEexponent Exponent listEexponent Exponent matrixE exponent Result Assigns a new dimension ength to a new or existing listname Assigns new dimensions to a new or existing matrixname Displays the home screen Displays each value Displays the graph Displays the table Displays value in DMS format Sets dot plotting mode resets all Y editor graph style settings to Draws expression in terms of X on the graph Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd LIST OPS 3 dim 2nd MATRIX MATH 3 dim t PRGM I O 3 Disp t PRGM I O 3 Disp t PRGM I O 4 DispGraph t PRGM I O 5 DispTable 2nd ANGLE ANGLE 4 gt
153. MODE and then move the cursor to Horiz or G T and press ENTER e Select Horiz horizontal to display the graph screen and another screen split horizontally e Select G T graph table to display the graph screen and table screen split vertically T REST 4 The split screen is activated when you press any key that applies to either half of the split screen If stat plots are turned on the plots are shown along with the x y plots in graphs Press TABLE to make the table portion of the split screen active and to display the list data Press or 4 to highlight a value you want to edit and then enter a new value directly in the table to overwrite the previous value Press gt repeatedly to display each column of data both table and list data Chapter 9 Split Screen 138 Split screen display with both x y plots and stat plots Some screens are never displayed as split screens For example if you press in Horiz or G T mode the mode screen is displayed as a full screen If you then press a key that displays either half of a split screen such as TRACE the split screen returns When you press a key or key combination in either Horiz or G T mode the cursor is placed in the half of the display to which that key applies For example if you press TRACE the cursor is placed in the half where the graph is displayed If you press TABLE the cursor is placed in the half where the table is displayed The Tl 84 Plus will re
154. NEN eT 118 Chapter 8 Draw MstruUcti hs ssiri a aAa AER EEE 121 Getting Started Drawing a Tangent Line ccccceccecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaeeeeeeenees 121 Using tne DRAW MENU croaet r N Ea E E 122 Cleanno DI AWN OS ereiaro ea UEa aR a aaa TA A a EREE NN 123 Drawing CLne SegmMeENtTS ensarniiona n aooo a tesecnveyeoeedveclaestuey 124 Drawing Horizontal and Vertical LINeS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesesseseaaageeeeeeees 125 Drawing Tangent ilies e i o a A E a a A 126 Drawing Functions and lnverses sis cudsoihanc20 vase cxsnusnadcusoteceddevudwnundleuteceusleesdallelwcasesesedadislatedesuderes 127 Shading Areason a Gla pM ainina tangia oaa a aa ei e a d 128 DIEE E S E octets A ET A E E IAA OE A E cvetcete ess 128 PlacCini Text ona Graphe orenian ias Ea aA AEE con Aaa AE a EAE A A E AD A E OA 129 Using Pento Drawona Grap iarna aaa EA E a E AA AEK 130 Drawing Ponts ona Grap Nosene aa a a E a aa aaa NER a 131 DAW IOP ICIS Shireen E a E e E eee 132 STOFING Gra pM PICTURES RIC Iens e aO EAE 134 Recalling Graph Pictures PI srasisa eia r e a a es eats 135 Storing Graph Databases GDB ccccccceeecceeeeesseseeeeeceeeeeceeauaaaseeeseeeeeeeesseeaaaaaaseeseeseeeeeeeesaas 135 Recalling Graph Databases GDB cccccssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeaessauseceeeeeeseeseaeeaaseseeeeseeeesesseaaaaasess 136 Chapter 9 SPITS GOI Seii Eea aE 137 Getting Started Exploring the U
155. OG isClockOn t CTL A IS gt 2nd LIST OPS B L t FORMAT LabelOff t FORMAT LabelOn t CTL 9 Lbl 363 Function or Instruction Arguments Icm valueA valueB length szring Line X Y X2 Y2 Line X Y X2 Y2 0 LinReg atbx X istname Ylistname freglist regequ LinReg ax tb X istname Ylistname freglist regequ LinRegTInt X istname Ylistname freqlist confidence level regequ LinRegTTest X istname Ylistname freqlist alternative regequ AList Jist List gt matr istnamel listname n matrixname In value LnReg X istname Ylistname freglist regequ log value logBASE value base Logistic X istname Ylistname freglist regequ Result Returns the least common multiple of valueA and valueB which can be real numbers or lists Returns the number of characters in string Draws a line from X Y to X2 Y2 Erases a line from X Y to X2 Y2 Fits a linear regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Fits a linear regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Performs a linear regression and computes the t confidence interval for the slope coefficient b Performs a linear regression and a t test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt Returns a list
156. Plus Silver Edition you can send these variables to the TI 83 Plus or Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition They will be automatically sent to the RAM of the TI 83 Plus or Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition during the transfer process It will send to archive if the item is from archive To send data to a Tl 83 Plus or Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition 1 Use an I O unit to unit cable to link the two units together 2 Set the Tl 83 Plus or Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition to receive Chapter 19 Communication Link 349 Press LINK on the sending TI 84 Plus to display the LINK SEND menu Select the menu of the items you want to transmit Press gt on the sending TI 84 Plus to display the LINK TRANSMIT menu Confirm that the receiving unit is set to receive OR Ole ea ee Press on the sending TI 84 Plus to select 1 Transmit and begin transmitting Receiving Items LINK RECEIVE Menu To display the LINK RECEIVE menu press LINK gt SEND RECEIVE 1 Receive Sets unit to receive data transmission Receiving Unit When you select 1 Receive from the LINK RECEIVE menu on the receiving unit the message Waiting and the busy indicator are displayed The receiving unit is ready to receive transmitted items To exit the receive mode without receiving items press ON and then select 1 Quit from the Error in Xmit menu When transmission is complete the unit exits the receive mode You can select 1 Receive again to receive more items The receiving unit the
157. STO ALPHA A to store the TSH L12B 1420 coefficient of the x term 14 2 Press ALPHA The colon allows you to enter more than one instruction on a line 3 Press 11 B to store the coefficient of the X term Press to enter a new instruction on the same line Press 14 C to store the constant 4 Press to store the values to the variables A B and C The last value you stored is shown on the right side of the display The cursor moves to the next line ready for your next entry 5 Press ALPHA F1 1 ALPHA B 2nd v FA B t ALPHA B x2 4 ALPHA A ALPHA C PJD 2 14 A to enter the expression for one e fe unc of the solutions for the quadratic formula a b JB 4ac 2a 6 Press to find one solution for the FA 1116 1430 equation 2x 11x 14 0 14 rede unc The answer is shown on the right side of z the display The cursor moves to the next line ready for you to enter the next expression Converting to a Decimal You can show the solution as a decimal 1 Press F1 4 to select F4 gt D from 23H 113B 1440 the FRAC shortcut menu 14 p E 4AC cH AnskF rO Chapter 17 Activities 297 2 Press ENTER to convert the result to a b ee uAc decimal aa aaa AnsrF ak ZO E To save keystrokes you can scroll up to find an expression you entered copy it and then edit it for a new calculation pede2 uac J 3 Press 4 t
158. Stat Wizards 198 STAT CALC menu 198 STAT EDIT menu 193 stat list editor attaching formulas to list names 188 clearing elements from lists 187 creating list names 186 detaching formulas from list names 190 displaying 184 edit elements context 192 editing elements of formula generated lists 190 editing list elements 187 entering list names 185 enter names context 193 formula generated list names 189 removing lists 186 restoring list names L1 L6 186 switching contexts 190 view elements context 192 view names context 193 STAT PLOTS menu 210 stat tests and confidence intervals 1 PropZInt one proportion z confidence interval 232 1 PropZTest one proportion z test 227 2 PropZInt two proportion z confidence interval 232 2 PropZTest two proportion z test 228 2 SampF Test two sample F Test 235 2 SampTInt two sample t confidence interval 231 2 SampTTest two sample test 226 2 SampZInt two sample z confidence interval 230 2 SampZTest two sample z test 225 ANOVA one way analysis of variance 236 y Test chi square test 233 234 y Test chi square test 233 234 LinRegTTest linear regression test 236 TInterval one sample confidence interval 229 T Test one sample test 224 412 ZiInterval one sample z confidence interval 229 Z Test one sample z test 223 STAT TESTS menu 221 STAT WIZARDS 1 198 199 statistical distribution functions See distribution functions 36 Statistical plotting 208 Boxplot reg
159. TALOG until the selection cursor points to the GarbageCollect command or press G to skip to the commands starting with the letter G Press to paste the command to the HOME screen Press to display the Garbage Collect message Select 2 Yes to begin garbage collection Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 342 ERR ARCHIVE FULL Message Even if the MEMORY screen shows enough ERE ARCHIVE FULL free space to archive a variable or store an MMi t application you may still get an ERR Largest single ARCHIVE FULL message 9662 VWarlable AFF An ERR ARCHIVE FULL message may be displayed e When there is insufficient space to archive a variable within a continuous block and within a single sector e When there is insufficient space to store an application within a continuous block of memory When the message is displayed it will indicate the largest single space of memory available for storing a variable and an application To resolve the problem use the GarbageCollect command to optimize memory If memory is still insufficient you must delete variables or applications to increase space Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 343 Chapter 19 Communication Link Getting Started Sending Variables Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Create and store a variable and a matrix and then transfer them to another TI 84 Plus 1 On the home screen of the sending unit
160. The stat list editor displays a formula lock symbol next to each list name that has an attached formula Chapter 12 describes how to use the stat list editor to attach formulas to lists edit attached formulas and detach formulas from lists Detaching a Formula from a List You can detach clear an attached formula from a list in several ways For example e Enter gt istname on the home screen Chapter 11 Lists 166 Edit any element of a list to which a formula is attached Use the stat list editor Chapter 12 Use ClrList or ClrAllList to detach a formula from a list Chapter 18 Using Lists in Expressions You can use lists in an expression in any of three ways When you press ENTER any expression is evaluated for each list element and a list is displayed Use L1 L6 or any user created list name in an expression T2 2 LAS 2 16 Jarli L1H 4 22 Enter the list elements directly 2H is os LAS L1H 4 22 Use RCL to recall the contents of the list into an expression at the cursor location Chapter 1 gt 2 5 10 i4 25 1800 kol Li Note You must paste user created list names to the Rel prompt by selecting them from the LIST NAMES menu You cannot enter them directly using L Using Lists with Math Functions You can use a list to input several values for some math functions See Appendix A specify for information about where a list is valid The function is evaluated for each list element and
161. Then command if true command if true End command Program PROGRAM TEST a H rif s18 Then Beta Oise Y If Then Else Else following If Then executes a group of commands if condition is false zero End identifies the end of the group of commands If condition Then Chapter 16 Programming 282 command if true command if true Else command if false command if false End command Program PROGRAM TESTELSE PTneut R a elf Ax Ther l Disp tH Note In OS 2 53MP and higher the program name displays again when you press to repeat the program For For loops and increments It increments variable from begin to end by increment increment is optional default is 1 and can be negative end lt begin end is a maximum or minimum value not to be exceeded End identifies the end of the loop For loops can be nested For variable begin end increment command while end not exceeded command while end not exceeded End command Program Output PROGFAM SQUARE Predm SQUARE ForAs H B Oif Eng While While performs a group of commands while condition iS true condition is frequently a relational test Chapter 2 condition is tested when While is encountered If condition is true nonzero the program executes a group of commands End signifies the end of the group When condition is false zero the program executes each
162. VARS and select 5 Statistics Then select the VARS menu shown in the column below under VARS menu If you edit a list or change the type of analysis all statistical variables are cleared Variables mean of x values sum of x values sum of x values sample standard deviation of x population standard deviation of x number of data points mean of y values sum of y values sum of y2 values sample standard deviation of y population standard deviation of y sum of x y minimum of x values maximum of x values minimum of y values maximum of y values 1st quartile median 3rd quartile regression fit coefficients polynomial Logistic and SinReg coefficients 1 Var Stats xI X rx Sx OX minX maxX Q1 Med Q3 2 Var Stats X rx Sx OX Ly Zy Sy oy Xy minX maxX minY maxY VARS Other menu a b XY 2 XY XY XY XY XY XY XY XY XY XY PTS PTS PTS EQ a b C EQ Chapter 12 Statistics 206 1 Var 2 Var VARS Variables Stats Stats Other menu correlation coefficient r EQ coefficient of determination r2 R2 EQ regression equation RegEQ EQ summary points Med Med only xt4 y1 x2 PTS y2 x3 y3 Q1 and Q3 The first quartile Q1 is the median of points between minX and Med median The third quartile Q3 is the median of points between Med and maxX Statistical Analysis in a Program Entering Stat Data You can enter statistical d
163. VM cccccccccccecccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeasanseeeaeeaaaaeeeasesseeseeeseseees 255 Calculating Cash OWS sariari a E E meesnudsieratstaaeaaesdeceees teewniaiat 257 Calcul ting AMO rel ZAtlO ny en a a A EE 258 Calculating Interest Conversion ce deeiewteu ese steure eerie dene tetas desde eeeeecetudlded det de sora dete sddueta eaetdeeceanertds 261 Finding Days between Dates Defining Payment Method ccccccccccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseaaanenaaes 261 usino tie TYM NAP AICS sininen eano beret duo edi vsiad seer ae eaaa tx BASANE EE aA E a tame tetas 262 TNE EasyDatan AD PICA O a r a anne eneceueesadwbenuuve munbnewe loot Gants 263 Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions cccsceseseseneeeeeenseseeseeneseeensnseeeeenenseess 266 Browsing the TI 84 Plus CATALOG ccceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeesssaaeaaaeaeeeeeeeessssseaaaaseeseeeees 266 ENtening ana USING StriNGS oreinaren e E e a cuneacnoncetooens 267 Storing Strings to String Variables sias sihtis aeaa aaa ia a an ie aai aa Eaa EGR 268 String Functions and Instructions in the CATALOG eccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaeegeeeeeeeeeeeneens 269 Hyperbolic Functions in the CATALOG ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeesensaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeessessensaaaaaes 273 Chapter 16 PROGK AMIN saio e a E a a aa EAE 275 Getting Started Volume of a Cylinder 0 cceccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeaeaesaaaaeeeaaaeeesseeeesseeeeeeees 275
164. Y 3 Y M D Returns a list giving the time according to the current value of the clock The list is in hour minute second format The time is returned in the 24 hour format Returns an integer representing the clock time format that is currently set on the device 12 12 hour format 24 24 hour format Returns a string of the current clock time in the format specified by integer where 12 12 hour format 24 24 hour format Returns the key code for the current keystroke or 0 if no key is pressed Transfers control to label Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item DISTR DISTR F geometcdf DISTR DISTR E geometpdf t I O A Get t I O 0 GetCalc 2nd CATALOG getDate 2nd CATALOG getDtFmt 2nd CATALOG getDtStr 2nd CATALOG getTime CATALOG getTmFmt 2nd CATALOG getTmStr t I O 7 getKey t CTL 0 Goto Appendix A Functions and Instructions 361 Function or Instruction Arguments GraphStyle function graphstyle GridOff GridOn G T Horiz Horizontal y i identity dimension If condition commandA commands If condition Then commands End commands If condition Then commands Else commands End commands imag value IndpntAsk IndpntAuto Input Result Sets a graphstyle for function Turns off grid format Turns on grid format Sets graph table vertical s
165. Y window variables 74 evaluating 69 family of curves 77 format settings 74 free moving cursor 78 graph styles 71 maximum of fMax 40 maximum of fMax 360 minimum of fMin 360 modes 16 67 360 moving the cursor to a value 79 overlaying functions on a graph 77 panning 80 pausing or stopping a graph 76 Quick Zoom 80 selecting 69 70 360 shading 72 Smart Graph 76 tracing 78 viewing window 73 window variables 73 Y editor 68 ZOOM MEMORY menu 85 ZOOM menu 80 function integral fnint 41 function integral fnint 360 function definition of 12 functions and instructions table 354 future value 253 257 407 FV future value variable 253 263 G garbage collecting 339 GarbageCollect 341 360 gcd greatest common divisor 48 360 GDB graph database 135 geometcdf 248 361 geometpdf 248 361 Get get data from CBL 2 or CBR 293 361 GetCalc get data from TI 84 Plus 292 361 getDate get current date 361 getDtFmt get date format 361 getDtStr get date string 361 getKey 292 361 getTime get current time 361 Getting Started See examples Getting Started 36 getTmFmt get time format 361 getTmStr get time string 361 Goto 285 361 graph database GDB 135 graph style above 71 animate 71 below 71 dot 71 line 71 path 71 shade above 71 shade below 71 thick 71 graph styles 71 graphing modes 16 graphing order modes 17 GraphStyle 288 362 graph table split screen mode G T 17 140 362 greate
166. Ymax is the center of the top pixel AY is the distance between the centers of two adjacent pixels e In Full screen mode AY is calculated as Ymax Ymin 62 In Horiz split screen mode AY is calculated as Ymax Ymin 30 In G T split screen mode AY is calculated as Ymax Ymin 50 e If you enter a value for AY from the home screen or a program in Full screen mode Ymax is calculated as Ymin AY 62 In Horiz split screen mode Ymax is calculated as Ymin AY 30 In G T split screen mode Ymax is calculated as Ymin AY 50 Appendix B Reference Information 398 Cursor coordinates are displayed as eight character numbers which may include a negative sign decimal point and exponent when Float mode is selected X and Y are updated with a maximum accuracy of eight digits minimum and maximum on the CALCULATE menu are calculated with a tolerance of 1E 5 f x dx is calculated at 1E 3 Therefore the result displayed may not be accurate to all eight displayed digits For most functions at least five accurate digits exist For fMin fMax and fnint on the MATH menu and solve in the CATALOG the tolerance can be specified Function Limits Function sin x cos x tan x Range of Input Values 0 lt x lt 1012 radian or degree sin x cos x Tsxst In x log x 10 100 lt y lt 10100 ex 10100 lt x lt 230 25850929940 10x 10190 lt x lt 100 sinh x cosh x Ix lt 230 25850929940 tanh x lx
167. You can use the MTRX shortcut menu ALPHA F3 to enter a quick matrix calculation on the home screen or in the Y editor Note To input a fraction in a matrix delete the pre populated zero first 2 3 4 3 5 8 He I and store the result to matrix C Fi Example Add the following matrices 1 Press F3 to display the quick matrix editor The default size of the matrix is two rows by two columns ROW 1 fz 45 6 CO ia H3456 2 Press to highlight OK and then press ENTER E a 3 Press 2 gt 3 gt 5 gt 8 gt to create the first E a matrix 4 Press 4 ALPHA F3 ENTER 4D 3D 2D 1D to create the second matrix and perform the calculation 5 Press MATRX and select 3 C Chapter 10 Matrices 143 6 Press to store the matrix to C 5 el il Ans C In the matrix editor 2nd MATRX you can see that MATH EDIT matrix C has dimension 2x2 ee You can press gt gt to display the EDIT screen and then select C to edit it Getting Started Systems of Linear Equations Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Find the solution of X 2Y 3Z 3 and 2X 3Y 4Z 3 On the TI 84 Plus you can solve a system of linear equations by entering the coefficients as elements in a matrix and then using rref to obtain the reduced row echelon form 1 Press MATRX Press gt gt to display the HATRI A 2 xd M
168. ZTest x n 1 x2 n2 alternative drawflag Pt Change x y Pt Off x y mark Pt On x mark PwrReg X istname Ylistname freglist regequ Pxl Change row column Pxl Off 7ow column Pxl On row column pxl Test row column PPRx 7 0 Prompts for value for variableA then variableB and so on Computes a one proportion z confidence interval Computes a two proportion z confidence interval Computes a one proportion z test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Computes a two proportion z test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Reverses a point at x y Erases a point at x y using mark Draws a point at x y using mark Fits a power regression model to X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation Reverses pixel at row column 0 lt row lt 62 and O lt column lt 94 Erases pixel at row column 0 lt row lt 62 and O lt column lt 94 Draws pixel at row column 0 lt row lt 62 and 0 lt column lt 94 Returns 1 if pixel row column is on O if it is off 0 lt row lt 62 and O lt column lt 94 Returns X given polar coordinates r and 0 or a list of polar Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item t I O 2 Prompt t TESTS A 1 PropZint t TESTS
169. a personal computer As future software upgrades become available on the TI Web site you can download the software to your PC and then use the TI Connect software and a USB computer cable to upgrade your TI 84 Plus For details refer to Chapter 19 Error Conditions Diagnosing an Error The Tl 84 Plus detects errors while performing these tasks e Evaluating an expression e Executing an instruction e Plotting a graph e Storing a value When the TI 84 Plus detects an error it returns an error message as a menu title such as ERR SYNTAX Of ERR DOMAIN Appendix B describes each error type and possible reasons for the error ERR S YMTAX Huit Boto Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 33 e If you select 1 Quit or press QUIT or CLEAR then the home screen is displayed e If you select 2 Goto then the previous screen is displayed with the cursor at or near the error location Note If a syntax error occurs in the contents of a Y function during program execution then the Goto option returns to the Y editor not to the program Correcting an Error To correct an error follow these steps 1 Note the error type ERR error type 2 Select 2 Goto if it is available The previous screen is displayed with the cursor at or near the error location Determine the error If you cannot recognize the error refer to Appendix B Correct the expression Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver E
170. a corresponding to the graph at the left or list data corresponding to the plot at the left Moving from Half to Half in G T Mode To use the left half of the split screen e Press or TRACE e Select a ZOOM or CALC operation To use the right half of the split screen press TABLE If the values on the right are list data these values can be edited similarly to using the Stat List Editor Chapter 9 Split Screen 140 Using TRACE in G T Mode As you press 4 or gt to move the trace cursor along a graph in the split screen s left half in G T mode the table on the right half automatically scrolls to match the current cursor values If more than one graph or plot is active you can press 4 or to select a different graph or plot Note When you trace in Par graphing mode both components of an equation XnT and YnT are displayed in the two columns of the table As you trace the current value of the independent variable T is displayed on the graph Full Screens in G T Mode All screens other than the graph and the table are displayed as full screens in G T split screen mode To return to the G T split screen from a full screen when in G T mode press any key or key combination that displays the graph or the table TI 84 Plus Pixels in Horiz and G T Modes TI 84 Plus Pixels in Horiz and G T Modes F a T Eiai ro 94 Cond peo 4a Rene C054 Note Each set of numbers in parentheses above represents the row and
171. a list name then press INS to switch to enter name context 6 Press CLEAR to switch to view names context 7 Press to switch back to view elements context Liw 15 Chapter 12 Statistics 191 Stat List Editor Contexts View Elements Context In view elements context the entry line displays the list name the current element s place in that list and the full value of the current element up to 12 characters at a time An ellipsis indicates that the element continues beyond 12 characters Lins 7o8Rbe 1 To page down the list six elements press To page up six elements press 4 To delete a list element press DEL Remaining elements shift up one row To insert a new element press INS 0 is the default value for a new element Edit Elements Context In edit elements context the data displayed in the entry line depends on the previous context e When you switch to edit elements context from view elements context the full value of the current element is displayed You can edit the value of this element and then press and 4 to edit other list elements ABCs SAR RECS ESHGH e When you switch to edit elements context from view names context the full values of all elements in the list are displayed An ellipsis indicates that list elements continue beyond the screen You can press gt and to edit any element in the list HEC 5 18 756006 AEC E 16 25606 Note
172. a value to or recall a value from a specific list element You can store to any element within the current list dimension or one element beyond listname element Deleting a List from Memory To delete lists from memory including L1 through L6 use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE secondary menu Chapter 18 Resetting memory restores L1 through L6 Removing a list from the stat list editor does not delete it from memory Using Lists in Graphing To graph a family of curves you can use lists Chapter 3 or the Transformation Graphing App Entering List Names Using the LIST NAMES Menu To display the LIST NAMES menu press LIST Each item is a user created list name except for L1 through L6 LIST NAMES menu items are sorted automatically in alpbhanumerical order Only the first 10 items are labeled using 1 through 9 then O To jump to the first list name that begins with a particular aloha character or 6 press letter from A to Z or 6 SEC l OFS MATH TEST Note From the top of a menu press 4 to move to the bottom From the bottom press to move to the top When you select a list name from the LIST NAMES menu the list name is pasted to the current cursor location e The list name symbol L precedes a list name when the name is pasted where non list name data also is valid such as the home screen LTEST Li 42 4 43 Chapter 11 Lists 164 e The L symbol does not precede a list name when the name is pasted where a
173. able Yn contains the equation Strn from Str1 to Str9 or Str0 is the string variable to which you want the equation to be stored Equ gt String Yx Strz ll kia lI i Done EaukSteringe is St ri Dore Str eh expr expr converts the character string contained in string to an expression and executes it string can be a string or a string variable Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 270 expr string oh expre 2 Re 5 gt a Stel expr C Stel 434A A inString inString returns the character position in string of the first character of substring string can be a string or a string variable start is an optional character position at which to start the search the default is 1 inString string substring start Note If string does not contain substring or start is greater than the length of string inString returns 0 length length returns the number of characters in string string can be a string or string variable Note An instruction or function name such as sin or cos counts as one character length szring Waite F5Str 1 Wee lengsthcstrls String gt Equ String gt Equ converts string into an equation and stores the equation to Yn string can be a string or string variable String gt Equ is the inverse of EqubString String gt Equ string Yn ia String E sui Stee Wed Done Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 271 Ploti Fla
174. ables the first two selected Y functions are displayed initially Press gt or 4 to display dependent variables defined by other selected Y functions The independent variable always remains in the left column except during a trace with parametric graphing mode and G T split screen mode set Note To simultaneously display two dependent variables on the table that are not defined as consecutive Y functions go to the Y editor and deselect the Y functions between the two you want to display For example to simultaneously display Y4 and Y7 on the table go to the Y editor and deselect Y5 and Y6 Chapter 7 Tables 120 Chapter 8 Draw Instructions Getting Started Drawing a Tangent Line Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details 2 Suppose you want to find the equation of the tangent line at X pi for the function Y sin X 1 Before you begin press MODE and select 4 Radian scl ENG FLOAT dizas and Func if necessary 2 Press Y to display the Y editor Press Poti Plote Plots SIN X T n OJ to store sin X in Y1 ee 3 Press 7 to select 7 ZTrig which graphs the equation in the Zoom Trig window 4 Press DRAW 5 to select 5 Tangent The tangent instruction is initiated pat oo a 5 Press Vv 2 D H 2 Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 121 6 Press ENTER The tangent line is drawn the X value and the tangent line equation are displayed on the graph
175. aeeesaeesenseesnenees 400 Texas Instruments Support and Service ccccceceesseeeeececeeseeeeeceeeesseeeeeecseasceeeeeeesaaeaeeeeeessanageeeeeees 400 Battery On Ma tl ian ddecesie E netennena nmenie une 400 HC AS OVO RD Vit CONEY vatecxetataciee creed etce cece tee a a a 402 Vil Chapter 1 Operating the TI 84 Plus Silver Edition Documentation Conventions In the body of this guidebook Tl 84 Plus refers to the TI 84 Plus Silver Edition but all of the instructions examples and functions in this guidebook also work for the Tl 84 Plus The two graphing calculators differ only in available RAM memory interchangeable faceplates and Flash application ROM memory Sometimes as in Chapter 19 the full name TI 84 Plus Silver Edition is used to distinguish it from the Tl 84 Plus screen shots were taken using OS version 2 53MP and higher in either MathPrint or Classic mode All features are available in both modes however screens make look slightly different depending on the mode setting Many examples highlight features that are not available in previous OS versions If your calculator does not have the latest OS features may not be available and your screens may look different You can download the latest OS from education ti com A new MODE menu item STAT WIZARDS is available with OS version 2 55MP for syntax entry help for commands and functions in the STAT CALC menu DISTR DISTR menu DISTR DRAW menu and the seq function Sequence
176. al Statistics and Distributions 228 Zinterval Zinterval One sample z confidence interval item 7 computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean u when the population standard deviation o is known The computed confidence interval depends on the user specified confidence level In the example L1 299 4 297 7 301 298 9 300 2 297 Data Stats Input Interval Top AEE Stats Ts List Li Freqil C Leyelid Calculate Calculated fInterval results 8 Sede SASL z 99 8333 Tinterval Tinterval one sample confidence interval item 8 computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean u when the population standard deviation o is unknown The computed confidence interval depends on the user specified confidence level In the example L6 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 Data Stats Input Tinterval oo Stats List Freij C Level 95 Calculate Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 229 Data Stats Calculated Tinterval results 1 5446 1 9554 B35 2006 x 1290994449 1251 2 SampZint 2 SampZint two sample z confidence interval item 9 computes a confidence interval for the difference between two population means u4 u2 when both population standard deviations 04 and c2 are known The computed confidence interval depends on the user specified confidence level In the example LISTC 154 109 137 115 140 LISTD 108 115 126 92 146 Data Sta
177. alue of list The default value for freqlist is 1 Each freglist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in ist Complex lists are not valid Chapter 11 Lists 175 mean is freglist median ist freqlist meant El Z 37 03 1 566666667 piss MathPrint sum prod T ee oa 5 3 1 566666667 pees Classic sum Summation returns the sum of the elements in ist start and end are optional they specify a range of elements ist elements can be real or complex numbers prod returns the product of all elements of list start and end elements are optional they specify a range of list elements ist elements can be real or complex numbers sum lis start end Li sumtl4 SsumCLis 3 a2 rae 2 3 16 26 23 prod is start end Li 2 3 16 SHE 464 Proad Llis3 o Sums and Products of Numeric Sequences You can combine sum or prod with seq to obtain upper 2 expression x x lower upper expression x x lower To evaluate 2 N 1 from N 1 to 4 SUMC Seager cN 13 Hads4 193 stdDev variance stdDev returns the standard deviation of the elements in ist The default value for freglist is 1 Each freglist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in ist Complex lists are not valid Chapter 11 Lists 176 stdDev ist freqlist std0ew ii 2 5 71 stgDenrt 1 255
178. alueA valueB Multiplication value list Multiplication lis value Multiplication listA listB Multiplication value matrix Multiplication matrixA matrixB Division valueA valueB Division list value Division value list Division listA listB Addition valueA valueB Addition list value Addition listA listB Addition matrixA matrixB Concatenation string string2 Subtraction valueA valueB Subtraction value list Key or Result Keys Menu or Screen Item Returns ist elements raised to power Returns value raised to list elements Returns matrix elements raised to power Returns the negative of a real or complex number expression list or matrix Returns 10 raised to the value power value can be arealor 2nd ho complex number or expression Returns a list of 10 raised to the list power 2nd 10 Returns square root of a real or complex number 2nd v expression or list Returns valueA times valueB Returns value times each list element Returns each list element times value Returns istA elements times istB elements Returns value times matrix elements Returns matrixA times matrixB Returns valueA divided by valueB Returns ist elements divided by value Returns value divided by ist elements Returns istA elements divided by istB elements Returns valueA plus valueB Returns list in which value is added to each list element Returns istA elements pl
179. alues of Y7 and Y8 are zero where the inequality is false You only see the intervals of the graph where Y4 lt Y5 because intervals that are false are multiplied by O Y6 Y4 and Y6 Y5 Solving a System of Nonlinear Equations Problem Using a graph solve the equation x 2x 2c08 x Stated another way solve the system of two equations and two unknowns y x3 2x and y 2cos x Use ZOOM factors to control the decimal places displayed on the graph and use CALC 5 intersect to find an approximate solution Procedure 1 Press MODE Select the default mode settings Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the functions Yasta YY oBecost Ji Chapter 17 Activities 310 2 Press 4 to select 4 ZDecimal The display shows that two solutions may exist points where the two functions appear to intersect 3 Press gt 4 to select 4 SetFactors from the ZOOM MEMORY menu Set XFact 10 and YFact 10 4 Press 2 to select 2 Zoom In Use 4 gt 4 and to move the free moving cursor onto the apparent intersection of the functions on the right side of the display As you move the cursor notice that the X and Y values have one decimal place 5 Press ENTER to zoom in Move the cursor over the intersection As you move the cursor notice that now the X and Y values have two decimal places 6 Press to zoom in again Move the free moving cursor onto a point exactly on the intersection Notice the number of
180. an mode are shown below Xmin 47 24 x decimal equivalent Ymin 4 Xmax 47 24 x decimal equivalent Ymax 4 Xscl z 2 decimal equivalent Yscl 1 Zinteger Zinteger redefines the viewing window to the dimensions shown below To use ZInteger move the cursor to the point that you want to be the center of the new window and then press ENTER Zinteger replots the functions AX 1 Xscl 10 AY 1 Yscl 10 ZoomStat ZoomStat redefines the viewing window so that all statistical data points are displayed For regular and modified box plots only Xmin and Xmax are adjusted ZoomFit ZoomFit replots the functions immediately ZoomFit recalculates YMin and YMax to include the minimum and maximum Y values of the selected functions between the current XMin and XMax XMin and XMax are not changed ZQuadrant1 ZQuandrant1 replots the function immediately It redefines the window settings so that only quadrant 1 is displayed Chapter 3 Function Graphing 83 ZFrac1 2 ZFrac1 2 replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 1 2 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place Xmin 47 2 Ymin 31 2 Xmax 47 2 Ymax 31 2 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 ZFract 3 ZFrac1 3 replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 1 3 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one deci
181. and Ylist must be the same length You can use the same list for Xlist and Ylist Flokz Flot Pr Yee BL dip HH HOH mlisteli WlistiLlez Mark o 8 xyLine xyLine I is a scatter plot in which the data points are plotted and connected in order of appearance in Xlist and Ylist You may want to use SortA or SortD to sort the lists before you plot them Chapter 12 Statistics 208 Histogram Histogram di plots one variable data The Xscl window variable value determines the width of each bar beginning at Xmin ZoomStat adjusts Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax to include all values and also adjusts Xscl The inequality Xmax Xmin Xscl lt 47 must be true A value that occurs on the edge of a bar is counted in the bar to the right min 2E 481309 mJ 36 985E07 n i3 ModBoxplot ModBoxplot modified box plot plots one variable data like the regular box plot except points that are 1 5 Interquartile Range beyond the quartiles The Interquartile Range is defined as the difference between the third quartile Q3 and the first quartile Q1 These points are plotted individually beyond the whisker using the Mark O or or you select You can trace these points which are called outliers The prompt for outlier points is x except when the outlier is the maximum point maxX or the minimum point minX When outliers exist the end of each whisker will display x When no outliers exist minX and maxX are
182. ant to you It is always a good idea to back up your graphing calculator device files and Apps using the TI Connect software and a USB computer cable You can find the specific procedures for backing up your calculator s device files and Apps in the TI Connect Help file Apps TI 84 Plus Software Applications Apps is software that you can add to your calculator in the same way you would add software to your computer Apps let you customize your calculator for peak performance in specific areas of study You can find apps for the Tl 84 Plus at education ti com Tl Cares KnowledgeBase The Tl Cares KnowledgeBase provides 24 hour access through the Web to find answers to frequently asked questions The Tl Cares KnowledgeBase searches its repository of known solutions and presents you with the solutions that are most likely to solve your problem You can search the Tl Cares KnowledgeBase at education ti com support Appendix B Reference Information 393 Error Conditions When the TI 84 Plus detects an error it returns an error message as a menu title such as ERR SYNTAX or ERR DOMAIN This table contains each error type possible causes and suggestions for correction The error types listed in this table are each preceded by ERR on your graphing calculator display For example you will see ERR ARCHIVED as a menu title when your graphing calculator detects an ARCHIVED error type Error Type ARCHIVED ARCHIVE FULL ARGUMENT B
183. any times the corresponding data point or data pair occurs in the data set you are analyzing For example if L1 15 12 9 14 and LFREQ 1 4 1 3 then the Tl 84 Plus interprets the instruction 1 Var Stats L1 LFREQ to mean that 15 occurs once 12 occurs four times 9 occurs once and 14 occurs three times Chapter 12 Statistics 199 Each element in freglist must be 0 and at least one element must be gt 0 Noninteger freglist elements are valid This is useful when entering frequencies expressed as percentages or parts that add up to 1 However if freglist contains noninteger frequencies Sx and Sy are undefined values are not displayed for Sx and Sy in the statistical results 1 Var Stats 1 Var Stats one variable statistics analyzes data with one measured variable Each element in freqlist is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data point in X istname fregqlist elements must be real numbers gt 0 1 Var Stats XJistname freglist 1 Var Stats LiL d Var stati F ListiLi FresaList Llei Calculate 2 Var Stats 2 Var Stats two variable statistics analyzes paired data XJistname is the independent variable Ylistname is the dependent variable Each element in freqlist is the frequency of occurrence for each data pair X istname Ylistname 2 Var Stats X istname Ylistname freglist mlistili WlistiLle FresListi Calculate Med Med axtb Med Med median median fits the model equation y ax b
184. application and correct the error select 2 Goto Turning the Clock On There are two options to turn the clock on One option is through the MODE screen the other is through the Catalog Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 10 Using the Mode Screen to turn the clock on 1 If the clock is turned off Press to highlight TURN CLOCK ON NATHEBLNT CLASSIC ANSWERS Fl DEC FRAC 2 Press ENTER ENTER OTO FORMAT GRAFH WES ETAT DIAGNOSTIC Of ETATHIZARDS p OFF SETCLOCK TURMCLOCK On Using the Catalog to turn the clock on If the clock is turned off Press CATALOG He Teste 2 Press or 4 to scroll the CATALOG until the SEGUE Test Circles selection cursor points to ClockOn CLASSIC 3 Press ENTER ENTER ElockOFR S FC lockon Turning the Clock Off Press CATALOG CATALOG xe Teste 2 Press or 4 to scroll the CATALOG until the 2 GOF Test selection cursor points to ClockOff eee 3 Press ENTER ENTER ta Cloc k r Entering Expressions and Instructions What Is an Expression An expression is a group of numbers variables functions and their arguments or a combination of these elements An expression evaluates to a single answer On the TI 84 Plus you enter an expression in the same order as you would write it on paper For example mR is an expression You can use an expression on the home screen to calculate an answer In most places where a value is re
185. ar coordinates and returns x P gt Ry converts polar coordinates to rectangular coordinates and returns y r and 9 can be lists P gt Rx 7 0 P gt Ry 7 0 Preetlsq Note Radian mode is set Praci anmi Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 61 TEST Relational Operations TEST Menu To display the TEST menu press TEST This operator Returns 1 true if TEST LOGIC 1 Equal Le 7 Not equal to Se F Greater than 4 2 Greater than or equal to be ok Less than 62 Ss Less than or equal to gt 2 lt lt d d Relational operators compare valued and valueB and return 1 if the test is true or O if the test is false valued and valueB can be real numbers expressions or lists For and only valued and valueB also can be matrices or complex numbers If valued and valueB are matrices both must have the same dimensions Relational operators are often used in programs to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph of a function over specific values valueA valueB valueA valueB valueA gt valueB valueA gt valueB valueA lt valueB valueA lt valueB Using Tests Relational operators are evaluated after mathematical functions according to EOS rules Chapter 1 e The expression 2 2 2 3 returns 0 The Tl 84 Plus performs the addition first because of EOS rules and then it compares 4 to 5 e The expression 2 2 2 3 returns 6 The Tl 84 Plus performs the relational test first beca
186. ard Z Test u0 o istname freglist alternative drawflag Data list input Z Test u0 0 X n alternative drawflag Summary stats input ZTrig Factorial value Factorial list Degrees notation value Radian angle Transpose matrix th x roof N value ooh list Result Replots the graph using the window variables of the graph that was displayed before you executed the last ZOOM instruction Displays the portion of the graph that is in quadrant 1 Adjusts the X or Y window settings so that each pixel represents an equal width and height in the coordinate system and updates the viewing window Replots the functions immediately updating the window variables to the default values Performs a z test with frequency freglist alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Performs a z test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Replots the functions immediately updating the window variables to preset values for plotting trig functions Returns factorial of value Returns factorial of ist elements Interprets value as degrees designates degrees in DMS format Interprets angle as radians Returns a matrix in which each element row column is swapped with the corresponding element column row of matrix h Returns x voo
187. are computed and stored for these regression models LinReg ax b LnReg PwrReg LinReg a bx ExpReg Chapter 12 Statistics 196 R is computed and stored for these regression models QuadReg CubicReg QuartReg The r and r that are computed for LnReg ExpReg and PwrReg are based on the linearly transformed data For example for ExpReg y ab x r and r are computed on In y In a x In b By default these values are not displayed with the results of a regression model when you execute it However you can set the diagnostics display mode by executing the DiagnosticOn or DiagnosticOff instruction Each instruction is in the CATALOG Chapter 15 CATALOG det Diadnosticot ft tDiagnostic n dimk e To turn diagnostics on or off from the mode screen select On or Off for StatDiagnostics The default is Off e To set DiagnosticOn or DiagnosticOff from the home screen press CATALOG and then select the instruction for the mode you want The instruction is pasted to the home screen Press to set the mode When DiagnosticOn is set diagnostics are displayed with the results when you execute a regression model Diasgrnosticoh ore 1 a ee eee b 1 33S 335555 rea IAr GT MathPrint r J6RPRSoees Diadnosticoh one Linkegdtaxth3a Lis Z Classic When DiagnosticOff is set diagnostics are not displayed with the results when you execute a regression model Diagnostic tf Lane y axtbh 4e9Caxtbs
188. ariables press and notice the new values for Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax Defining Graphs TI 84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities Chapter 3 specifically describes function graphing but the steps shown here are similar for each TI 84 Plus graphing mode Chapters 4 5 and 6 describe aspects that are unique to parametric graphing polar graphing and sequence graphing Defining a Graph To define a graph in any graphing mode follow these steps Some steps are not always necessary Press and set the appropriate graph mode Press and enter edit or select one or more functions in the Y editor Deselect stat plots if necessary Set the graph style for each function Press and define the viewing window variables Press FORMAT and select the graph format settings Oy Ol ae So Displaying and Exploring a Graph After you have defined a graph press to display it Explore the behavior of the function or functions using the Tl 84 Plus tools described in this chapter Saving a Graph for Later Use You can store the elements that define the current graph to any of 10 graph database variables GDB1 through GDB9 and GDBO Chapter 8 To recreate the current graph later simply recall the graph database to which you stored the original graph These types of information are stored in a GDB e Y functions e Graph style settings e Window settings e Format settings Chapter 3 Function Graphing 66 You can store a picture
189. ariables to create more free space To archive or unarchive a list variable L1 using the Archive UnArchive options from the MEMORY menu 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu ot tee Hamt 0el A Entries lrAllListe Archive UnArchive rLReset 2 Select 5 Archive or 6 UnArchive to place the command in the Home screen 3 Press L1 to place the L1 variable in the Home screen pe Li 4 Press ENTER to complete the archive process k Li Done Note An asterisk will be displayed to the left of the Archived variable name to indicate it is archived To archive or unarchive a list variable L1 using a Memory Management editor 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu out Hem Hamt 0el A A Entries I lrAllLis sts Archive NACHT ve ad J Fs r Reset 2 Select 2 Mem Mgmt Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENTI DELETE menu Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 332 RAM FREE 23596 ARC FREE S622608 A Real Some lex List Matrix VWars 3 Select 4 List to display the LIST menu 4 Press to archive L1 An asterisk will appear to the left of L1 to indicate it is an archived variable To unarchive a variable in this screen put the cursor next to the archived variable and press ENTER The asterisk will disappear 5 Press QUIT to leave the LIST menu Note You can access an archived variable for the purpose of linking deleting or unarchivin
190. as Instruments Web site at education ti com quides Steps for Running the Finance Application Follow these basic steps when using the Finance application 1 Press to select the Finance application Chapter 14 Applications 251 2 Select from list of functions Getting Started Financing a Car Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details You have found a car you would like to buy You can afford payments of 250 per month for four years The car costs 9 000 Your bank offers an interest rate of 5 What will your payments be Can you afford it 1 Press Binnig to set the fixed decimal CI Ena i FLOAT O1ff gt 456789 mode setting to 2 TUE DEGREE Press to select 1 Finance from the APPLICATIONS menu Press to select 1 TVM Solver from the CALC VARS menu The TVM Solver is displayed Enter the data N number of payments 48 I interest rate 5 PV present value 9000 FV future value 0 P Y payments per year 12 C Y compounding periods per year 12 Select PMT END which indicates that payments are due at the end of each period Move the cursor to PMT and press SOLVE Can you afford the payment Chapter 14 Applications 252 Getting Started Computing Compound Interest At what annual interest rate compounded monthly will 1 250 accumulate to 2 000 in 7 years Note Because there are no payments when you solve compound interest problems PMT must be set to
191. ast entry storage 4 ClrAllLists Clears all lists in memory 5 Archive Archives a selected variable 04 UNATCHI V6 3 UnArchives a selected variable Ja URES As Displays the RAM ARCHIVE and ALL menus 8i Groupw Displays GROUP and UNGROUP menus To check memory availability first press MEM and then select 2 Mem Mgmt Del RAM FREE displays the aa of available RAM ARC FREE displays the amount of available Archive Available RAM Archive and App Slots The Tl 84 Plus Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition has Archive RAM and Application App slot memory for you to use and manage The available RAM stores computations lists variables and data The available Archive lets you store programs Apps groups and other variables The App slots are actually individual sectors of Flash ROM where Apps are stored Graphing Available RAM Available App calculator Archive Slots TI 84 Plus 24 Kilobytes 491 Kilobytes TI 84 Plus Silver 24 Kilobytes 1 5 Megabytes Edition Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 326 Note Some Apps take up several App slots Displaying the About Screen About displays information about the TI 84 Plus Operating System OS Version Product Number Product Identification ID and Flash Application App Certificate Revision Number To display the About screen press MEM and then select 1 About Displays the type of graphing calculator Displays the Product TI B4 Flus silver Edition ID
192. ata calculate statistical results and fit models to data from a program You can enter statistical data into lists directly within the program Chapter 11 PROGRAM STATS sil 24s 3s4Li Pic 4s Ss4Le Statistical Calculations To perform a statistical calculation from a program follow these steps On a blank line in the program editor select the type of calculation from the STAT CALC menu Enter the names of the lists to use in the calculation Separate the list names with a comma Enter a comma and then the name of a Y variable if you want to store the regression equation to a Y variable PROGEAM STATS m ava orld Pi 71s TZ Dr sLinkegdtaxths Li eo Chapter 12 Statistics 207 Statistical Plotting Steps for Plotting Statistical Data in Lists You can plot statistical data that is stored in lists The six types of plots available are scatter plot xyLine histogram modified box plot regular box plot and normal probability plot You can define up to three plots To plot statistical data in lists follow these steps Store the stat data in one or more lists Select or deselect Y functions as appropriate Define the stat plot Turn on the plots you want to display Define the viewing window OPN jee ek us x Display and explore the graph Scatter Scatter l plots plot the data points from Xlist and Ylist as coordinate pairs showing each point as a box O cross or dot Xlist
193. ays numeric information about a function You can use a table of values from the function you just defined to estimate an answer to the problem 1 Press TBLSET to display the TABLE TABLE SETUP SETUP menu erie ade aThl Press to accept TbliStart 0 Press 1 to define the table increment ATbl 1 Leave Indpnt Auto and Depend Auto so that the table will be generated automatically 4 Press TABLE to display the table Notice that the maximum value for Y1 box s volume occurs when X is about 4 between 3 and 5 Da Lsi a De pat Pal Chapter 17 Activities 300 5 Press and hold to scroll the table until a negative result for Y1 is displayed Notice that the maximum length of X for this problem occurs where the sign of Y1 box s volume changes from positive to negative between 10 and 11 6 Press TBLSET Notice that TbIStart has changed to 5 to reflect the first line of the table as it was last displayed In step 5 the first value of X displayed in the table is 5 Zooming In on the Table You can adjust the way a table is displayed to get more information about a defined function With smaller values for ATbI you can zoom in on the table You can change the values on the TBLSET screen by pressing TBLSET or by pressing on the TABLE screen Press TABLE 2 Press 4 to move the cursor to highlight 3 3 Press The ATbl displays on the entry line 4 Enter 1 ENT
194. banumuadsaieedaassedsenasite 161 Getting Started Generating a SEQUENCE 2 0 cccccectettteteeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaeseeeeeeeeesenseaaaaaseeeeeeess 161 Nea PING LISTS Sissies So bic EN EFE EEE E E EA EEE peveshua wansete E EEEE ET 162 St ringana Displaying Lists siirron nA E E EAE AAE A A AASTA 163 Bnitening List NaNEG iea a a a a i a a a a a E AE na 164 Attaching Formulas to List Names isaositrenin a e ae a a i 165 Using LISES IM EXPLESSIONS worirordordserinrni ranea iae a NSA EEEE EAEE NER EE a 167 HST OPS MENU esra e a a a a 168 HSTMATE MEDU Harani a a a a a T annie aneoreteecceteadea 175 Chapter 12 STAUSTIES irn a A a EE E 178 Getting Started Pendulum Lengths and PeriodS cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaneaaeeeeeseeeees 178 setting Up Statis UcalANalysSES oniinn E n r S 184 YUSM Line Stat LST EQITO durrin a E E A E a a a Ea 185 Attaching Formulas to List Names visisiwwiitateee nial ioieeetii eae 188 Detaching Formulas from List Names cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeaaaesaaaaeeasssesessesssesees 190 SWITCHING Stat List Editor CONTERIS inrer ass Se aedictasduedeeay A Eaa TAE Ea 190 Stat List EGILOM COMTEXTS rnnr AE EKAA AAAA A A A Aa AAA a 192 STAT EDIT MENU zaket a e e a a a a a a a 193 Regression Model Features sceana anea EAE AN AINENA 195 STAT CALE M n U uestensun ienen a aeaa a 198 Statistical Vanale S eme a a a a a Ea uanec iG 206 Statistical Analysis in a Program cccccccceeee
195. base Be GOLV us Displays the equation solver gt Frac Dec gt Frac display as a fraction displays an answer as its rational equivalent You can use gt Frac with real or complex numbers expressions lists and matrices If the answer cannot be simplified or the resulting denominator is more than three digits the decimal equivalent is returned You can only use gt Frac following value value Frac gt Dec display as a decimal displays an answer in decimal form You can use gt Dec with real or complex numbers expressions lists and matrices You can only use gt Dec following value value Dec 14 3 Ans Dec a A a Note You can quickly convert from one number type to the other by using the FRAC shortcut menu Press ALPHA F1 4 gt F4 gt D to convert a value Cube Cube Root 3 cube returns the cube of value You can use 3 with real or complex numbers expressions lists and square matrices value SV cube root returns the cube root of value You can use 3 with real or complex numbers expressions and lists 3 value Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 39 oo yt 512 512 Root a th root returns the x root of value You can use with real or complex numbers expressions and lists x oor value T5625 fMin fMax fMin function minimum and fMax function maximum return the value at which the local minimum or local maximum value of express
196. be displayed in Classic display The MTRX menu is only available in MathPrint mode on the home screen and in the Y editor Note Shortcut menus may not be available if plus F key combinations are used by an application that is running such as Inequality Graphing or Transformation Graphing Returning to the Home Screen To return to the home screen from any other screen press QUIT Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 7 Busy Indicator When the TI 84 Plus is calculating or graphing a vertical moving line is displayed as a busy indicator in the top right corner of the screen When you pause a graph or a program the busy indicator becomes a vertical moving dotted line Display Cursors In most cases the appearance of the cursor indicates what will happen when you press the next key or select the next menu item to be pasted as a character Cursor Appearance Effect of Next Keystroke Entry Solid rectangle A character is entered at the cursor any existing EI character is overwritten Insert Underline A character is inserted in front of the cursor T location Second Reverse arrow A 2nd character is entered or a 2nd operation is executed Alpha Reverse A An alpha character is entered SOLVE is A executed or shortcut menus are displayed Full Checkerboard rectangle No entry the maximum characters are entered at Hi a prompt or memory is full MathPrint Right arrow The cursor moves to either the next part of the
197. butions 239 Input n1 n2 C Level Observed Matrix Expected Matrix df Xlist Ylist RegEQ Description The count of observations in sample one for the 2 PropZTest and 2 PropZint Must be an integer gt 0 The count of observations in sample two for the 2 PropZTest and 2 PropZInt Must be an integer gt 0 The confidence level for the interval instructions Must be 0 and lt 100 If it is gt 1 it is assumed to be given as a percent and is divided by 100 Default 0 95 The matrix name that represents the columns and rows for the observed values of a two way table of counts for the x Test and y GOF Test Observed must contain all integers gt 0 Matrix dimensions must be at least 2x2 The matrix name that specifies where the expected values should be stored Expected is created upon successful completion of the y Test and y GOF Test df degree of freedom represents number of sample categories number of estimated parameters for the selected distribution 1 The names of the lists containing the data for LinRegTTest and LinRegTint Defaults are L1 and L2 respectively The dimensions of Xlist and Ylist must be the same The prompt for the name of the Y variable where the calculated regression equation is to be stored If a Y variable is specified that equation is automatically selected turned on The default is to store the regression equation to the RegEQ variable only Te
198. can create a list name in these four places e At the Name prompt in the stat list editor e Atan Xlist Ylist or Data List prompt in the stat plot editor e Ata List List1 List2 Freq Freq1 Freq2 XList or YList prompt in the inferential stat editors e On the home screen using SetUpEditor You can create as many list names as your TI 84 Plus memory has space to store Storing and Displaying Lists Storing Elements to a List You can store list elements in either of two ways e Use brackets and on the home screen T 59 3154 L6 L442 5il e Use the stat list editor Chapter 12 The maximum dimension of a list is 999 elements Note When you store a complex number to a list the entire list is converted to a list of complex numbers To convert the list to a list of real numbers display the home screen and then enter real istname listname Displaying a List on the Home Screen To display the elements of a list on the home screen enter the name of the list preceded by L if necessary and then press ENTER An ellipsis indicates that the list continues beyond the viewing window Press gt repeatedly or press and hold to scroll the list and view all the list elements Li i 5 16 LOUATA L2 154 560 47 9 Copying One List to Another To copy a list store it to another list LTEST il o2 4 43 LTEST TEST ii 2 3 F Chapter 11 Lists 163 Accessing a List Element You can store
199. ce Graphs Free Moving Cursor The free moving cursor in Seq graphing works the same as in Func graphing In RectGC format moving the cursor updates the values of X and Y if CoordOn format is selected X and Y are Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 107 displayed In PolarGC format X Y R and 8 are updated if CoordOn format is selected R and 9 are displayed TRACE The axes format setting affects TRACE When Time uv vw or uw axes format is selected TRACE moves the cursor along the sequence one PlotStep increment at a time To move five plotted points at once press gt or 4 e When you begin a trace the trace cursor is on the first selected sequence at the term number specified by PlotStart even if it is outside the viewing window e Quick Zoom applies to all directions To center the viewing window on the current cursor location after you have moved the trace cursor press ENTER The trace cursor returns to nMin In Web format the trail of the cursor helps identify points with attracting and repelling behavior in the sequence When you begin a trace the cursor is on the x axis at the initial value of the first selected function Note To move the cursor to a specified n during a trace enter a value for n and press ENTER For example to quickly return the cursor to the beginning of the sequence paste nMin to the n prompt and press ENTER Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid n Value To move the trace cursor to an
200. ce them in the stat list editor at the same time SetUpEditor istname listname listname n Chapter 12 Statistics 194 SetUpEditor removes all list names from the stat list editor and then stores istnames in the stat list editor columns in the specified order beginning in column 1 SetUeEditor FE Done E MathPrint SetUrEditor FESI O L2z Le TIME LOH G2ALlYS Done Classic RESI DS HAL S15 TIHE 66 If you enter a listname that is not stored in memory already then istname is created and stored in memory it becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu Restoring L1 through L6 to the Stat List Editor SetUpEditor with no istnames removes all list names from the stat list editor and restores list names L1 through L6 in the stat list editor columns 1 through 6 SetUeEdi tor Done Regression Model Features Regression Model Features STAT CALC menu items 3 through C are regression models The automatic residual list and automatic regression equation features apply to all regression models Diagnostics display mode applies to some regression models Automatic Residual List When you execute a regression model the automatic residual list feature computes and stores the residuals to the list name RESID RESID becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Statistics 195 RARE OFS MATH FESID The TI 84 Plus uses the formula below to compute RESID list elements The next section d
201. ce with u nstart nstop nstep nstep is optional default is 1 Ne Suu So Graphing Web Plots Graphing a Web Plot To select Web axes format press FORMAT gt ENTER A web plot graphs u n versus u n 1 which you can use to study long term behavior convergence divergence or oscillation of a recursive sequence You can see how the sequence may change behavior as its initial value changes Valid Functions for Web Plots When Web axes format is selected a sequence will not graph properly or will generate an error e It must be recursive with only one recursion level u n 1 but not u n 2 e It cannot reference n directly e t cannot reference any defined sequence except itself Displaying the Graph Screen In Web format press to display the graph screen The TI 84 Plus e Draws a y x reference line in AxesOn format e Plots the selected sequences with u n 1 as the independent variable Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 109 Note A potential convergence point occurs whenever a sequence intersects the y x reference line However the sequence may or may not actually converge at that point depending on the sequence s initial value Drawing the Web To activate the trace cursor press TRACE The screen displays the sequence and the current n X and Y values X represents u n 1 and Y represents u n Press gt repeatedly to draw the web step by step starting at nMin In Web format the trace cursor follows
202. column of a corner pixel which is turned on DRAW POINTS Menu Pixel Instructions For Pxl On Pxl Off Pxl Change and pxl Test In Horiz mode row must be lt 30 column must be lt 94 In G T mode row must be lt 50 column must be lt 46 Pxl On row column Chapter 9 Split Screen 141 DRAW Menu Text Instruction For the Text instruction In Horiz mode vow must be lt 25 column must be lt 94 In G T mode vow must be lt 45 column must be lt 46 Text vow column text PRGM I O Menu Output Instruction For the Output instruction In Horiz mode vow must be lt 4 column must be lt 16 e n G T mode row must be lt 8 column must be lt 16 Output row column text Note The Output instruction can only be used within a program Setting a Split Screen Mode from the Home Screen or a Program To set Horiz or G T from a program follow these steps 1 Press while the cursor is on a blank line in the program editor 2 Select Horiz or G T The instruction is pasted to the cursor location The mode is set when the instruction is encountered during program execution It remains in effect after execution Note You also can paste Horiz or G T to the home screen or program editor from the CATALOG Chapter 15 Chapter 9 Split Screen 142 Chapter 10 Matrices Getting Started Using the MTRX Shortcut Menu Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details
203. command following End While instructions can be nested While condition command while condition is true Chapter 16 Programming 283 command while condition is true End command Program Output FROGRAM LOOP H A While I lt 6 J 1 J I i I Erd Dise J Repeat Repeat repeats a group of commands until condition is true nonzero It is similar to While but condition is tested when End is encountered therefore the group of commands is always executed at least once Repeat instructions can be nested Repeat condition command until condition is true command until condition is true End command Program PROGRAM RLOOP H I H Rereat I 6 J 13J I i I Erd Dise J End End identifies the end of a group of commands You must include an End instruction at the end of each For While or Repeat loop Also you must paste an End instruction at the end of each If Then group and each If Then Else group Pause Pause suspends execution of the program so that you can see answers or graphs During the pause the pause indicator is on in the top right corner Press to resume execution e Pause without a value temporarily pauses the program If the DispGraph or Disp instruction has been executed the appropriate screen is displayed e Pause with value displays value on the current home screen value can be scrolled Chapter 16 Programming 284 Pause value
204. cursor 107 graph format 107 graph styles 104 moving the cursor to a value 108 nonrecursive sequences 105 recursive sequences 105 selecting and deselecting 104 TI 84 Plus versus TI 82 table 114 tracing 108 web plots 109 window variables 106 Y editor 103 ZOOM zoom menu 108 Sequential graphing order mode 17 373 setDate set date 373 setDtFmt set date format 373 setTime set time 373 setting display contrast 4 graph styles 71 graph styles from a program 72 modes 15 modes from a program 15 split screen modes 138 split screen modes from a program 142 tables from a program 116 setTmFmt set time format 373 SetUpEditor 194 373 shade above graph style 71 shade below graph style 71 Shade 128 373 Shade_t 249 374 Shadey 250 374 Shadek 250 374 ShadeNorm 249 374 shading graph areas 72 128 Simul simultaneous graphing order mode 17 374 sin sine 36 374 sin arcsine 36 374 sine sin 36 sine sin 374 sinh hyperbolic sine 273 374 sinh hyperbolic arcsine 273 374 SinReg sinusoidal regression 203 374 Smart Graph 76 solve 44 374 Solver 42 solving for variables in the equation solver 43 SortA sort ascending 168 194 374 SortD sort descending 168 194 374 split screen modes G T graph table mode 140 Horiz horizontal mode 139 setting 138 142 split screen values 130 133 141 square 2 36 380 square root y 36 square root V 381 startTmr start timer 374 STAT CALC
205. d e You are unable to transmit an item because the receiving unit s available memory is insufficient You may skip the item or exit receive mode During a memory backup the receiving uni s available memory is insufficient to receive all items in the sending units memory A message indicates the number of bytes the sending unit must delete to do the memory backup Delete items and try again You attempted to store to a window variable in another graphing mode or to perform an instruction while in the wrong mode for example Drawlnv in a graphing mode other than Func e The solve function or the equation solver did not detect a sign change e You attempted to compute I when FV N PMT and PV are all 2 0 or when FV N PMT and PV are all lt 0 e You attempted to compute irr when neither CFList nor CFO is gt 0 or when neither CFList nor CFO is lt 0 In Real mode the result of a calculation yielded a complex result This error is not returned during graphing The Tl 84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph You attempted to enter or you have calculated a number that is beyond the range of the graphing calculator This error is not returned during graphing The TI 84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph Appendix B Reference Information 396 Error Type RESERVED SINGULAR MAT SINGULARITY STAT STAT PLOT SYNTAX TOL NOT MET UNDEFINED VALIDATION VARIABLE VERSION Possible Cau
206. d 9999 Un d displays results as a mixed number if applicable U n and d must be all be integers If U is a non integer the result may be converted U n d If n or d is a non integer a syntax error is displayed The whole number numerator and denominator may each contain a maximum of three digits Answers Auto Dec Frac Auto displays answers in a similar format as the input For example if a fraction is entered in an expression the answer will be in fraction form if possible If a decimal appears in the expression the output will be a decimal number Dec displays answers as integers or decimal numbers Frac displays answers as fractions if possible Note The Answers mode setting also affects how values in sequences lists and tables are displayed Choose Dec or Frac to ensure that values are displayed in either decimal or fraction form You can also convert values from decimal to fraction or fraction to decimal using the FRAC shortcut menu or the MATH menu GoTo Format Graph No Yes No does not display the FORMAT graph screen but can always be accessed by pressing 2nd FORMAT Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 18 Yes leaves the mode screen and displays the FORMAT graph screen when you press SO that you can change the graph format settings To return to the mode screen press MODE Stat Diagnostics Off On Off displays a statistical regression calculation without the correlation coefficient
207. dInt randNorm and randBin instructions randintNoRep randintNoRep returns a random ordered list of integers from a lower integer to an upper integer The list of integers may include the lower integer and the upper integer randintNoRep lowerint upperint randI ntHoker 3 rand ntHoker 3 3 s 16 15 SY 12 129 16 27 22 19 MathPrint Classic ANGLE Operations ANGLE Menu To display the ANGLE menu press ANGLE The ANGLE menu displays angle indicators and instructions The Radian Degree mode setting affects the TI 84 Plus s interpretation of ANGLE menu entries ANGLE ie gt Degree notation Ga 4 DMS minute notation Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 59 ANGLE E Radian notation PDMS Displays as degree minute second R gt Pr Returns r given X and Y R gt PO Returns 0 given X and Y P gt Rx Returns x given R and 0 CO JN WD O MA W P gt Ry Returns y given R and 0 Entry Notation DMS degrees minutes seconds entry notation comprises the degree symbol the minute symbol and the second symbol degrees must be a real number minutes and seconds must be real numbers gt O Note DMS entry notation does not support fractions in minutes or seconds degrees minutes seconds For example we know that 30 degrees is the same as 7 6 radians and we can verify that by looking at the values in degree and radian modes If the angle mode is not set to Degree you must use so
208. des the area between owerbound and upperbound ShadeF owerbound upperbound numerator df denominator df ioe l 2 15 iel Note For this example Shader E Xmin 0 lower i UFFE Z Classic AMAX Bis df Hummer 16 Ymin 25 df Denon 1S Ymax 9 Draw Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 250 Chapter 14 Applications The Applications Menu The Tl 84 Plus comes with several applications already installed and listed on the APPLICATIONS menu These applications include the following Finance Topics in Algebra 1 Science Tools Catalog Help 1 1 CellSheet Conic Graphing Inequality Graphing Transformation Graphing Vernier EasyData DataMate Polynomial Root Finder and Simultaneous Equation Solver StudyCards LearningCheck Except for the Finance application you can add and remove applications as space permits The Finance application is built into the Tl 84 Plus code and cannot be deleted Many other applications in addition to the ones mentioned above including language localization applications are included on your Tl 84 Plus Press to see the complete list of applications that came with your calculator You can download additional T l 84 Plus software applications from education ti com that allow you to customize your calculator s functionality even further The calculator reserves 1 54 M of space within ROM memory specifically for applications Guidebooks for applications are on the Tex
209. dition 34 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations Getting Started Coin Flip Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details For more probability simulations try the Probability Simulations App for the TI 84 Plus You can download this App from education ti com Suppose you want to model flipping a fair coin 10 times You want to track how many of those 10 coin flips result in heads You want to perform this simulation 40 times With a fair coin the probability of a coin flip resulting in heads is 0 5 and the probability of a coin flip resulting in tails is 0 5 1 Begin on the home screen Press 4 to display the MATH PRB menu Press 7 to select 7 randBin random Binomial randBin is pasted to the home screen Press 10 to enter the number of coin flips Press Press 5 to enter the probability of heads Press Press 40 to enter the number of simulations Press randbincibs o 4F 2 Press to evaluate the expression A list of 40 elements is generated with the first 7 f4rFrau6r7 3 4 displayed The list contains the count of heads resulting from each set of 10 coin flips The list has 40 elements because this simulation was performed 40 times In this example the coin came up heads five times in the first set of 10 coin flips five times in the second set of 10 coin flips and so on 3 Press gt or to view the additional counts in the list An arrow MathPrint m
210. dlist List matr cumSum 154 quick matrix 143 relational operations 153 row operations ref rref rowSwap row row row 158 selecting 145 viewing 146 MATRX EDIT menu 145 MATRX MATH menu 154 max maximum 48 175 365 maximum of a function fMax 40 maximum of a function fMax 360 maximum operation on a graph 88 mean 175 365 Med Med median median 200 median 175 365 Med Med median median 365 Mem Mgmt Del menu 327 memory backing up 351 checking available 326 clearing all list elements from 330 clearing entries from 329 deleting items from 329 error 341 insufficient during transmission 353 resetting defaults 334 resetting memory 334 MEMORY menu 326 Menu define menu 286 365 menus 25 26 defining Menu 286 defining Menu 365 scrolling 26 409 shortcut 1 6 min minimum 48 175 365 minimum of a function fMin 40 minimum of a function fMin 360 minimum operation on a graph 88 minutes notation 60 382 ModBoxplot plot type tt 209 mode Answers 18 Classic 5 18 MathPrint 5 18 mode settings 14 a bi complex rectangular 17 50 355 Connected plotting 17 356 Degree angle 16 61 357 Dot plotting 17 358 Eng notation 15 359 Fix decimal 16 359 Float decimal 16 359 Full screen 17 360 Func graphing 16 360 G T screen 17 362 Horiz screen 17 362 Normal notation 15 366 Par Param graphing 16 367 Pol Polar graphing 16 368 Radian
211. draw on the graph shading one pixel at a time Press to turn off the pen Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 130 For example Pen was used to create the arrow pointing to the local minimum of the selected function Note To continue drawing on the graph move the cursor to a new position where you want to begin drawing again and then repeat steps 2 3 and 4 To cancel Pen press CLEAR Drawing Points on a Graph DRAW POINTS Menu To display the DRAW POINTS menu press DRAW gt The TI 84 Plus s interpretation of these instructions depends on whether you accessed this menu from the home screen or the program editor or directly from a graph DRAW POINTS STO Li PEONY Turns on a point 2a PEOLE Turns off a point 3 Pt Change Toggles a point on or off Ae Pion Turns on a pixel St Pala Orr Turns off a pixel 6 Pxl Change Toggles a pixel on or off 7i pxl Test Returns 1 if pixel on 0 if pixel off Drawing Points Directly on a Graph with Pt On To draw a point on a graph follow these steps 1 Select 1 Pt On from the DRAW POINTS menu 2 Move the cursor to the position where you want to draw the point 3 Press to draw the point n 4 4680851 Y 4 8S8 7097 To continue drawing points repeat steps 2 and 3 To cancel Pt On press CLEAR Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 131 Erasing Points with Pt Off To erase turn off a drawn point on a graph follow these steps 1 Select 2 Pt Off point off
212. duals increasing in magnitude as the string length increases To see the magnitudes of the residuals continue with these steps 30 Press TRACE Press gt and 4 to trace the data Observe the values for Y at each point With this model the largest positive residual is about 0 041 and the smallest negative residual is about 0 027 All other residuals are less than 0 02 in magnitude Now that you have a good model for the relationship between length and period you can use the model to predict the period for a given string length To predict the periods for a pendulum with string lengths of 20 cm and 50 cm continue with these steps 31 Press gt 1 to display the VARS Y VARS rr FUNCTION secondary menu and then press 1 to select 1 Y1 Y1 is pasted to the home screen Note You can also use the YVARS ALPHA F4 shortcut menu to select Y1 32 Press 20 LJ to enter a string length of 20 cm Press to calculate the predicted time of about 0 92 seconds Based on the residual analysis we would expect the prediction of about 0 92 seconds to be within about 0 02 seconds of the actual value Chapter 12 Statistics 183 cm 34 Press to calculate the predicted time of about 1 48 seconds Since a string length of 50 cm exceeds the lengths in the data set and since residuals appear to be increasing as string length increases we would expect more error with this estimate Note You also can make
213. e e f an expression on the home screen the Y editor Chapter 3 or the program editor Chapter 16 is longer than one line it wraps to the beginning of the next line in Classic mode In MathPrint mode an expression on the home screen or Y editor that is longer than one line scrolls off the screen to the right An arrow on the right side of the screen indicates that you can scroll right to see more of the expression In numeric editors such as the window screen Chapter 3 a long expression scrolls to the right and left in both Classic and MathPrint modes Press gt to move the cursor to the end of the line Press lt to move the cursor to the beginning of the line Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 5 When an entry is executed on the home screen the answer is displayed on the right side of the next line logt23 4 Entry 3610299957 lt Answer The mode settings control the way the TI 84 Plus interprets expressions and displays answers If an answer such as a list or matrix is too long to display entirely on one line an arrow MathPrint or an ellipsis Classic is displayed to the right or left Press gt and 4 to display the answer MathPrint Classic Li Ent Li lt Entry 75 12 874 2 36rlq rea f25 12 874 2 36 4 Answer _ 4745 24 43 8845 Entry Arati 2k2435 ORHI 4 Entry 5 12 4 Answer 5 12 lt Answer Using Shortcut Menus
214. e gcd Jist value Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 48 remainder remainder returns the remainder resulting from the division of two positive whole numbers dividend and divisor each of which can be a list The divisor cannot be zero If both arguments are lists they must have the same number of elements If one argument is a list and the other a non list the non list is paired with each element of the list and a list is returned remainder dividend divisor remainder 1la 43 remainder ist divisor 5 5 5 5 579L1 ae a remainder dividend list remainder Z la 305 33 3s H remainder ist list gt n d4 gt Un d Pn d4 Un d converts an improper fraction to a mixed number or a mixed number to an improper fraction You can also access Pn d4 Un d from the FRAC shortcut menu ALPHA F1 3 FFI 4 F a krda nd Be ee en 4 42 karda Hnd 4 F Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 49 gt F4 gt D gt F4 gt D converts a fraction to a decimal or a decimal to a fraction You can also access PF4 gt D from the FRAC shortcut menu ALPHA F1 4 oH 95448895 2S6IkF 4kO i Un d Un d displays the mixed number template You can also access Un d from the FRAC shortcut menu ALPHA F1 2 In the fraction n and d must be non negative integers MathPrint ae B LET zi Classic n d n d displays the mixed number template You can also
215. e at 8 percent interest with monthly payments of 800 The new home owners want to know how much will be applied to the interest and how much will be applied to the principal when they make the 240th payment 20 years from now Procedure 1 Press and set the fixed decimal mode to 2 decimal places Set the other mode settings to the defaults MORAAL Efig FLOAT O12 456789 DEGREE Bo FAR FOL EQ DOT REST 4 Chapter 17 Activities 323 2 Press to display the TVM Solver Enter these values Da Hs He WH 3 PS PMT Fils PAY bey PMT Note Enter a positive number 800 to show PMT as a cash inflow Payment values will be displayed as positive numbers on the graph Enter 0 for FV since the future value of a loan is 0 once it is paid in full Enter PMT END since payment is due at the end of a period 3 Move the cursor onto the PV prompt and then press SOLVE The present value or mortgage amount of the house is displayed at the PV prompt le a Sa Il A a lA eH Now compare the graph of the amount of interest with the graph of the amount of principal for each payment Press MODE Set Par and Simul Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter these equations and set the graph styles as shown Fletti Floke Fst 417 BT a7 BePrerncT T aT WerBEInt T 73 23T BT WarBVairtyer Note amp Prn and XInt are located on the FINANCE menu APPS 1 FINANCE 6 Press W
216. e cursor at the center of the circle you want to draw Press ENTER 3 Move the cursor to a point on the circumference Press to draw the circle on the graph Y B 096774 Note This circle is displayed as circular regardless of the window variable values because you drew it directly on the display When you use the Circle instruction from the home screen or a program the current window variables may distort the shape To continue drawing circles repeat steps 2 and 3 To cancel Circle press CLEAR Drawing a Circle from the Home Screen or a Program Circle draws a circle with center X Y and radius These values can be expressions Circle X Y radius CircletH H ram Note When you use Circle on the home screen or from a program the current window values may distort the drawn circle Use ZSquare Chapter 3 before drawing the circle to adjust the window variables and make the circle circular Placing Text on a Graph Placing Text Directly on a Graph To place text on a graph when the graph is displayed follow these steps 1 Select 0 Text from the DRAW menu Place the cursor where you want the text to begin Enter the characters Press or A LOCK to enter letters and 0 You may enter TI 84 Plus functions variables and instructions The font is proportional so the exact number of characters you can place on the graph varies As you type the characters are placed on top of the graph To cancel Text press
217. e menu items press 4 To page down six menu items at a time press To page up six menu items at a time press ALPHA 4 To go to the last menu item directly from the first menu item press 4 To go to the first menu item directly from the last menu item press Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 26 Selecting an Item from a Menu You can select an item from a menu in either of two ways e Press the number or letter of the item you want to MATH CPx FRE select The cursor can be anywhere on the menu Er and the item you select need not be displayed on the screen e Press or 4 to move the cursor to the item you I CP PRE want and then press ENTER After you select an item from a menu the TI 84 Plus typically displays the previous screen Note On the LIST NAMES PRGM EXEC and PRGM EDIT menus only items 1 through 9 and 0 are labeled in such a way that you can select them by pressing the appropriate number key To move the cursor to the first item beginning with any alpha character or 8 press the key combination for that alpha character or 0 If no items begin with that character the cursor moves beyond it to the next item Example Calculate 27 VATA EER 27 ENTER Leaving a Menu without Making a Selection You can leave a menu without making a selection in any of four ways e Press QUIT to return to the home screen e Press to return to the previous screen
218. e of data you want to group You can select 1 All which shows all variables of all types available and selected You can also select 2 All which shows all variables of all types available but not selected A screen is displayed listing each variable of the type you selected For example suppose some variables have been created in RAM and selecting 2 All displays the following screen Press 4 and to move the selection cursor gt next to the first item you want to copy into a group and then press ENTER A small square will remain to the left of all variables selected for grouping Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 337 Repeat the selection process until all variables for the new group are selected and then press gt to display the DONE menu SELECT ail la Done Press to complete the grouping process Coraing Warilables to GOLF GFOUFA Done Note You can only group variables in RAM You cannot group some system variables such as the last answer variable Ans and the statistical variable RegEQ Ungrouping Variables Ungrouping allows you to make a copy of variables in a group stored in user data archive and place them ungrouped in RAM DuplicateName Menu During the ungrouping action if a duplicate variable name is detected in RAM the DUPLICATE NAME menu is displayed DuplicateName 1 Rename 2 Overwrite 3 Overwrite All 4 Omit Bee QUIE Prompts to rename receiving var
219. e referenced list on the home screen and find and edit the source of the error To edit an element of a list on the home screen store the new value to Jistname element Chapter 11 Detaching Formulas from List Names Detaching a Formula from a List Name You can detach clear a formula from a list name in several ways For example e Inthe stat list editor move the cursor onto the name of the list to which a formula is attached Press ENTER All list elements remain but the formula is detached and the lock symbol disappears e Inthe stat list editor move the cursor onto an element of the list to which a formula is attached Press ENTER edit the element and then press ENTER The element changes the formula is detached and the lock symbol disappears All other list elements remain e Use ClrList All elements of one or more specified lists are cleared each formula is detached and each lock symbol disappears All list names remain e Use ClrAllLists Chapter 18 All elements of all lists in memory are cleared all formulas are detached from all list names and all lock symbols disappear All list names remain Editing an Element of a Formula Generated List As described above one way to detach a formula from a list name is to edit an element of the list to which the formula is attached The Tl 84 Plus protects against inadvertently detaching the formula from the list name by editing an element of the formula generated list
220. e results to a user created list Then display the results in fraction form Begin this example on a blank line on the home screen 1 Press LIST gt to display the LIST OPS menu 2 Press 5 to select 5 seq which opens a wizard to assist in the entry of the syntax 3 Press 1 ALPHA F1 ENTER ALPHA A x2 z ALPHA A 1 8 7 1 to enter the sequence Press to select Paste and press to paste the seq to the current cursor location 4 Press STO and then press A LOCK to turn on alpha lock Press S E Q and then press to turn off alpha lock Press 1 to complete the list name Note Since the seq command creates a list you can name give the list a name up to five characters long 5 Press to generate the list and store it in SEQ1 The list is displayed on the home screen An ellipsis indicates that the list continues beyond the viewing window Press gt repeatedly or press and hold gt to scroll the list and view all the list elements Warilable start eng ster Faste rii Expr 1 A Warlable A startil endis seri l Paste seal lt p As 1 1 Chapter 11 Lists 161 Press LIST to display the LIST NAMES menu Press 7 to select 7 SEQ1 to paste LSEQ1 to the current cursor location If SEQ1 is not item 7 on your LIST NAMES menu move the cursor to SEQ1 before you press ENTER Press to display the MATH menu Press 2 to select 2 gt Dec whic
221. e sending unit press LINK and select a data type and items to SEND Press gt on the sending unit to display the TRANSMIT menu On the other unit press LINK gt to display the RECEIVE menu Press on the receiving unit Press on the sending unit A copy of the selected item s is sent to the receiving unit Disconnect the link cable only from the receiving unit and connect it to another unit Press LINK on the sending unit SOs Dis a Oh OP a iS Select only the data type For example if the unit just sent a list select 4 LIST Note The item s you want to send are pre selected from the last transmission Do not select or deselect any items If you select or deselect an item all selections or deselections from the last transmission are cleared 10 Press gt on the sending unit to display the TRANSMIT menu 11 On the new receiving unit press LINK gt to display the RECEIVE menu 12 Press on the receiving unit 13 Press on the sending unit A copy of the selected item s is sent to the receiving unit 14 Repeat steps 7 through 13 until the items are sent to all additional units Sending to a TI 83 Plus or TI 83 Plus Silver Edition You can send all variables from a TI 84 Plus to a TI 83 Plus or Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition except Flash applications with new features or programs with new features in them If archived variables on the TI 84 Plus are variable types recognized and used on the Tl 83 Plus or TI 83
222. e string is displayed Rete HELLO String Functions and Instructions in the CATALOG Displaying String Functions and Instructions in the CATALOG String functions and instructions are available only from the CATALOG The table below lists the string functions and instructions in the order in which they appear among the other CATALOG menu items The ellipses in the table indicate the presence of additional CATALOG items CATALOG EqubString expr Ino Crn length StringPEqu sub Converts an equation to a string Converts a string to an expression Returns a character s place number Returns a string s character length Converts a string to an equation Returns a string subset as a string Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 269 Concatenation To concatenate two or more strings follow these steps 1 Enter stringl which can be a string or string name Press Enter string2 which can be a string or string name If necessary press and enter string3 and so on string string2 string3 4 Press to display the strings as a single string JK F5tr1 LAHOP E LMAHOP Selecting a String Function from the CATALOG To select a string function or instruction and paste it to the current screen follow the steps for selecting an item from the CATALOG Equ gt String Equ gt String converts an equation to a string The equation must be store ina VARS Y VARS vari
223. e the displayed value and use it as the argument for checkTmr to check the elapsed time DRAW 3 Shadey 2nd DISTR DRAW 4 ShadeF 2nd DISTR DRAW 1 ShadeNorm 2nd DISTR DRAW 2 Shade_t T MODE Simul SIN SIN 2nd CATALOG sinh 2nd CATALOG sinh STAT CALC C SinReg t MATH MATH 0 solve LIST OPS 1 SortA LIST OPS 1 SortA LIST OPS 2 SortD LIST OPS 2 SortD 2nd CATALOG startTmr Appendix A Functions and Instructions 374 Function or Instruction Arguments STATWIZARD OFF STATWIZARD ON stdDev Jis freglist Stop Store value gt variable StoreGDB n StorePic n String gt Equ string Y var sub string begin length sum lis start end summation X expression start end tan value tan value Tangent expression value tanh value tanh value tcdf owerbound upperbound df Result Disables wizard syntax help for statistical commands distributions and seq Enables wizard syntax help for statistical commands distributions and seq Returns the standard deviation of the elements in ist with frequency freqlist Ends program execution returns to home screen Stores value in variable Stores current graph in database GDBn Stores current picture in picture Picn Converts string into an equation and stores it in Y var Returns a string that is a subset of a
224. ecall the picture stored to Pic3 pooner se 3 Note You also can select a variable from the PICTURE secondary menu VARS 4 The variable is pasted next to RecallPic 3 Press to display the current graph with the picture superimposed on it Note Pictures are drawings You cannot trace a curve that is part of a picture Deleting a Graph Picture To delete graph pictures from memory use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE secondary menu Chapter 18 Storing Graph Databases GDB What Is a Graph Database A graph database GDB contains the set of elements that defines a particular graph You can recreate the graph from these elements You can store up to 10 GDBs in variables GDB1 through GDB9 or GDBO and recall them to recreate graphs A GDB stores five elements of a graph e Graphing mode e Window variables e Format settings e All functions in the Y editor and the selection status of each e Graph style for each Y function GDBs do not contain drawn items or stat plot definitions Storing a Graph Database To store a graph database follow these steps Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 135 1 Select 3 StoreGDB from the DRAW STO menu StoreGDB is pasted to the current cursor location Enter the number from 1 to 9 or 0 of the GDB variable to which you want to store the graph database For example if you enter 7 the Tl 84 Plus will store the GDB to GDB7 _ T Note You also can select a variable from
225. eceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeessaneaaaeaeceeeeeeeseseeeanans 207 Stats tCa NPO IAG a e E E E Aa E a E a A A 208 Statistical Piotting Ina Progr ani asrnane anadai aai a E Eaa ANE AERE R 212 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaseneeeensenenes 215 Getting Started Mean Height of a Population ccccecccteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeneeeeeessesesseeseeeeesseeees 215 ferential Star EGITO carini e E a ruedeteadleuer awetietaleeaes 218 SIAT TESTS MENU aeren a a a usd usss 221 Inferential Statistics INDUt Descriptions ccceeeesseeceeceeeeeceeseeesseseeceeeeseceesaeaeaaaeeseceeeesessessaaagees 239 Test and Interval Output Variables iiiiecsercdesicaveds duudectondeiasieideciwulontudcudadebeu sdentdccuusdvungered dvevdenteds 240 DiIStpUTOM FUNCTIONS nanara a e a a a eea E N ea aE 241 DistripUtoN SIMAGUING easan Aa EAA O EAEE A E encase 248 Chapter 14 Applications sissioni aa aoi a aa EEE aeaa 251 TASE APPliications MENU soani EE a a E 251 Getting Started FINANCING a Car cccccsssssseeceeceeeeeeeeecceceaesseceecceeeaseeeeeeseeauaaeeeeeessuaaseeeeessanaaaees 252 Getting Started Computing Compound Interest eee cceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaneeseeeeeeeeeeees 253 USING tie TVM SOVET 3 8 aetebacea scent i AES 253 Using tine Financial FUNCIONS 2c dirs viccnundaeeecsiccmesteadautaas aA naa a aA AEN 254 Calculating Time Value Of Money T
226. ed or executed They can only be seen and unarchived For example if you archive list L1 you will see that L1 exists in memory but if you select it and paste the name L1 to the home screen you won t be able to see its contents or edit it until it is unarchived Recalling Variable Values Using Recall RCL To recall and copy variable contents to the current cursor location follow these steps To leave RCL press CLEAR Press RCL RCL and the edit cursor are displayed on the bottom line of the screen 2 Enter the name of the variable in one of five ways e Press and then the letter of the variable e Press LIST and then select the name of the list or press Ln e Press MATRIX and then select the name of the matrix e Press to display the VARS menu or gt to display the VARS Y VARS menu then select the type and then the name of the variable or function e Press F4 to display the YVAR shortcut menu then select the name of the function e Press 4 and then select the name of the program in the program editor only The variable name you selected is displayed on the bottom line and the cursor disappears Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 21 1Hb Rol 3 Press ENTER The variable contents are inserted where the cursor was located before you began these steps jiee sire Note You can edit the characters pasted to the expression without affecting the value in memory Scrolling Th
227. edit cursor on the bottom line 2nd INS Activates the insert cursor DEL Deletes the character under the edit cursor on the bottom line Using Matrices with Expressions To use a matrix in an expression you can do any of the following e Copy the name from the MATRX NAMES menu e Recall the contents of the matrix into the expression with RCL Chapter 1 e Enter the matrix directly see below Entering a Matrix in an Expression You can enter edit and store a matrix in the matrix editor You also can enter a matrix directly in an expression To enter a matrix in an expression follow these steps Press to indicate the beginning of the matrix Press to indicate the beginning of a row Enter a value which can be an expression for each element in the row Separate the values with commas Press to indicate the end of a row Repeat steps 2 through 4 to enter all of the rows Press to indicate the end of the matrix The resulting matrix is displayed in the form elementl 1 element1 n elementm 1 elementm n Any expressions are evaluated when the entry is executed Chapter 10 Matrices 148 i cae Heh 4 5 6 Iz 4 6 S 16 12 Note e The commas that you must enter to separate elements are not displayed on output e Closing brackets are required when you enter a matrix directly on the home screen or in an expression e When you define a matrix using the matrix editor i
228. editor for T Test Ls Calculate Oraw Note When you select the ANOVA instruction it is pasted to the home screen ANOVA does not have an editor screen Using an Inferential Stat Editor To use an inferential stat editor follow these steps Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 218 1 Select a hypothesis test or confidence interval from the STAT TESTS menu The appropriate editor is displayed Select Data or Stats input if the selection is available The appropriate editor is displayed Enter real numbers list names or expressions for each argument in the editor Select the alternative hypothesis lt or gt against which to test if the selection is available Select No or Yes for the Pooled option if the selection is available D OY R a I Select Calculate or Draw when Draw is available to execute the instruction e When you select Calculate the results are displayed on the home screen e When you select Draw the results are displayed in a graph This chapter describes the selections in the above steps for each hypothesis test and confidence interval instruction Select Data or Select an Stats input Inet EE Stats alternative a hypothesis Enter values stale i for arguments Ie a a San Select a eee Or aw Calculate or Draw output Selecting Data or Stats Most inferential stat editors prompt you to select one of two types of input 1 PropZInt and 2 PropZTest 1 PropZInt and 2 Pr
229. eeeeeeaans 329 Archiving and UnArchiving Variables ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaaaeseeeeeeeeseeeseaaeaaees 330 vi Resetting the T84 PIUS sireenin innan a eaaa a a a a aaa Aia Ea REE aea AEE 333 Grouping and Ungrouping Variables sssseseseesssesessessserrerrrnnrrnnnn eee 336 Garbage Collecti ON seeroete a E 339 ERR ARCHIVE FULEMESSAGE siraan aiar a a a a a EA E aTe 343 Chapter 19 COMMUNICATION LIK isiin a aa E e a aa aa 344 Getting Started Sending Variables c ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaesaaeseeeeeeeseeessaaaanseeeseeeees 344 T SAPI USEIN oise e E aeedatceate tytn essesed weaned dein tentinseuneedtc 345 Selecting tems to Sena myer a a A a a E a 347 RECEIVING MEMS ayi E E E E E a a te cas 350 Backing UD RAM MEMO wiara a a a a a a a a a a a ee 351 Error COMGITIONS esaa a aa a a racer idea iti a eeatventle 352 Appendix A Functions and Instructions ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeaseeseseeenseeeaseesneneenseesneneensees 354 Appendix B Reference Inf rmati r isiin aaae aiea aaa aaaeaii 383 Varla DIES ooma E E E E a a a 383 SA Eea ALIN e C E E E E E E E E A 384 Financial FOrmUla Siess airea n a E A E E EE 387 Important Things You Need to Know About Your Tl 84 PIUS sssr 391 Error COnaNON S eea E O etude tesacien tens 394 ACCURACY nonna ton definan aa ea ra E manda dude 398 Appendix C Service and Warranty Information ccccesceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseaseeeasese
230. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeesanananaanags 98 Explo NNO POla r Gra DNSe e a E 100 Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing csiciscac cece cceccescceoes cs cessues conse recconccudevenecncncctcausescewencswecuetaasersceessece 102 Getting Started Forest and Trees sre nieni aa a E Melee 102 Defining and Displaying Sequence Graphs cccccccccccccccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeaaaeeaaaanaanaaeaes 103 Selecting Axes COMDINALIONS ssizstscu enina aaia EAE a O ai A 107 EXPONO SCO UGMCO GrapNS tr excsczccuccrsncecsonvesesecccnavmacatctcee vases E E EE AONE ENTE S 107 Graphing WED PIOUS anika a N a E A A A aa 109 Using Web Plots to Illustrate Convergence ssssssssessessssrrrnnnrnrrneseesrrnnnnttnrttenenrnnnnnnnnennennnn enn 110 Graphing Prase PIOtS comica aeieea reei ies oa enia ieaS E EELEE EATE AEE E NN E 111 Comparing TI 84 Plus and Tl 82 Sequence Variables cccccccssssseceeeceeeseeeeeceeeenaeeeeeeeensaseeeees 113 Keystroke Differences Between Tl 84 Plus and TI G2 sirnani E T T A 114 Chapter 7 WADIGS E E E A E E E E 115 Getting Started Roots of a Function ciicccccsicctcssccsicsesedsteccentsectsnarentanesnctuansedeuccacesaacscavecesvessetenses 115 Seng Up TMG TIDE saene inian E AES E A EA A AA AE EAEE a SEE AE E AEA A 116 Defining the Dependent Variables cccccccccccccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaessaeaeseeaeeeeaeeaeesessseseesseeseesees 117 Displaying tne TADS iria aaea aena EEA AAAA A aa L E ea ANEA Ae A
231. electing and Deselecting Polar Equations The Tl 84 Plus graphs only the selected polar equations In the Y editor a polar equation is selected when the sign is highlighted You may select any or all of the equations Chapter 5 Polar Graphing 98 To change the selection status move the cursor onto the sign and then press ENTER Setting Window Variables To display the window variable values press WINDOW These variables define the viewing window The values below are defaults for Pol graphing in Radian angle mode Omin 0 Smallest 0 value to evaluate Omax 6 2831853 Largest 8 value to evaluate 2r Ostep 1308996 Increment between 0 values 17 24 Xmin 10 Smallest X value to be displayed Xmax 10 Largest X value to be displayed Xscl 1 Spacing between the X tick marks Ymin 10 Smallest Y value to be displayed Ymax 10 Largest Y value to be displayed Yscl 1 Spacing between the Y tick marks Note To ensure that sufficient points are plotted you may want to change the 8 window variables Setting the Graph Format To display the current graph format settings press FORMAT Chapter 3 describes the format settings in detail The other graphing modes share these format settings Displaying a Graph When you press GRAPH the TI 84 Plus plots the selected polar equations It evaluates R for each value of 8 from Omin to Omax in intervals of Ostep and then plots each point The window variables define the viewing window
232. enseeeeenes 1 Documentation Conventions eeecesseeeeeceeeessneeeeeeneasseeeeneceseaseneeeeeesaasseeseeesseaaseeeseseseaueneneesananauenes 1 TF84 Pl s Keyboard ccchocadesnsedetsdiseductinassoausichasauetnsteacuuaavalediaat dxalmaceueaci Gaede dcaicandiunardband Maan iteciaueaneteree 1 Turning On and Turning Off the TI 84 PluS cccceeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneneenes 3 seting the Display CONTASE seacavesceccacussccoves sauwntuncectuastsuarr unas bucnalnecconen tae ETA GAENT tem EN 4 PPE DE Oy areenaa a A a A eter neeee at 5 Interchangeable Faceplates 0 0 cccccccccscssssessssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeaaseseeeeeeeeseeseaaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeesseeeaaassseseeeeees 8 USNI ENE GICK arara AN T E A N eee ree 9 Entering Expressions and Instructions c ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeessensaaaaaaeneees 11 Seting Modes relisted taar a a Uae r E EEA 14 Using T84 Plus Variable Names ceiiscecedeeveceost aa a aaa aa EE aa eaaa eaa 19 SONNO Varlable VA UES A a A E a A E a a E 20 Recalling Variaple Vales s aiisiriinicunini naana AAE TAA EEEa AEA ses AAAA a ia aaisa 21 Scrolling Through Previous Entries on the Home Screen cceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaas 22 ENTRY Last EDV Storage Area scissor tas alae a hase eee neni een iat 22 ESA PMS MENUS aieia AE TNE EEEE ET T a TE 25 VARSand VARS Y VARS MENUS sirini eene a a e aaee AEAN 27 Equation Operating System EOS
233. equence function such as u n 2 e The previous term or the term that precedes the previous term in another sequence function such as u n 1 or u n 2 referenced in the sequence v n Note Statements in this chapter about u n are also true for v n and w n statements about u n 1 are also true for v n 1 and w n 1 statements about u n 2 are also true for v n 2 and w n 2 Displaying the Sequence Y Editor After selecting Seq mode press Y to display the sequence Y editor Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 103 Geshings weohinsa A winhins In this editor you can display and enter sequences for u n v n and w x Also you can edit the value for nMin which is the sequence window variable that defines the minimum n value to evaluate The sequence Y editor displays the nMin value because of its relevance to u nMin v nMin and w nMin which are the initial values for the sequence equations u n v n and w n respectively nMin in the Y editor is the same as nMin in the window editor If you enter a new value for nMin in one editor the new value for nMin is updated in both editors Note Use u nMin v nMin or w nMin only with a recursive sequence which requires an initial value Selecting Graph Styles The icons to the left of u n v x and w n represent the graph style of each sequence Chapter 3 The default in Seq mode is dot which shows discrete values Dot line and th
234. er 15 objects one by one in their right hands and guessed what they were Use box plots to compare visually the correct guess data from this table Each row in the table represents the results observed for one subject Note that 10 women and 12 men were tested Correct Guesses Procedure 1 Press 5 to select 5 SetUpEditor Enter list names WLEFT WRGHT MLEFT and MRGHT separated by commas Press ENTER The stat list editor now contains only these four lists See Chapter 11 Lists for detailed instructions for using the SetUpEditor Press 1 to select 1 Edit Enter into WLEFT the number of correct guesses each woman made using her left hand Women Left Press gt to move to WRGHT and enter the number of correct guesses each woman made using her right hand Women Right 4 Likewise enter each man s correct guesses in MLEFT Men Left and MRGHT Men Right Chapter 17 Activities 306 10 11 Press STAT PLOT Select 1 Plot1 Turn on plot 1 define it as a modified box plot 4 that uses Xlist as WLEFT Move the cursor to the top line and select Plot2 Turn on plot 2 define it as a modified box plot that uses Xlist as WRGHT See Chapter 12 Statistics for detailed information on using Stat Plots Press Y Turn off all functions Press WINDOW Set Xscl 1 and Yscl 0 Press 9 to select 9 ZoomStat This adjusts the viewing window and displays the box plots for the women s results Press TRACE
235. er 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 236 LinRegTInt LinRegTInt computes a linear regression T confidence interval for the slope coefficient b If the confidence interval contains O this is insufficient evidence to indicate that the data exhibits a linear relationship In the example list 1 4 5 6 7 8 list 2 1 2 3 3 5 4 5 LinRegTInt input screen Note Press gt gt to select TESTS Press several times to select G LinRegTint Press Pei ee ate ENTER Press several times to select Calculate Press ENTER Calculated results Tdt 3 s 1595113553 a pea Ir 26Bz2r d r 79454975312 Xlist Ylist is the list of independent and dependent variables The list containing the Freq frequency values for the data is stored in List The default is 1 All elements must be real numbers Each element in the Freq list is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data point in the input list specified in the List fields RegEQ optional is the designated Yn variable for storing the regression equation StoreRegEqn optional is the designated variable for storing the regression equation The C level is the Confidence level probability with default 95 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 237 ANOVA ANOVA one way analysis of variance item H computes a one way analysis of variance for comparing the means of two to 20 populations The ANOVA procedure for
236. erates the same random number sequence for a given seed value The Tl 84 Plus factory set seed value for rand is 0 To generate a different random number sequence store any nonzero seed value to rand To restore the factory set seed value store 0 to rand or reset the defaults Chapter 18 Note The seed value also affects randint randNorm and randBin instructions g 28125655671 14 rarnd rand 33 1 FP So006RP rss Loe nPr nCr nPr number of permutations returns the number of permutations of items taken number at a time items and number must be nonnegative integers Both items and number can be lists items NPr number nCr number of combinations returns the number of combinations of items taken number at a time items and number must be nonnegative integers Both items and number can be lists items NCr number Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 57 14 L2 37 Pr tits 22 L2 Gs Factorial factorial returns the factorial of either an integer or a multiple of 5 For a list it returns factorials for each integer or multiple of 5 value must be gt 5 and lt 69 value r2 Ta f E2 L148 44 r z2 Note The factorial is computed recursively using the relationship n 1 n n until n is reduced to either 0 or 1 2 At that point the definition O 1 or the definition 1 2 z is used to complete the calculation Hence n n n 1 n 2 2 1 ifn is an integer gt 0
237. eration or with Select you defined Left Bound gt Right Bound e In fMin fMax solve or the equation solver you entered lower upper You pressed the key to break execution of a program to halt a DRAW instruction or to stop evaluation of an expression You entered a value or variable that is the wrong data type For a function including implied multiplication or an instruction you entered an argument that is an invalid data type such as a complex number where a real number is required See Appendix A and the appropriate chapter e In an editor you entered a type that is not allowed such as a matrix entered as an element in the stat list editor See the appropriate chapter e You attempted to store an incorrect data type such as a matrix to a list Your calculator displays the ERR DIM MISMATCH error if you are trying to perform an operation that references one or more lists or matrices whose dimensions do not match For example multiplying L1 L2 where L1 1 2 3 4 5 and L2 1 2 produces an ERR DIM MISMATCH error because the number of elements in L1 and L2 do not match Appendix B Reference Information 394 Error Type DIVIDE BY 0 DOMAIN DUPLICATE Duplicate Name EXPIRED Error in Xmit ID NOT FOUND ILLEGAL NEST INCREMENT INVALID Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies e You attempted to divide by zero This error is not returned during graphing The TI 84 Plus allows for undefined va
238. ers FRAC MATH 1 gt Frac t MODE Full MODE Func 2nd CATALOG GarbageCollect NUM 9 gcd 360 Function or Instruction Arguments geometcdf p x geometpdf p x Get variable GetCalc variable portflag getDate getDtFmt getDtStr integer getTime getTmFmt getTmStr integer getKey Goto Jabel Result Computes a cumulative probability at x the number of the trial on which the first success occurs for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of SUCCESS p Computes a probability at x the number of the trial on which the first success occurs for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p Gets data from the CBL 2 or CBR System and stores it in variable Gets contents of variable on another TI 84 Plus and stores it to variable on the receiving Tl 84 Plus By default the T1 84 Plus uses the USB port if it is connected If the USB cable is not connected it uses the I O port portflag 0 use USB port if connected portflag 1 use USB port portflag 2 use O port Returns a list giving the date according to the current value of the clock The list is in vear month day format Returns an integer representing the date format that is currently set on the device 1 M D IY 2 D IMIY 3 Y M D Returns a string of the current date in the format specified by integer where 1 M D Y 2 D MI
239. ersion of the free moving cursor ZBox To define a new viewing window using ZBox follow these steps Select 1 ZBox from the ZOOM menu The zoom cursor is displayed at the center of the screen Move the zoom cursor to any spot you want to define as a corner of the box and then press ENTER When you move the cursor away from the first defined corner a small square dot indicates the spot Press 4 4 L or 7 AS you move the cursor the sides of the box lengthen or shorten proportionately on the screen Note To cancel ZBox before you press ENTER press CLEAR When you have defined the box press to replot the graph n 2914894 Y 1 93 4839 H LAB0BSi0eg Y 4 5161 5 Chapter 3 Function Graphing To use ZBox to define another box within the new graph repeat steps 2 through 4 To cancel ZBox press CLEAR Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom In magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the cursor location Zoom Out displays a greater portion of the graph centered on the cursor location The XFact and YFact settings determine the extent of the zoom To zoom in on a graph follow these steps 1 Check XFact and YFact change as needed 2 Select 2 Zoom In from the ZOOM menu The zoom cursor is displayed 3 Move the zoom cursor to the point that is to be the center of the new viewing window 4 Press ENTER The TI 83 Plus adjusts the viewing window by XFact and YFact updates the window variables and replots
240. es GDB1 GDB2 Graph pictures Pict Pic2 Pic9 PicO a Saas ttc Tables TbiStart ATbI no not TbiInput applicable Apps Applications see Note above AppVars Application variables variables a see a above Variables with minX maxX RegEQ reserved names and others Aa System variables Xmin Xmax and others no not applicable Archiving and unarchiving can be done in two ways e Use the 5 Archive or 6 UnArchive commands from the MEMORY menu or CATALOG e Use a Memory Management editor screen Before archiving or unarchiving variables particularly those with a large byte size such as large programs use the MEMORY menu to e Find the size of the variable e See if there is enough free space Sizes must be such that Archive Archive free size gt variable size Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 331 For Sizes must be such that RAM free size gt variable size Note If there is not enough space unarchive or delete variables as necessary Be aware that when you unarchive a variable not all the memory associated with that variable in user data archive will be released since the system keeps track of where the variable has been and where it is now in RAM Even if there appears to be enough free space you may see a Garbage Collection message when you attempt to archive a variable Depending on the usability of empty blocks in the user data archive you may need to unarchive existing v
241. es as a list enclosed in brackets with commas separating the values Plotki Flokz Flot mhin l OB Bute uinnin Bil 13 iF unin winhina The value of the first term is 0 and the value of the second term is 1 for the sequence u n Setting Window Variables To display the window variables press WINDOW These variables define the viewing window The values below are defaults for Seq graphing in both Radian and Degree angle modes nMin 1 Smallest n value to evaluate nMax 10 Largest n value to evaluate PlotStart 1 First term number to be plotted PlotStep 1 Incremental n value for graphing only Xmin 10 Smallest X value to be displayed Xmax 10 Largest X value to be displayed Xscl 1 Spacing between the X tick marks Ymin 10 Smallest Y value to be displayed Ymax 10 Largest Y value to be displayed Yscl 1 Spacing between the Y tick marks nMin must be an integer gt 0 nMax PlotStart and PlotStep must be integers gt 1 nMin is the smallest n value to evaluate nMin also is displayed in the sequence Y editor nMax is the largest n value to evaluate Sequences are evaluated at u nMin u nMin 1 u nMin 2 u nMax PlotStart is the first term to be plotted PlotStart 1 begins plotting on the first term in the sequence If you want plotting to begin with the fifth term in a sequence for example set PlotStart 5 The first four terms are evaluated but are not plotted on the graph PlotStep is the inc
242. es for parametric graphing CALC CALC operations in parametric graphing work the same as in Func graphing The CALCULATE menu items available in parametric graphing are 1 value 2 dy dx 3 dy dt and 4 dx dt Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing 96 Chapter 5 Polar Graphing Getting Started Polar Rose Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details The polar equation R Asin B graphs a rose Graph the rose for A 8 and B 2 5 and then explore the appearance of the rose for other values of A and B 1 Press to display the MODE screen Press x Fisti_Fistz Fietz HR DIDI to select Pol graphing mode aae J0 Select the defaults the options on the left for the r other mode settings To F e 2 Press Y to display the polar Y editor Press 8 2 5 to define r1 3 Press 6 to select 6 ZStandard and graph the equation in the standard viewing window The graph shows only five petals of the rose and the rose does not appear to be symmetrical This is because the standard window sets max 2z and defines the window rather than the pixels as square 4 Press to display the window variables Press 4 x to increase the value of Omax to my An Asters 1368956 5 Press 5 to select 5 ZSquare and plot the graph 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 with new values for the variables A and B in the polar equation r1 Asin B8 Observe how the new values affect the graph Chapter 5 Pola
243. escribes the variable RegEQ RESID Ylistname RegEQ Xlistname Automatic Regression Equation Each regression model has an optional argument regequ for which you can specify a Y variable such as Y1 Upon execution the regression equation is stored automatically to the specified Y variable and the Y function is selected Linked 1 22 354Li i ils F Ploti Floki Flot Y ax h ok SES Se b 1 333333333 faxtbhs LisLz Y3 We 2 1 33333 wy I TM MathPrint MathPrint MathPrint El Z 37 gt L1 1 1 Floti AmA Flot 2 astLe whys 7 72 753 wes LinkFedtaxths Lis sYB ee Pc PP 23 3H tad Classic Classic Regardless of whether you specify a Y variable for regequ the regression equation always is stored to the Tl 84 Plus variable RegEQ which is item 1 on the VARS Statistics EQ secondary menu my Z TEST PTS Re E Sib Note For the regression equation you can use the fixed decimal mode setting to control the number of digits stored after the decimal point Chapter 1 However limiting the number of digits to a small number could affect the accuracy of the fit Diagnostics Display Mode When you execute some regression models the TI 84 Plus computes and stores diagnostics values for r correlation coefficient and r coefficient of determination or for R coefficient of determination You can control whether these values are displayed by turning StatDiagnostics on or off on the mode screen r and r
244. ess GRAPH The regression line and the scatter plot are displayed You can control the number of decimal places displayed by changing the decimal mode setting The statistics reported are not stored in the history on the home screen Press VARS 5 gt gt gt to access the statistical variables Press CLEAR to return to the home screen The regression line appears to fit the central portion of the scatter plot well However a residual plot may provide more information about this fit 15 Press 1 to select 1 Edit The stat list editor is displayed Press gt and 4 to move the cursor onto L3 Press INS An unnamed column is displayed in column 3 L3 L4 L5 and L6 shift right one column The Name prompt is displayed in the entry line and alpha lock is on Chapter 12 Statistics 180 16 Press LIST to display the LIST NAMES menu aise OFS MATH If necessary press to move the cursor onto the list name RESID 17 Press to select RESID and paste it to the stat list editor s Name prompt 18 Press ENTER RESID is stored in column 3 of the Stat list editor Press repeatedly to examine the residuals RESID AASTST Notice that the first three residuals are negative They correspond to the shortest pendulum string lengths in L1 The next five residuals are positive and three of the last four are negative The latter correspond to the longer string lengths in L1 Plott
245. ever reset to zero even after memory is cleared Apps are independent applications which are stored in Flash ROM AppVars is a variable holder used to store variables created by Apps You cannot edit or change variables in AppVars unless you do so through the application which created them To leave the MEMORY MANAGEMENTI DELETE menu press either QUIT or CLEAR Both options display the home screen Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 328 Deleting Items from Memory Deleting an Item To increase available memory by deleting the contents of any variable real or complex number list matrix Y variable program Apps AppVars picture graph database or string follow these steps 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu Select 2 Mem Mgmt Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE menu Select the type of data you want to delete or select 1 All for a list of all variables of all types A screen is displayed listing each variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes each variable is using For example if you select 4 List the LIST editor screen is displayed 4 Press 4 and to move the selection cursor gt next to the item you want to delete and then press DEL The variable is deleted from memory You can delete individual variables one by one from this screen No warning will be given to verify the deletion Note If you are deleting programs or Apps you will receive a message asking you
246. f geometcdf computes a cumulative probability at x the number of the trial on which the first success occurs for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p O lt p lt 1 must be true x can be a real number or a list of real numbers geometcdf p x Jeometcodf i D i Jeometcodf i 5 1 Coo ara were Bard E eo eros aaro MathPrint Classic Distribution Shading DISTR DRAW Menu To display the DISTR DRAW menu press DISTR gt DISTR DRAW instructions draw various types of density functions shade the area specified by owerbound and upperbound and display the computed area value Selecting an item from the DIST DRAW menu opens a wizard for the input of syntax for that item some of the arguments are optional If an argument is not optional the cursor will not move on to the next argument until a value is entered If you access any of these functions through CATALOG the command or function will paste and you will be required to fill in the arguments To clear the drawings select 1 ClrDraw from the DRAW menu Chapter 8 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 248 Note Before you execute a DISTR DRAW instruction you must set the window variables so that the desired distribution fits the screen DISTR DRAW 1 ShadeNorm Shades normal distribution 2 Shade t Shades Student t distribution 3 Shade Shades x distribution 4 ShadeF Shades F distribution
247. fidence interval for 1 proportion Confidence interval for difference of 2 proportions Chi square test for 2 way tables Chi square Goodness of Fit test Test comparing 2 o s t test for regression slope and p Confidence interval for linear regression slope coefficient b One way analysis of variance Note When a new test or interval is computed all previous output variables are invalidated Inferential Stat Editors for the STAT TESTS Instructions In this chapter the description of each STAT TESTS instruction shows the unique inferential stat editor for that instruction with example arguments Descriptions of instructions that offer the Data Stats input choice show both types of input Screens Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 221 e Descriptions of instructions that do not offer the Data Stats input choice show only one input screen The description then shows the unique output screen for that instruction with the example results e Descriptions of instructions that offer the Calculate Draw output choice show both types of screens calculated and graphic results e Descriptions of instructions that offer only the Calculate output choice show the calculated results on the home screen Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 222 Z Test Z Test one sample z test item 1 performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean u when the population standard deviation o is known
248. five plotted points at a time on a function press 4 or gt If you move the trace cursor beyond the top or bottom of the screen the coordinate values at the bottom of the screen continue to change appropriately Quick Zoom is available in Pol graphing mode panning is not Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid Theta Value To move the trace cursor to any valid value on the current function enter the number When you enter the first digit a 9 prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen You can enter an expression at the 8 prompt The value must be valid for the current viewing window When you complete the entry press to move the cursor Chapter 5 Polar Graphing 100 ZOOM ZOOM operations in Pol graphing work the same as in Func graphing Only the X Xmin Xmax and Xscl and Y Ymin Ymax and Yscl window variables are affected The 8 window variables 9min Omax and Ostep are not affected except when you select ZStandard The VARS ZOOM secondary menu ZT Z9 items 4 ZOmin 5 Z0max and 6 ZOstep are zoom memory variables for Pol graphing CALC CALC operations in Pol graphing work the same as in Func graphing The CALCULATE menu items available in Pol graphing are 1 value 2 dy dx and 3 dr d60 Chapter 5 Polar Graphing 101 Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing Getting Started Forest and Trees Note Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details
249. for the area of a regular N sided polygon and then solve for each variable given the other variables Explore the fact that the limiting case is the area of a circle rr Consider the formula A NB sin z N cos z N for the area of a regular polygon with N sides of equal length and B distance from the center to a vertex N 4 sides N 8 sides 12 sides Procedure 1 Press B to select B Solver from the MATH menu Either the equation editor or the interactive solver editor is displayed If the interactive solver editor is displayed press 4 to display the equation editor 2 Enter the formula as 0 A NBsin z N cos z N and then press ENTER The interactive solver editor is displayed A A H b tgininm Hi H Ol Wt da C Dnm ng 1 1eE99 1 3 Enter N 4 and B 6 to find the area A of a square with a distance B from center to vertex of 6 centimeters 4 Press 4 4 to move the cursor onto A and then press SOLVE The solution for A is displayed on the interactive solver editor Chapter 17 Activities 321 5 Now solve for B for a given area with various number of sides Enter A 200 and N 6 To find the distance B move the cursor onto B and then press SOLVE T E O WM TOWN Wa 6 Enter N 8 To find the distance B move the cursor onto B and then press SOLVE Find B for N 9 and then for N 10 T E F mI I TOW l Find the area given B 6 and N 10 100 150 1000 a
250. fore expression is evaluated lower and upper must be entered in list format 5P 5 solyelo p 125 4 641 555834 MathPrint F 5 SsolywecQs Pe 125 aha a 7 56 SHS J 4 641522254 Classic MATH NUM Number Operations MATH NUM Menu To display the MATH NUM menu press gt MATH NUM CPX PRB 1 abs Absolute value 23 eound4 Round 32 APart Integer part Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 45 MATH NUM CPX PRB 4 f Part Fractional part 5 int Greatest integer 6 min Minimum value 7 max Maximum value 8 ens Least common multiple 9 gcd Greatest common divisor 0 remainder Reports the remainder as a whole number from a division of two whole numbers where the divisor is not zero A n dqbUn a Converts an improper fraction to a mixed number or a mixed number to an improper fraction B PED Converts a decimal to a fraction or a fraction to a decimal Gs Uad Displays the mixed number template in MathPrint mode In Classic mode displays a small u between the whole number and fraction De wird Displays the fraction template in MathPrint mode In Classic mode displays a thick fraction bar between the numerator and the denominator abs abs absolute value returns the absolute value of real or complex modulus numbers expressions lists and matrices Note abs is also found on the FUNC shortcut menu ALPHA F2 1 abs value 2356 296 ci
251. frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ Turns off the expression display during TRACE Turns on the expression display during TRACE Computes the F distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified numerator df degrees of freedom and denominator df Converts an answer from a fraction to a decimal or from a decimal to a fraction Stores value to each element in matrixname Stores value to each element in Jistname Sets fixed decimal mode for of decimal places Sets floating decimal mode Equ gt String 2nd CATALOG expr STAT CALC 0 ExpReg t FORMAT ExprOff t FORMAT ExprOn 2nd DISTR DISTR 0 F cdf ALPHA F1 4 gt F4 gt D or MATH NUM 8 gt F lt 4 gt D MATRIX MATH 4 Fill LIST OPS 4 Fill t 0123456789 select one t MODE Float Appendix A Functions and Instructions 359 Function or Instruction Arguments fMax expression variable lower upper tolerance fMin expression variable lower upper tolerance fnint expression variable lower upper tolerance FnOff function function function n FnOn function function function n For variable begin end increment commands End commands fPart value F pdf x numerator df denominator df FRAC Answers value gt Frac Full Func GarbageCollect gcd valueA valueB Result Returns the
252. g it but you cannot edit it Resetting the TI 84 Plus RAM ARCHIVE ALL Menu Reset displays the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu This menu gives you the option of resetting all memory including default settings or resetting selected portions of memory while preserving other data stored in memory such as programs and Y functions For instance you can choose to reset all of RAM or just restore the default settings Be aware that if you choose to reset RAM all data and programs in RAM will be erased For archive memory you can reset variables Vars applications Apps or both of these Be aware that if you choose to reset Vars all data and programs in archive memory will be erased If you choose to reset Apps all applications in archive memory will be erased When you reset defaults on the Tl 84 Plus all defaults in RAM are restored to the factory settings Stored data and programs are not changed These are some examples of TI 84 Plus defaults that are restored by resetting the defaults e Mode settings such as Normal notation Func graphing Real numbers and Full screen Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 333 e Y functions off e Window variable values such as Xmin 10 Xmax 10 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 and Xres 1 STAT PLOTS off e Format settings such as CoordOn graphing coordinates on AxesOn and ExprOn expression on e rand seed value to 0 Displaying the RAM ARCHIVE ALL Menu To display the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu on t
253. g that differ from function graphing Setting Parametric Graphing Mode To display the mode screen press MODE To graph parametric equations you must select parametric graphing mode before you enter window variables and before you enter the components of parametric equations Displaying the Parametric Y Editor After selecting parametric graphing mode press Y to display the parametric Y editor Floti Filoke Floks In this editor you can display and enter both the X and Y components of up to six equations X1T and Y1T through X6T and Y6T Each is defined in terms of the independent variable T A common application of parametric graphs is graphing equations over time Selecting a Graph Style The icons to the left of X1T through X6T represent the graph style of each parametric equation The default in parametric mode is line which connects plotted points Line thick 4 path ii animate and dot styles are available for parametric graphing Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing 93 Defining and Editing Parametric Equations To define or edit a parametric equation follow the steps in Chapter 3 for defining a function or editing a function The independent variable in a parametric equation is T In parametric graphing mode you can enter the parametric variable T in either of two ways e Press X T 0 n e Press ALPHA T Two components X and Y define a single parametric equation You must define both
254. ghlighted Defaults are highlighted below The following pages describe the mode settings in detail Normal Sci Eng Float 0123456789 Radian Degree Func Par Pol Seg Connected Dot Sequential Simul Real a bire i Full Horiz G T MathPrint Classic n d Un d Answers Auto Dec Frac Numeric notation Number of decimal places in answers Unit of angle measure Type of graphing Whether to connect graph points Whether to plot simultaneously Real rectangular complex or polar complex Full screen two split screen modes Controls whether inputs and outputs on the home screen and in the Y editor are displayed as they are in textbooks Displays results as simple fractions or mixed fractions Controls the format of the answers Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 14 GoTo Format Graph No Yes Shortcut to the Format Graph screen 2nd FORMAT StatDiagnostics Off On Determines which information is displayed in a statistical regression calculation StatWizards On Off Determines if syntax help prompts are provided for optional and required arguments for many statistical regression and distribution commands and functions On Selection of menu items in STAT CALC DISTR DISTR DISTR DRAW and seq in LIST OPS displays a screen which provides syntax help wizard for the entry of required and optional arguments into the command or function The function or command will paste the entered arguments to the Home Screen
255. ground throws a ball to the ferris wheel passenger The thrower s arm is at the same height as the bottom of the ferris wheel but 25 meters b to the right of the ferris wheel s lowest point 25 0 The person throws the ball with velocity vo of 22 meters per second at an angle 0 of 66 from the horizontal The parametric equations below describe the location of the ball at time T X T b TVg cos Y T Tvo sind g 2 T where g 9 8 m sec Procedure 1 Press MODE Select Par Simul and the default settings Simul simultaneous mode simulates the two objects in motion over time 2 Press WINDOW Set the viewing window Tmin 0 Xmin 13 Ymin 0 Tmax 12 Xmax 34 Ymax 31 Tstep 1 Xscl 10 Yscl 10 3 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the expressions to define the path of the ferris wheel and the path of the ball Set the graph style for X2T to path Ploti Flake Flake aiTtThlbcostml 6 4781lb 1bsintnt i eo ee ee eee ee Wer BeeTsinteet j 65 8727 Note Try setting the graph styles to X1T and X2T which simulates a chair on the ferris wheel and the ball flying through the air when you press GRAPH Chapter 17 Activities 317 Press to graph the equations Watch closely as they are plotted Notice that the ball and the ferris wheel passenger appear to be closest where the paths cross in the top right quadrant of the ferris wheel Press WINDOW Change the viewi
256. h pastes gt Dec to the current cursor location Press to show the sequence in decimal cT 1111111 form Press gt repeatedly or press and hold gt to ene Xs scroll the list and view all the list elements Naming Lists Using TI 84 Plus List Names L1 through L6 The Tl 84 Plus has six list names in memory L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 and L6 The list names L1 through L6 are the second functions of 1 through 6 To paste one of these names to a valid screen press 2nd and then press the appropriate key L1 through L6 are stored in stat list editor columns 1 through 6 when you reset memory Creating a List Name on the Home Screen To create a list name on the home screen follow these steps ale Press enter one or more list elements and then press Separate list elements with commas List elements can be real numbers complex numbers or expressions El 2 34 Press STO Press letter from A to Z or 6 to enter the first letter of the name Enter zero to four letters 8 or numbers to complete the name El 2 3 4 TEST Press ENTER The list is displayed on the next line The list name and its elements are stored in memory The list name becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu Ti 2 3 47 TEST OPS MATH 1 2 4 43 1 Ties T Note If you want to view a user created list in the stat list editor you must retrieve the list in the stat list editor Chapter 12 Chapter 11 Lists 162 You also
257. hange according to the current context The center area displays up to seven elements of up to three lists it abbreviates values when necessary The entry line displays the full value of the current element Using the Stat List Editor Entering a List Name in the Stat List Editor To enter a list name in the stat list editor follow these steps 1 Display the Name prompt in the entry line in either of two ways e Move the cursor onto the list name in the column where you want to insert a list and then press INS An unnamed column is displayed and the remaining lists shift right one column e Press 4 until the cursor is on the top line and then press gt until you reach the unnamed column Note If list names are stored to all 20 columns you must remove a list name to make room for an unnamed column The Name prompt is displayed and alpha lock is on 2 Enter a valid list name in any of four ways e Select a name from the LIST NAMES menu Chapter 11 e Enter L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 or L6 from the keyboard e Enter an existing user created list name directly from the keyboard e Enter a new user created list name a Hame ABC 3 Press or to store the list name and its elements if any in the current column of the Stat list editor Chapter 12 Statistics 185 To begin entering scrolling or editing list elements press The rectangular cursor is displayed Note If the list name you entered in s
258. has the wrong sign This error is not returned during graphing The TI 84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph e The increment in a For loop is 0 e You attempted to reference a variable or use a function where it is not valid For example Yn cannot reference Y Xmin AX or TblStart e You attempted to reference a variable or function that was transferred from the Tl 82 and is not valid for the Tl 84 Plus For example you may have transferred Un 1 to the TI 84 Plus from the TI 82 and then tried to reference it e In Seq mode you attempted to graph a phase plot without defining both equations of the phase plot e In Seq mode you attempted to graph a recursive sequence without having input the correct number of initial conditions e In Seq mode you attempted to reference terms other than n 1 or n 2 e You attempted to designate a graph style that is invalid within the current graph mode e You attempted to use Select without having selected turned on at least one xyLine or scatter plot Appendix B Reference Information 395 Error Type INVALID DIM ITERATIONS LABEL LINK L1 or any other file to Restore MEMORY MemoryFull MODE NO SIGN CHNG NONREAL ANS OVERFLOW Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies e The ERR INVALID DIM error message may occur if you are trying to graph a function that does not involve the stat plot features The error can be corrected by turning off the stat plots To turn
259. hat you want to select 3 Press to paste the mode name to the cursor location The mode is changed when the program is executed Chapter 3 Function Graphing 67 Defining Functions Displaying Functions in the Y Editor To display the Y editor press Y You can store up to 10 functions to the function variables Y1 through Y9 and YO You can graph one or more defined functions at once In this example functions Y1 and Y2 are defined and selected Floti Filoke Flok Defining or Editing a Function To define or edit a function follow these steps 1 Press Y to display the Y editor 2 Press to move the cursor to the function you want to define or edit To erase a function press CLEAR 3 Enter or edit the expression to define the function e You may use functions and variables including matrices and lists in the expression When the expression evaluates to a nonreal number the value is not plotted no error is returned e You can access the shortcut menus by pressing F1 F4 e The independent variable in the function is X Func mode defines as X To enter X press or press X e When you enter the first character the is highlighted indicating that the function is selected As you enter the expression it is stored to the variable Yn as a user defined function in the Y editor 4 Press or to move the cursor to the next function Defining a Function from the Home Screen or a Program
260. he TI 84 Plus follow these steps 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu 2 Select 7 Reset to display the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu ARCHIVE ALL fr FAM Defaults Resetting RAM Memory Resetting all RAM restores RAM system variables to factory settings and deletes all nonsystem variables and all programs Resetting RAM defaults restores all system variables to default settings without deleting variables and programs in RAM Resetting all RAM or resetting defaults does not affect variables and applications in user data archive Note Before you reset all RAM memory consider restoring sufficient available memory by deleting only selected data To reset all RAM memory or RAM defaults on the Tl 84 Plus follow these steps 1 From the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu select 1 All RAM to display the RESET RAM menu or 2 Defaults to display the RESET DEFAULTS menu ing ing Feset Feset Resetting FAM erases all data and Programs from FAM 2 If you are resetting RAM read the message below the RESET RAM menu e To cancel the reset and return to the HOME screen press ENTER e To erase RAM memory or reset defaults select 2 Reset Depending on your choice the message RAM cleared or Defaults set is displayed on the home screen Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 334 Resetting Archive Memory When resetting archive memory on the TI 84 Plus you can choose to delete from user data archive all variables all applications or b
261. he top of the screen indicates the selected bound A Guess prompt is displayed 4 Press lt to trace to a point near the maximum and then press ENTER Or press 3 8 and then press to enter a guess for the maximum When you press a number key in TRACE the X prompt is displayed in the bottom left corner Notice how the values for the calculated maximum compare with the maximums found with the free moving cursor the trace cursor and the table Note In steps 2 and 3 above you can enter values directly for Left Bound and Right Bound in the same way as described in step 4 TI Ced eee een Lert Found n s eS bre Y 409 7 647 TIENEN MIRE secre Right Eound n s cLBOBEL Y 405 15149 Tiiti eer F 4 GUess 7 H 4 24H9s62 Y 405 4556H TI Ceg eee een Kamu n 2 6H11866 f 410 2641 Chapter 17 Activities 305 Comparing Test Results Using Box Plots Problem An experiment found a significant difference between boys and girls pertaining to their ability to identify objects held in their left hands which are controlled by the right side of their brains versus their right hands which are controlled by the left side of their brains The Tl Graphics team conducted a similar test for adult men and women The test involved 30 small objects which participants were not allowed to see First they held 15 of the objects one by one in their left hands and guessed what they were Then they held the oth
262. he variables Pic1 through Pic9 and Pic0 are restricted to pictures you cannot store another type of data to them The variables GDB1 through GDB9 and GDBO0 are restricted to graph databases you cannot store another type of data to them The variables Str1 through Str9 and Str0 are restricted to strings you cannot store another type of data to them Except for system variables you can store any string of characters functions instructions or variables to the functions Yn 1 through 9 and 0 XnT YnT 1 through 6 rn 1 through 6 u n v n and w n directly or through the Y editor The validity of the string is determined when the function is evaluated Archive Variables You can store data programs or any variable from RAM to user data archive memory where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently Archiving also allows you to free up RAM for variables that may require additional memory The names of archived variables are preceded by an asterisk indicating they are in user data archive System Variables The variables below must be real numbers You may store to them Since the Tl 84 Plus can update some of them as the result of a ZOOM for example you may want to avoid using these variables to store nongraphing data e Xmin Xmax Xscl AX XFact Tstep PlotStart nMin and other window variables Appendix B Reference Information 383 e ZXmin ZXmax ZXscl ZTstep ZPlotStart Zu nMin and other ZOOM variable
263. hen you move to the next variable Expressions must resolve to real numbers at each step during the iteration You can store equations to any VARS Y VARS variables such as Y1 or r6 and then reference the variables in the equation The interactive solver editor displays all variables of all Y functions recalled in the equation ieee Wo EQUATION SOLVER ean y atr Solving for a Variable in the Equation Solver To solve for a variable using the equation solver after an equation has been stored to eqn follow these steps 1 Select B Solver from the MATH menu to display the interactive solver editor if not already displayed Ge s Pe 125 n G 6 P H bournd Ledos 1 2 Enter or edit the value of each known variable All variables except the unknown variable must contain a value To move the cursor to the next variable press or LW 3 Pe 125 8 H F 58 bournd Ledo 1 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 43 3 Enter an initial guess for the variable for which you are solving This is optional but it may help find the solution more quickly Also for equations with multiple roots the Tl 84 Plus will attempt to display the solution that is closest to your guess Ge s Pe 125 0 o 40 F 5 bournd 1Ledos 1 The default guess is calculated as upper tower l 4 Edit bound ower upper lower and upper are the bounds between which the TIl 84 Plus searches for a solution This is
264. hing Getting Started Graphing a Circle Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Graph a circle of radius 10 centered on the origin in the standard viewing window To graph this circle you must enter separate formulas for the upper and lower portions of the circle Then use ZSquare zoom square to adjust the display and make the functions appear as a circle 1 In Func mode press to display the Y editor Floti Flet Flats sall iag T Press v Cg 100 ENTER to enter the expression Y 100 X which defines the top half of the circle The expression Y 100 X defines the bottom half of the circle On the Tl 84 Plus you can define one function in terms of another To define Y2 Y1 press to enter the negation sign Press F4 to display the Y VARS shortcut menu and then press to select Y1 2 Press 6 to select 6 ZStandard This is a quick way to reset the window variables to the standard values It also graphs the functions you do not need to press GRAPH Notice that the functions appear as an ellipse in the standard viewing window This is due to the range of values that ZStandard defines for the X axis and Y axis 3 To adjust the display so that each pixel represents an equal width and height press 5 to select 5 ZSquare The functions are replotted and now appear as a circle on the display Chapter 3 Function Graphing 65 4 To see the ZSquare window v
265. history or to most other locations where the cursor is available for input Some calculations will compute directly from the wizard If a command or function is accessed from CATALOG the command or function will paste without wizard support Run the Catalog Help application APPS for more syntax help when needed Off The function or command will paste to the cursor location with no syntax help wizard Set Glock Sets the time and date Changing Mode Settings To change mode settings follow these steps 1 Press or 4 to move the cursor to the line of the setting that you want to change 2 Press gt or to move the cursor to the setting you want 3 Press ENTER Setting a Mode from a Program You can set a mode from a program by entering the name of the mode as an instruction for example Func or Float From a blank program command line select the mode setting from the mode screen the instruction is pasted to the cursor location PEOGRAM TEST Funck Normal Sci Eng Notation modes only affect the way an answer is displayed on the home screen Numeric answers can be displayed with up to 10 digits and a two digit exponent and as fractions You can enter a number in any format Normal notation mode is the usual way we express numbers with digits to the left and right of the decimal as in 12345 67 Chapter 1 Operating the TIl 84 Plus Silver Edition 15 Sci scientific notation mode expresses numbers in two
266. i polar complex mode 370 re i polar complex mode 17 50 Real mode 17 370 real real part 54 370 RecallGDB 136 370 RecallPic 135 370 rectangular form complex numbers 52 RectGC rectangular graphing coordinates 75 371 recursive sequences 105 re enabling a disabled calculator 392 ref row echelon form 159 371 RegEQ regression equation variable 196 329 regression model automatic regression equation 196 automatic residual list feature 195 diagnostics display mode 196 models 200 relational operations 62 153 remainder 49 Removing a Faceplate 9 Repeat 284 371 RESET MEMORY menu 336 resetting all memory 336 archive memory 335 defaults 334 memory 334 RAM memory 334 residual list RESID 195 Return 287 371 root 40 379 root of a function 88 round 47 152 371 row 371 rowSwap 159 371 rref reduced row echelon form 159 372 S Sci scientific notation mode 15 373 scientific notation 12 411 screen modes 17 second cursor 2nd 8 second key 2nd 2 seconds DMS notation 60 sector 340 Select 171 373 selecting data points from a plot 172 functions from the home screen or a program 70 functions in the Y editor 70 stat plots from the Y editor 70 Send send to CBL 2 or CBR 293 373 SendID 347 sending See transmitting 36 SendSW 347 Seq sequence graphing mode 16 373 seq sequence 170 373 sequence graphing axes format 107 CALC calculate menu 108 evaluating 109 free moving
267. iable Overwrites data in receiving duplicate variable Overwrites data in all receiving duplicate variables Skips ungrouping of sending variable Stops ungrouping at duplicate variable Notes about Menu Items When you select 1 Rename the Name prompt is displayed and alpha lock is on Enter a new variable name and then press ENTER Ungrouping resumes Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 338 e When you select 2 Overwrite the unit overwrites the data of the duplicate variable name found in RAM Ungrouping resumes e When you select 3 Overwrite All the unit overwrites the data of all duplicate variable names found in RAM Ungrouping resumes e When you select 4 Omit the unit does not ungroup the variable in conflict with the duplicated variable name found in RAM Ungrouping resumes with the next item e When you select 5 Quit ungrouping stops and no further changes are made To ungroup a group of variables 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu em Mamt Del StClear Entries 4 ClrAllLists v Archive 6i UnArchive reReset SHGr Our Select 8 Group to display the GROUP UNGROUP menu Press gt to display the UNGROUP menu GROUP 5F0 KGROUPA 32 GROUPC 4 Press 4 and to move the selection cursor gt next to the group variable you want to ungroup and then press ENTER The ungroup action is completed Note Ungrouping does not remove the group from user da
268. icades si denwaataueatatagtsuetavice a aee E EE 68 Selecting and Deselecting FUNCTIONS ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeesssanaaaasneeeeeneeseenas 69 Setting Grapn Styles TOM FUNCTIONS ssi ae ee a Ea e E aeo eni aei an ie E a a 71 Setting the Viewing Window Variables cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeeeesaneas 73 Setting the Graph FOM dT aai a r aa a e RAA a A A AE r aAA A a Aaaa AAE EAA E EA A A 74 Displaying Graphis se tieina a a a a a a 76 Exploring Graphs with the Free Moving Cursor esssssssssssssssssssssssrrrrrnrrrrrresrsnsntnnnntnrnnnennrnn nnnm nenne 78 Exploring Graphs Wilh RACE mioriennoir ne a a a 78 Exploring Graphs with the ZOOM Instructions cccccceccssseseeeeececeeeseeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeseaneeeeeeesanees 80 USING ZOOM MEMORY seien a io earls a a ee Sete end 85 Using the CALC Calculate Operations cccccsssseecceceeeeeececaeeessseeeeeeeeeseesesaaaaaaseeeeeeeeeeessansaaasees 87 iii Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing scsi a e a aa S a aa 91 GElting Started Path Olay Baller e a e a 91 Defining and Displaying Parametric Graphs cccccssesssstsesesseseeseseeeeeseesseeesesseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeees 93 E pionno Parametric Graphs sasan EE satus adeusesamsatevaunes 95 Chapter 5 POlar Graphing c pen a a a aaa 97 Getting Started Polar ROSC csipi ioii a EE a A REA EE 97 Defining and Displaying Polar Graphs ccccccccccccccccccec
269. ick styles are available for sequence graphing Graph styles are ignored in Web format Selecting and Deselecting Sequence Functions The Tl 84 Plus graphs only the selected sequence functions In the Y editor a sequence function is selected when the signs of both u z and u nMin are highlighted To change the selection status of a sequence function move the cursor onto the sign of the function name and then press ENTER The status is changed for both the sequence function u n and its initial value u 7Min Defining and Editing a Sequence Function To define or edit a sequence function follow the steps in Chapter 3 for defining a function The independent variable in a sequence is n In Seq graphing mode you can enter the sequence variable in either of two ways e Press X T 0 n e Press CATALOG N You can enter the function name from the keyboard 2nd u v w Generally sequences are either nonrecursive or recursive Sequences are evaluated only at consecutive integer values n is always a series of consecutive integers starting at zero or any positive integer Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 104 Nonrecursive Sequences In a nonrecursive sequence the nth term is a function of the independent variable n Each term is independent of all other terms For example in the nonrecursive sequence below you can calculate u 5 directly without first calculating u 1 or any previous term Plotki Flokz F
270. ig functions arcsine SIN arccosine Cos and arctangent 2nd TAN with real numbers expressions and lists The current angle mode setting affects interpretation sin value cos value tan value Note The trig functions do not operate on complex numbers Power Square Square Root You can use power square x and y square root v with real and complex numbers expressions lists and matrices You cannot use y with matrices MathPrint value value J value Classic value power Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 36 Inverse You can use inverse x with real and complex numbers expressions lists and matrices The multiplicative inverse is equivalent to the reciprocal 1 x wue gi log 104 In You can use log logarithm LOG 104 power of 10 10 and In natural log LN with real or complex numbers expressions and lists log value MathPrint 1070 In value Classic 104 power Exponential e exponential ex returns the constant e raised to a power You can use e with real or complex numbers expressions and lists MathPrint e 148 4131591 Classic e power ers 142 4131591 Constant e constant e is stored as a constant on the TI 84 Plus Press e to copy e to the cursor location In calculations the TI 84 Plus uses 2 718281828459 for e 2 r 122512825 Ans 2 r18251825 4 596714
271. in matrices Selecting a Matrix Before you can define or display a matrix in the editor you first must select the matrix name To do so follow these steps 1 Press 4 to display the MATRX EDIT menu The dimensions of any previously defined matrices are displayed a ME A E C 0 E F la JL Ll E iiaia EE EE 88 2 Select the matrix you want to define The MATRX EDIT screen is displayed Chapter 10 Matrices 145 MATRIACe i xi a Accepting or Changing Matrix Dimensions The dimensions of the matrix row x column are displayed on the top line The dimensions of a new matrix are 1 x 1 You must accept or change the dimensions each time you edit a matrix When you select a matrix to define the cursor highlights the row dimension e To accept the row dimension press ENTER e To change the row dimension enter the number of rows up to 99 and then press ENTER The cursor moves to the column dimension which you must accept or change the same way you accepted or changed the row dimension When you press ENTER the rectangular cursor moves to the first matrix element Viewing and Editing Matrix Elements Displaying Matrix Elements After you have set the dimensions of the matrix you can view the matrix and enter values for the matrix elements In a new matrix all values are zero Select the matrix from the MATRX EDIT menu and enter or accept the dimensions The center portion of the mat
272. in and Xmax Press ENTER The cursor is on the first selected function in the Y editor at the X value you entered and the coordinates are displayed even if CoordOff format is selected To move the cursor from function to function at the entered X value press 4 or To restore the free moving cursor press 4 or gt Chapter 3 Function Graphing 87 zero zero finds a zero x intercept or root of a function using solve Functions can have more than one x intercept value zero finds the zero closest to your guess The time zero spends to find the correct zero value depends on the accuracy of the values you specify for the left and right bounds and the accuracy of your guess To find a zero of a function follow these steps 1 Select 2 zero from the CALCULATE menu The current graph is displayed with Left Bound in the bottom left corner Press 4 or to move the cursor onto the function for which you want to find a zero Press 4 or gt or enter a value to select the x value for the left bound of the interval and then press ENTER A gt indicator on the graph screen shows the left bound Right Bound is displayed in the bottom left corner Press or gt or enter a value to select the x value for the right bound and then press ENTER A 4 indicator on the graph screen shows the right bound Guess Is then displayed in the bottom left corner GUEST n 4 Heese Ysi 127766 4 Press 4 or
273. in the LIST OPS menu When selecting a supported statistics command regression or distribution with the STAT WIZARDS setting ON the default setting a syntax help wizard screen is displayed The wizard allows the entry of required and optional arguments The function or command will paste with the entered arguments to the Home screen history or in most other locations where the cursor is available for input If a command or function is accessed from CATALOG the command or function will paste without wizard support Run the Catalog Help application APPS for more syntax help when needed APPS TI 84 Plus Keyboard Generally the keyboard is divided into these zones graphing keys editing keys advanced function keys and scientific calculator keys Keyboard Zones Graphing Graphing keys access the interactive graphing features The third function of these keys ALPHA F1 F4 displays the shortcut menus which include templates for fractions n d quick matrix entry and some of the functions found on the MATH and VARS menus Editing Editing keys allow you to edit expressions and values Advanced Advanced function keys display menus that access the advanced functions Scientific Scientific calculator keys access the capabilities of a standard scientific calculator Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 1 TI 84 Plus Silver Edition
274. independent applications which are stored in Flash ROM AppVars is a variable holder used to store variables created by independent applications You cannot edit or change variables in AppVars unless you do so through the application which created them Storing Variable Values Storing Values in a Variable Values are stored to and recalled from memory using variable names When an expression containing the name of a variable is evaluated the value of the variable at that time is used To store a value to a variable from the home screen or a program using the key begin ona blank line and follow these steps 1 Enter the value you want to store The value can be an expression 2 Press STO gt is copied to the cursor location Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 20 3 Press and then the letter of the variable to which you want to store the value 4 Press ENTER If you entered an expression it is evaluated The value is stored to the variable S o730 SiF Displaying a Variable Value To display the value of a variable enter the name on a blank line on the home screen and then press ENTER B a1 Archiving Variables Archive Unarchive You can archive data programs or other variables in a section of memory called user data archive where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently Archived variables are indicated by asterisks to the left of the variable names Archived variables cannot be edit
275. ing instruction Menu Menu sets up branching within a program If Menu is encountered during program execution the menu screen is displayed with the specified menu items the pause indicator is on and execution pauses until you select a menu item The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks Up to seven pairs of menu items follow Each pair comprises a text item also enclosed in quotation marks to be displayed as a menu selection and a label item to which to branch if you select the corresponding menu selection Menu title textl labell text2 label2 Program Output Chapter 16 Programming 286 CE Fl LE HFR PICE A WEIGHTED DICE The program above pauses until you select 1 or 2 If you select 2 for example the menu disappears and the program continues execution at Lbl B prgm Use prgm to execute other programs as subroutines When you select prgm it is pasted to the cursor location Enter characters to spell a program name Using prgm is equivalent to selecting existing programs from the PRGM EXEC menu however it allows you to enter the name of a program that you have not yet created prgmname Note You cannot directly enter the subroutine name when using RCL You must paste the name from the PRGM EXEC menu Return Return quits the subroutine and returns execution to the calling program even if encountered within nested loops Any loops are ended An implied Return exists at the end of any
276. ing the residuals will show this pattern more clearly 19 Press STAT PLOT 2 to select 2 Plot2 from the STAT PLOTS menu The stat plot editor is displayed for plot 2 20 Press to select On which turns on plot 2 Press gt to select scatter plot Press L1 to specify Xlist L1 for plot 2 Press R E S 1 D alpha lock is on to specify Ylist RESID for plot 2 Press to select O as the mark for each data point on the scatter plot 21 Press Y to display the Y editor Press to move the cursor onto the sign and then press to deselect Y1 Press 4 to turn off plot 1 22 Press 9 to select 9 ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu The window variables are adjusted automatically and plot 2 is displayed This is a scatter plot of the residuals Chapter 12 Statistics 181 Notice the pattern of the residuals a group of negative residuals then a group of positive residuals and then another group of negative residuals The residual pattern indicates a curvature associated with this data set for which the linear model did not account The residual plot emphasizes a downward curvature so a model that curves down with the data would be more accurate Perhaps a function such as square root would fit Try a power regression to fit a function of the form y a x 23 24 25 26 27 b Press Y to display the Y editor AEF Fist Flet Press to clear the linear regression e
277. ing window Xmin 0 Ymin 5 Xres 1 Xmax 100 Ymax 10 Xscl 10 Yscl 1 3 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the upper and lower functions Y1 300X X 625 Y2 3cos 1X 4 Press CALC 5 to select 5 Intersect The graph is displayed Select a first curve second curve and guess for the intersection toward the left side of the display The solution is displayed and the value of X at the intersection which is the lower limit of the integral is stored in Ans and X 5 Press QUIT to go to the home screen Press DRAW 7 and use Shade to see the area graphically Shade Y2 Y1 Ans 75 6 Press QUIT to return to the home screen Enter the expression to evaluate the integral for the shaded region fnint Y1 Y2 X Ans 75 The area is 325 839962 Chapter 17 Activities 316 Using Parametric Equations Ferris Wheel Problem Problem Using two pairs of parametric equations determine when two objects in motion are closest to each other in the same plane A ferris wheel has a diameter d of 20 meters and is rotating counterclockwise at a rate s of one revolution every 12 seconds The parametric equations below describe the location of a ferris wheel passenger at time T where o is the angle of rotation 0 0 is the bottom center of the ferris wheel and 10 10 is the passenger s location at the rightmost point when T 0 X T r cos o where a 2nTs andr d 2 Y T r rsino A person standing on the
278. ion with respect to variable occurs between lower and upper Values for variable fMin and fMax are not valid in expression The accuracy is controlled by tolerance if not specified the default is 1E 5 fMin expression variable lower upper tolerance fMax expression variable lower upper tolerance Note In this guidebook optional arguments and the commas that accompany them are enclosed in brackets ffintsintAs As 1 5 8F9r171 flax tsintAa As 1 orfbr3rirl MathPrint ffintsintAs aAs n 1 5r 8F9r1irl filaxtsintAsa As n 1 0 8r9rirl Classic nDeriv nDeriv numerical derivative returns an approximate derivative of expression with respect to variable given the value at which to calculate the derivative and e if not specified the default is 1E 3 nDeriv is valid only for real numbers Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 40 J onan m CEEI r MathPrint o Classic nDeriv expression variable value nDeriv uses the symmetric difference quotient method which approximates the numerical derivative value as the slope of the secant line through these points f x fx E A e amp As becomes smaller the approximation usually becomes more accurate In MathPrint mode the default e is 1E 3 You can switch to Classic mode to change e for investigations MathPrint Classic You can use nDeriv once in expression Because of the method used to
279. ions in the Y editor e Change the window variable values e Turn stat plots on or off e Clear existing drawings with ClirDraw Note If you draw on a graph and then perform any of the actions listed above the graph is replotted without the drawings when you display the graph again Before you clear drawings you can store them with StorePic Drawing on a Graph You can use any DRAW menu instructions except Drawinv to draw on Func Par Pol and Seq graphs Drawlnv is valid only in Func graphing The coordinates for all DRAW instructions are the display s x coordinate and y coordinate values You can use most DRAW menu and DRAW POINTS menu instructions to draw directly on a graph using the cursor to identify the coordinates You also can execute these instructions from the home screen or from within a program If a graph is not displayed when you select a DRAW menu instruction the home screen is displayed Clearing Drawings Clearing Drawings When a Graph Is Displayed All points lines and shading drawn on a graph with DRAW instructions are temporary To clear drawings from the currently displayed graph select 1 ClrDraw from the DRAW menu The current graph is replotted and displayed with no drawn elements Clearing Drawings from the Home Screen or a Program To clear drawings on a graph from the home screen or a program begin on a blank line on the home screen or in the program editor Select 1 ClrDraw from the DRAW menu The
280. is cleared and the last entry is pasted to the line Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 22 Because the TI 84 Plus updates ENTRY only when you press ENTER you can recall the previous entry even if you have begun to enter the next expression 5 7 Sty m ENTER J 2nd ENTRY Accessing a Previous Entry The Tl 84 Plus retains as many previous entries as possible in ENTRY up to a capacity of 128 bytes To scroll those entries press ENTRY repeatedly If a single entry is more than 128 bytes it is retained for ENTRY but it cannot be placed in the ENTRY storage area 1 A i A ENTER ae l 2 B 2 ENTER 2 6E 2nd ENTRY If you press ENTRY after displaying the oldest stored entry the newest stored entry is displayed again then the next newest entry and so on 2nd ENTRY 1 A 1 276 1 Hi Executing the Previous Entry Again After you have pasted the last entry to the home screen and edited it if you chose to edit it you can execute the entry To execute the last entry press ENTER To execute the displayed entry again press again Each subsequent execution displays the entry and the new answer ALPHA N 1 STO ALPHA N ALPHA N ENTER ENTER Multiple Entry Values on a Line To store to ENTRY two or more expressions or instructions separate each expression or instruction with a colon then press ENTER All expressions and instructions separated by colons are stored in
281. is in the calculated interval The second line gives the mean height of the sample x used to compute this interval The third line gives the sample standard deviation Sx The bottom line gives the sample size n To obtain a more precise bound on the population mean u of women s heights increase the sample size to 90 Use a sample mean x of 163 8 and sample standard deviation Sx of 7 1 calculated from the larger random sample This time use the Stats Summary statistics input option 1 Press 4 8 to display the inferential stat editor for Tinterval Press gt to select Inpt Stats The editor changes so that you can enter summary statistics as input Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 216 2 Press 163 8 to store 163 8 to x Press 7 1 to store 7 1 to Sx Press 90 to store 90 to n 3 Press to move the cursor onto Calculate and then press to calculate the new 99 percent confidence interval The results are displayed on the home screen If the height distribution among a population of women is normally distributed with a mean u of 165 1 centimeters and a standard deviation o of 6 35 centimeters what height is exceeded by only 5 percent of the women the 95th percentile 4 Press to clear the home screen Wa ledte Press DISTR to display the DISTR fharnaled e distributions menu OR 5 Press 3 to open the invNorm wizard Enter the information as follows Press 95 165
282. is selected all independent and dependent variable values on the table are cleared If DependAsk is selected all dependent variable values on the table are cleared Chapter 7 Tables 118 Scrolling Independent Variable Values If Indpnt Auto is selected you can press 4 and in the independent variable column to display more values As you scroll the column the corresponding dependent variable values also are displayed All dependent variable values may not be displayed if Depend Ask is selected yf reed a ee Note You can scroll back from the value entered for TbIStart As you scroll TblStart is updated automatically to the value shown on the top line of the table In the example above TblStart 0 and ATbl 1 generates and displays values of X 0 6 but you can press 4 to scroll back and display the table for X 1 5 Changing Table Settings from the Table View You can change table settings from the table view by highlighting a value in the table pressing and entering a new A value 1 Press Y and then press 1 F1 12 gt Floti Flot Plots to enter the function Y1 1 2x 2 Press TABLE 3 Press to move the cursor to highlight 3 and then press 4 Press 1 F1 1 2 to change the table settings to view changes in X in increments of 1 2 Chapter 7 Tables 119 5 Press ENTER Displaying Other Dependent Variables If you have defined more than two dependent vari
283. istA listB min value list valueA nCr valueB value nCr list list nCr value listA nCr listB nDeriv expression variable value gt n d lt gt Un d Nom effective rate compounding periods Normal normalcdf owerbound upperbound uU 0 normalpdf x u 0 Result Returns real or complex list of the smaller of each pair of elements in istA and JistB Returns a real or complex list of the smaller of value or each Jist element Returns the number of combinations of valueA taken valueB at a time Returns a list of the combinations of value taken each element in ist at a time Returns a list of the combinations of each element in list taken value at a time Returns a list of the combinations of each element in istA taken each element in istB at a time Displays results as a simple fraction Returns approximate numerical derivative of expression with respect to variable at value with specified Converts the results from a fraction to mixed number or from a mixed number to a fraction if applicable Computes the nominal interest rate Sets normal display mode Computes the normal distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified u and o Computes the probability density function for the normal distribution at a specified x value for the specified u and o Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd LIST MATH 1 min 2nd LIST PRB
284. ition 13 Keystrokes DEL 2nd INS NO gt ioe ALPHA 2nd A LOCK Result Deletes a character at the cursor this key repeats Changes the cursor to an underline __ inserts characters in front of the underline cursor to end insertion press INS or press 4 4 gt or z Changes the cursor to il the next keystroke performs a 2nd function displayed above a key and to the left to cancel 2nd press again Changes the cursor to M the next keystroke performs a third function of that key displayed above a key and to the right executes SOLVE Chapters 10 and 11 or accesses a shortcut menu to cancel ALPHA press or press 4 4 L or x Changes the cursor to fi sets alpha lock subsequent keystrokes access the third functions of the keys pressed to cancel alpha lock press ALPHA If you are prompted to enter a name such as for a group or a program alpha lock is set automatically Pastes an X in Func mode a T in Par mode a 9 in Pol mode or an n in Seq mode with one keystroke Setting Modes Checking Mode Settings Mode settings control how the TI 84 Plus displays and interprets numbers and graphs Mode settings are retained by the Constant Memory feature when the TI 84 Plus is turned off All numbers including elements of matrices and lists are displayed according to the current mode settings To display the mode settings press MODE The current settings are hi
285. ke Flake was YB sub sub returns a string that is a subset of an existing string string can be a string or a string variable begin is the position number of the first character of the subset length is the number of characters in the subset sub string begin length ABCOEFG 5trs ABCDEFG a ee 4323 Entering a Function to Graph during Program Execution In a program you can enter a function to graph during program execution using these commands PROGRAM IHFUT neut EMTRY Strg StLFINGFEsuc Stes 27s O1isFP6rarh Note When you execute this program enter a function to store to Y3 at the ENTRY prompt Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 212 Hyperbolic Functions in the CATALOG Hyperbolic Functions The hyperbolic functions are available only from the CATALOG The table below lists the hyperbolic functions in the order in which they appear among the other CATALOG menu items The ellipses in the table indicate the presence of additional CATALOG items CATALOG cosh Hyperbolic cosine cosh Hyperbolic arccosine Sinh Hyperbolic sine sinh Hyperbolic arcsine tanh Hyperbolic tangent tanh Hyperbolic arctangent sinh cosh tanh sinh cosh and tanh are the hyperbolic functions Each is valid for real numbers expressions and lists sinh value cosh value tanh value gsinht D7 9210953055 cosShE Ca 29a ada F3 11 6314131 1 sinh cosh tanh
286. l or complex numbers expressions or lists Returns 1 if valueA gt valueB Returns 0 if valueA lt valueB valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers expressions or lists Returns 1 if valueA lt valueB Returns 0 if valueA gt valueB valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers expressions or lists Returns 1 if valueA valueB Returns 0 if valueA lt valueB valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers expressions or lists Returns 1 divided by a real or complex number or expression Returns 1 divided by list elements Returns matrix inverted Returns value multiplied by itself value can be a real or complex number or expression Returns ist elements squared Returns matrix multiplied by itself Returns value raised to power value can be a real or complex number or expression Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item D x MATH 5 MAT 55 q on af MAT MATH 3 9 MATH 4 2nd TEST TEST 1 2nd TEST TEST 2 4 2nd TEST TEST 5 lt z 2nd TEST TEST 3 gt 2nd TEST TEST 6 lt 2nd TEST TEST 4 gt mee my Spy of 4s 3 N gt A E 380 Function or Instruction Arguments Powers list power Powers value list Powers matrix power Negation value Power of ten 104 value Power of ten 104 ist Square root y value Multiplication v
287. l transaction C Y is the number of compounding periods per year in the same transaction When you store a value to P Y the value for C Y automatically changes to the same value To store a unique value to C Y you must store the value to C Y after you have stored a value to P Y The EasyData Application The Vernier EasyData application by Vernier Software amp Technology allows you to view and analyze real world data when the TI 84 Plus is connected to data collection devices such as Texas Instruments CBR 2 CBL 2 Vernier LabPro Vernier USB sensors Vernier Go Motion or Vernier Motion Detector Unit The Tl 84 Plus comes with the EasyData App already installed Note The application will only work with Vernier auto ID sensors when using CBL 2 and Vernier LabPro The EasyData App will autolaunch on your TI 84 Plus if you plug in a USB sensor such as the CBR 2 or Vernier USB Temperature sensor Steps for Running the EasyData App Follow these basic steps when using the EasyData App Chapter 14 Applications 263 Starting the EasyData App 1 Attach your data collection device to your TI 84 Plus e Make sure the cables are firmly connected 2 Ifthe EasyData App has not auto launched press and the 4 or to select the EasyData App Kode Time Grarh Sts 3 Press ENTER The EasyData information screen is Fitelseturistart grar hiui displayed for about three seconds followed b
288. larGC polar graphing coordinates displays the cursor location as polar coordinates R and 9 The RectGC PolarGC setting determines which variables are updated when you plot the graph move the free moving cursor or trace e RectGC updates X and Y if CoordOn format is selected X and Y are displayed PolarGC updates X Y R and 9 if CoordOn format is selected R and 90 are displayed CoordOn CoordOff CoordOn coordinates on displays the cursor coordinates at the bottom of the graph If ExprOff format is selected the function number is displayed in the top right corner CoordOff coordinates off does not display the function number or coordinates GridOff GridOn Grid points cover the viewing window in rows that correspond to the tick marks on each axis GridOff does not display grid points GridOn displays grid points AxesOn AxesOff AxesOn displays the axes Chapter 3 Function Graphing 15 AxesOff does not display the axes This overrides the LabelOff LabelOn format setting LabelOff LabelOn LabelOff and LabelOn determine whether to display labels for the axes X and Y if AxesOn format is also selected ExprOn ExprOff ExprOn and ExprOff determine whether to display the Y expression when the trace cursor is active This format setting also applies to stat plots When ExprOn is selected the expression is displayed in the top left corner of the graph screen When ExprOff and CoordOn both are selected
289. lation for the two sample tests and intervals Must be a real number gt 0 o2 The known population standard deviation from the second population for the two sample tests and intervals Must be a real number gt 0 List1 List2 The names of the lists containing the data you are testing for the two sample tests and intervals Defaults are L1 and L2 respectively Freq1 Freq2 The names of the lists containing the frequencies for the data in List1 and List2 for the two sample tests and intervals Defaults 1 All elements must be integers 0 X1 Sx1 n1 X2 Sx2 n2 Summary statistics mean standard deviation and sample size for sample one and sample two in the two sample tests and intervals Pooled Specifies whether variances are to be pooled for 2 SampTTest and 2 SampTInt No instructs the Tl 84 Plus not to pool the variances Yes instructs the Tl 84 Plus to pool the variances Po The expected sample proportion for 1 PropZTest Must be a real number such that 0 lt po lt 1 X The count of successes in the sample for the 1 PropZTest and 1 PropZint Must be an integer 0 n The count of observations in the sample for the 1 PropZTest and 1 PropZint Must be an integer gt 0 x1 The count of successes from sample one for the 2 PropZTest and 2 PropZint Must be an integer 0 x2 The count of successes from sample two for the 2 PropZTest and 2 PropZint Must be an integer 0 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distri
290. lation variances can be unequal e Select Yes if you want the variances pooled Population variances are assumed to be equal To select the Pooled option move the cursor to Yes and then press ENTER Selecting Calculate or Draw for a Hypothesis Test After you have entered all arguments in an inferential stat editor for a hypothesis test you must select whether you want to see the calculated results on the home screen Calculate or on the graph screen Draw e Calculate calculates the test results and displays the outputs on the home screen e Draw draws a graph of the test results and displays the test statistic and p value with the graph The window variables are adjusted automatically to fit the graph To select Calculate or Draw move the cursor to either Calculate or Draw and then press ENTER The instruction is immediately executed Selecting Calculate for a Confidence Interval After you have entered all arguments in an inferential stat editor for a confidence interval select Calculate to display the results The Draw option is not available When you press ENTER Calculate calculates the confidence interval results and displays the outputs on the home screen Bypassing the Inferential Stat Editors To paste a hypothesis test or confidence interval instruction to the home screen without displaying the corresponding inferential stat editor select the instruction you want from the CATALOG menu Appendix A describes the
291. le Period Store Rea Etli Calculate iterations S the maximum number of times the algorithm will iterate to find a solution The value for iterations Can be an integer gt 1 and lt 16 if not specified the default is 3 The algorithm may find a solution before iterations is reached Typically larger values for iterations result in longer execution times and better accuracy for SinReg and vice versa A period guess is optional If you do not specify period the difference between time values in Xlistnhame Must be equal and the time values must be ordered in ascending sequential order If you specify period the algorithm may find a solution more quickly or it may find a solution when it would not have found one if you had omitted a value for period If you specify period the differences between time values in X istname can be unequal Note The output of SinReg is always in radians regardless of the Radian Degree mode setting SinReg Example Daylight Hours in Alaska for One Year Compute the regression model for the number of hours of daylight in Alaska during one year SEyC A An 1s 361 Silk i o 19 19 5 17F gt Classic Sintes Lisle Vii gt Gon Ba Hou a te 1 E lt 1 period gt With noisy data you will achieve better convergence results when you specify an accurate estimate for period You can obtain a period guess in either of two ways Chapter 12 Statistics 204 e Plot the data and trace
292. lear a function it is deselected Chapter 3 Function Graphing 69 Turning On or Turning Off a Stat Plot in the Y Editor To view and change the on off status of a stat plot in the Y editor use Plot1 Plot2 Plot3 the top line of the Y editor When a plot is on its name is highlighted on this line To change the on off status of a stat plot from the Y editor press 4 and gt to place the cursor on Plot1 Plot2 or Plot3 and then press ENTER BR Fiete Plots wd 2H BRE Plott is turned on td ae Plot2 and Plot3 are turned off Selecting and Deselecting Functions from the Home Screen or a Program To select or deselect a function from the home screen or a program begin on a blank line and follow these steps 1 Press gt to display the VARS Y VARS menu Select 4 On Off to display the ON OFF secondary menu Select 1 FnOn to turn on one or more functions or 2 FnOff to turn off one or more functions The instruction you select is copied to the cursor location 4 Enter the number 1 through 9 or 0 not the variable Yn of each function you want to turn on or turn off e f you enter two or more numbers separate them with commas e To turn on or turn off all functions do not enter a number after FnOn or FnOff FnOn function function function n FnOff function function function n 5 Press ENTER When the instruction is executed the status of each function in the current mode is set and Done
293. line is displayed that moves as you move the cursor 2 Place the cursor on the y coordinate for horizontal lines or x coordinate for vertical lines through which you want the drawn line to pass 3 Press to draw the line on the graph n er BGe Y 4 1950484 To continue drawing lines repeat steps 2 and 3 To cancel Horizontal or Vertical press CLEAR Drawing a Line from the Home Screen or a Program Horizontal horizontal line draws a horizontal line at Y y which can be an expression but not a list Horizontal y Vertical vertical line draws a vertical line at X x x which can be an expression but not a list Vertical x To instruct the Tl 84 Plus to draw more than one horizontal or vertical line separate each instruction with a colon MathPrint Classic Horizontal fiver e 4 Vertical Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 125 Drawing Tangent Lines Drawing a Tangent Line Directly on a Graph To draw a tangent line when a graph is displayed follow these steps 1 2 Select 5 Tangent from the DRAW menu Press and 4 to move the cursor to the function for which you want to draw the tangent line The current graph s Y function is displayed in the top left corner if ExprOn is selected Press gt and 4 or enter a number to select the point on the function at which you want to draw the tangent line Press ENTER In Func mode the X value at which the tangent line was drawn is di
294. llow these steps 1 If you cannot see anything on the screen you may need to adjust the graphing calculator contrast To darken the screen press and release 2nd and then press and hold 4 until the display is sufficiently dark To lighten the screen press and release 2nd and then press and hold until the display is sufficiently light If an error menu is displayed follow these steps e Note the error type ERR ervor type e Select 2 GOTO if it is available The previous screen is displayed with the cursor at or near the error location e Determine the error e Correct the expression Refer to the Error Conditions table for details about specific errors if necessary If the busy indicator dotted line is displayed a graph or program has been paused the T1 84 Plus is waiting for input Press to continue or press to break If a checkerboard cursor is displayed then either you have entered the maximum number of characters in a prompt or memory is full If memory is full e Press MEM 2 to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE menu e Select the type of data you want to delete or select 1 All for a list of all variables of all types A screen is displayed listing each variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes each variable is using e Press 4 and to move the selection cursor gt next to the item you want to delete and then press DEL Appendix C Service and Warranty Info
295. lock is turned on by default and is accessed from the mode screen Displaying the Clock Settings 1 Press MODE TEACH T HHTHFRINT AEG Uned 2 Press the to move the cursor to SET CLOCK en see FRAC GOTO FORMAT GRAFH YE 3 Press ENTER STAT DIAGNOSTICS on STHTHICARD Q OFF SET CLOCKOEDLE TE T AL Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 9 Changing the Clock Settings 1 Press the J or 4 to highlight the date format you Fornar EA Dene venen want Press ENTER 2 Press to highlight YEAR Press and type the year 3 Press to highlight MONTH Press and type the number of the month 1 12 4 Press to highlight DAY Press and type the date 5 Press to highlight TIME Press gt or to highlight the time format you want Press ENTER 6 Press to highlight HOUR Press and type the hour a number from 1 12 or 0 23 7 Press to highlight MINUTE Press and type the minutes a number from 0 59 8 Press to highlight AM PM Press gt or 4 to highlight the format Press ENTER 9 To save changes press to highlight SAVE Press ENTER Error Messages lf you type the wrong date for the month for example June 31 June does not have 31 days you will receive an error message with two choices Invalid day for month selected e To quit the clock application and return to the home screen select 1 Quit e To return to the clock
296. lot press 4 and gt to move the cursor onto the name in the top line and then press ENTER The stat plot editor for the selected plot is displayed and the selected name remains highlighted Flok Flake Chapter 12 Statistics 211 Turning On and Turning Off Stat Plots PlotsOn and PlotsOff allow you to turn on or turn off stat plots from the home screen or a program With no plot number PlotsOn turns on all plots and PlotsOff turns off all plots With one or more plot numbers 1 2 and 3 PlotsOn turns on specified plots and PlotsOff turns off specified plots PlotsOff 1 2 3 PlotsOn 1 2 3 Note You also can turn on and turn off stat plots in the top line of the Y editor Chapter 3 Defining the Viewing Window Stat plots are displayed on the current graph To define the viewing window press and enter values for the window variables ZoomStat redefines the viewing window to display all statistical data points Tracing a Stat Plot When you trace a scatter plot or xyLine tracing begins at the first element in the lists When you trace a histogram the cursor moves from the top center of one column to the top center of the next starting at the first column When you trace a box plot tracing begins at Med the median Press 4 to trace to Q1 and minX Press gt to trace to Q3 and maxx When you press 4 or to move to another plot or to another Y function tracing moves to the current or beginning p
297. lot nHin i1 WALD RZE uinnin A weohinsa wenhinsa The sequence equation above returns the sequence 2 4 6 8 10 for n 1 2 3 4 5 Note You may leave blank the initial value u nMin when calculating nonrecursive sequences Recursive Sequences In a recursive sequence the nth term in the sequence is defined in relation to the previous term or the term that precedes the previous term represented by u n 1 and u n 2 A recursive sequence may also be defined in relation to n as in u n u n 1 n For example in the sequence below you cannot calculate u 5 without first calculating u 1 u 2 u 3 and u 4 Ploti Flokiz Flake mhin BS eo Wohin Using an initial value u nMin 1 the sequence above returns 1 2 4 8 16 Note On the TI 84 Plus you must type each character of the terms For example to enter u n 1 press 2nd u J DI Recursive sequences require an initial value or values since they reference undefined terms e If each term in the sequence is defined in relation to the previous term as in u n 1 you must specify an initial value for the first term Ploti Flokz Flot mhlin l OH Bute uinnin B108 Wl H weehinsa A winhina Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 105 e If each term in the sequence is defined in relation to the term that precedes the previous term as in u n 2 you must specify initial values for the first two terms Enter the initial valu
298. lrHome i Oubrut t5 4s ANS ae gore aeee For Output on a Horiz split screen the maximum value for row is 4 Chapter 16 Programming 291 getKey getKey returns a number corresponding to the last key pressed according to the key code diagram below If no key has been pressed getKey returns 0 Use getKey inside loops to transfer control for example when creating video games Program Output PROGRAM GETEEY While 1 Jetkes k While K H 9etLkey k Erd Hise E If K 185 Note MATH APPS PRGM and ENTER were pressed Stor during program execution PER Note You can press at any time during execution to break the program TI 84 Plus Key Code Diagram C Grea ros oa 705 CirHome CirTable ClrHome clear home screen clears the home screen during program execution CirTable clear table clears the values in the table during program execution GetCalc GetCalc gets the contents of variable on another Tl 84 Plus and stores it to variable on the receiving TI 84 Plus variable can be a real or complex number list element list name matrix element matrix name string Y variable graph database or picture Chapter 16 Programming 292 GetCale variable portflag By default the Tl 84 Plus uses the USB port if it is connected If the USB cable is not connected it uses the I O port If you want to specify either the USB or I O port use the following portflag numbers
299. lues on a graph e You attempted a linear regression with a vertical line e You specified an argument to a function or instruction outside the valid range This error is not returned during graphing The Tl 84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph See Appendix A e You attempted a logarithmic or power regression with a 7X or an exponential or power regression with a Y e You attempted to compute XPrn or XInt with pmt2 lt pmt You attempted to create a duplicate group name A variable you attempted to transmit cannot be transmitted because a variable with that name already exists in the receiving unit You have attempted to run an application with a limited trial period which has expired e The Tl 84 Plus was unable to transmit an item Check to see that the cable is firmly connected to both units and that the receiving unit is in receive mode e You pressed to break during transmission e You attempted to perform a backup from a Tl 82 to a TI 84 Plus e You attempted to transfer data other than L1 through L6 from a TI 84 Plus to a Tl 82 e You attempted to transfer L1 through L6 from a TI 84 Plus to a TI 82 without using 5 Lists to T182 on the LINK SEND menu This error occurs when the SendID command is executed but the proper graphing calculator ID cannot be found e You attempted to use an invalid function in an argument to a function such as seq within expression for seq e The increment in seq is 0 or
300. lus 5 for each kph from 46 to 55 kph plus 10 for each kph from 56 to 65 kph plus 20 for each kph from 66 kph and above Graph the piecewise function that describes the cost of the ticket The fine Y as a function of kilometers per hour X is 0 0 lt X lt 45 3 50 5 X 45 45 lt X lt 55 50 5 10 10 X 55 55 lt X lt 65 J0 5 10 10 10 20 X 65 65 lt X which simplifies to o 0 lt X lt 45 vd 50 5 X 45 45 lt X lt 55 100 10 X 55 55 lt X lt 65 200 20 X 65 65 lt X Procedure 1 Press MODE Select Func and Classic ANSHERS MH DEC FRAC GOTO FORMAT GRAFH YE STAT OLAGhOZTIC of STATHIZARD p OFF SET CLOCK Eee UF EE 2 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the Y function to describe the fine Use the TEST menu operations to define the piecewise function Set the graph style for Y1 to dot Floti Filoke Flots 3 Press and set Xmin 2 Xscl 10 Ymin 5 Yscl 10 and AX 1 Ignore Xmax and Ymax they are set in step 4 Chapter 17 Activities 308 4 Press QUIT to return to the home screen Store 5 to AY AX and AY are on the VARS Window X Y secondary menu AX and AY specify the horizontal and vertical distance between the centers of adjacent pixels Integer values for AX and AY produce nice values for tracing 5 Press to plot the function At what speed does the ticket exceed 250 tere Ape men Soea ET ri Graphing Inequalities
301. lyze many functions simultaneously For details refer to Chapter 7 Split Screen You can split the screen horizontally to display both a graph and a related editor such as the Y editor the table the stat list editor or the home screen Also you can split the screen vertically to display a graph and its table simultaneously For details refer to Chapter 9 Matrices You can enter and save up to 10 matrices and perform standard matrix operations on them For details refer to Chapter 10 Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 31 Lists You can enter and save as many lists as memory allows for use in statistical analyses You can attach formulas to lists for automatic computation You can use lists to evaluate expressions at multiple values simultaneously and to graph a family of curves For details refer to Chapter 11 Statistics You can perform one and two variable list based statistical analyses including logistic and sine regression analysis You can plot the data as a histogram xyLine scatter plot modified or regular box and whisker plot or normal probability plot You can define and store up to three stat plot definitions For details refer to Chapter 12 Inferential Statistics You can perform 16 hypothesis tests and confidence intervals and 15 distribution functions You can display hypothesis test results graphically or numerically For details refer to Chapter 13 Applications Press to see the c
302. m df is where the computation of S and df are dependent on whether the variances are pooled If the variances are not pooled Sx 7 Sx oes eae ee ni iy 5 2 S N2 pa n n ifs 1 2 l Sx i 1 Sx i HE 1 ae pesca n 1 ny n N gt Appendix B Reference Information 386 otherwise CE n 1 Sx Ny 1 Sx P df ya ey df n n 2 and Sxp is the pooled variance Financial Formulas This section contains financial formulas for computing time value of money amortization cash flow interest rate conversions and days between dates Time Value of Money cae where PMT O y Y P Y a 01 x 1 C Y a compounding periods per year payment periods per year 0 va interest rate per year i FV Pyy 7 _ where PMT 0 Appendix B Reference Information 387 The iteration used to compute ale a N 0 PV PMTx 6 ya eh I 100 x C Yx e0 Ct _ 1 where x i y P Y C Y G 1 ixk where k 0 for end of period payments k 1 for beginning of period payments ie an _ PMT x er In 1 i where i 0 N PV FV PMT where i 0 PMT E x Pv AEE l 1 i 1 where i 0 PMT PV FV N where i 0 where i 0 PV FV PMTxN where i 0 B PMT x G PMT x at 1 i x Pr l FV Appendix B Reference Information 388 where i 0 FV PV PMTxN where i 0 Amortization If computing bal pmt2 npmt
303. m line Switches to editing context clears the value on the bottom line copies the character to the bottom line Nothing Nothing Editing a Matrix Element In editing context an edit cursor is active on the bottom line To edit a matrix element value follow these steps Select the matrix from the MATRX EDIT menu and then enter or accept the dimensions 1 2 Press 4 4 gt and to move the cursor to the matrix element you want to change 3 Switch to editing context by pressing ENTER CLEAR or an entry key 4 Change the value of the matrix element using the editing context keys described below You may enter an expression which is evaluated when you leave editing context Note You can press CLEAR ENTER to restore the value at the cursor if you make a mistake 5 Press ENTER 4 or to move to another element MATRISCA amp 4 Ciauig zi4e 13 rege i I O O D D n Chapter 10 Matrices 147 Using Editing Context Keys Key Function lt or gt Moves the edit cursor within the value or 4 Stores the value displayed on the edit line to the matrix element switches to viewing context and moves the cursor within the column ENTER Stores the value displayed on the edit line to the matrix element switches to viewing context and moves the cursor to the next row element CLEAR Clears the value on the bottom line Any entry character Copies the character to the location of the
304. m value of the function press ENTER The new viewing window is displayed Both Xmax Xmin and Ymax Ymin have been adjusted by factors of 4 the default values for the zoom factors Press 4 and gt to search for the maximum value Press to display the new window settings Note To return to the previous graph press gt 1 ZPrevious Decimal oar fotandard b2Tr19 3 4 z 6 r nase S4O4s Yai 903E a nase SdOys Y 4ii eos Chapter 17 Activities 304 Finding the Calculated Maximum You can use a CALCULATE menu operation to calculate a local maximum of a function To do this pick a point to the left of where you think the maximum is on the graph This is called the left bound Next pick a point to the right of the maximum This is called the right bound Finally guess the maximum by moving the cursor to a point between the left and right bounds With this information the maximum can be calculated by the methods programmed in the TI 84 Plus 1 Press CALC to display the CALCULATE menu Press 4 to select 4 maximum The graph is displayed again with a Left Bound prompt 2 Press to trace along the curve to a point to the left of the maximum and then press ENTER A gt at the top of the screen indicates the selected bound A Right Bound prompt is displayed 3 Press gt to trace along the curve to a point to the right of the maximum and then press ENTER A 4 at t
305. main in split screen mode until you change back to Full screen mode Horiz Horizontal Split Screen Horiz Mode In Horiz horizontal split screen mode a horizontal line splits the screen into top and bottom halves Ploti Flote Flot wYiHsinceae wYeBcoscae o wYs The top half displays the graph The bottom half displays any of these screens e Home screen four lines e Y editor four lines e Stat list editor two rows e Window editor three settings e Table editor two rows Moving from Half to Half in Horiz Mode To use the top half of the split screen Chapter 9 Split Screen 139 e Press or TRACE e Select a ZOOM or CALC operation To use the bottom half of the split screen e Press any key or key combination that displays the home screen e Press Y editor e Press stat list editor e Press window editor e Press TABLE table editor Full Screens in Horiz Mode All other screens are displayed as full screens in Horiz split screen mode To return to the Horiz split screen from a full screen when in Horiz mode press any key or key combination that displays the graph home screen Y editor stat list editor window editor or table editor G T Graph Table Split Screen G T Mode In G T graph table split screen mode a vertical line splits the screen into left and right halves The left half displays all active graphs and plots The right half displays either table dat
306. mal place Xmin 47 3 Ymin 31 3 Xmax 47 3 Ymax 31 3 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 ZFract 4 ZFrac1 4 replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 1 4 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place Xmin 47 4 Ymin 31 4 Xmax 47 4 Ymax 31 4 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 ZFract 5 ZFrac1 5 replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 1 5 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place Xmin 47 5 Ymin 31 5 Xmax 47 5 Ymax 31 5 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 Chapter 3 Function Graphing 84 ZFrac1 8 ZDecimal replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 1 8 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place Xmin 47 8 Ymin 31 8 Xmax 47 8 Ymax 31 8 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 ZFrac1 10 ZFrac1 10 replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 1 10 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place Xmin 47 10 Ymin 31 10 Xmax 47 10 Ymax 31 10 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 Using ZOOM MEMORY ZOOM MEMORY Menu To display the ZOOM MEMORY menu press gt ZOOM MEMORY 1 ZPrevious Uses the previous viewing window 2 ZoomSto Stores the user defined window 32 2ZoOmRicl Recalls
307. mall or too large to graph correctly You may have attempted to zoom in or zoom out to a point that exceeds the TI 84 Plus s numerical range ZOOM e A point ora line instead of a box is defined in ZBox e A ZOOM operation returned a math error Accuracy Information Computational Accuracy To maximize accuracy the Tl 84 Plus carries more digits internally than it displays Values are stored in memory using up to 14 digits with a two digit exponent e You can store a value in the window variables using up to 10 digits 12 for Xscl Yscl Tstep and Qstep e Displayed values are rounded as specified by the mode setting with a maximum of 10 digits and a two digit exponent e RegEQ displays up to 14 digits in Float mode Using a fixed decimal setting other than Float causes RegEQ results to be rounded and stored with the specified number of decimal places Xmin is the center of the leftmost pixel Xmax is the center of the next to the rightmost pixel The rightmost pixel is reserved for the busy indicator AX is the distance between the centers of two adjacent pixels e In Full screen mode AX is calculated as Xmax Xmin 94 In G T split screen mode AX is calculated as Xmax Xmin 46 e If you enter a value for AX from the home screen or a program in Full screen mode Xmax is calculated as Xmin AX 94 In G T split screen mode Xmax is calculated as Xmin AX 46 Ymin is the center of the next to the bottom pixel
308. menu To select a variable from the VARS or VARS Y VARS menu follow these steps 1 Display the VARS or VARS Y VARS menu e Press to display the VARS menu e Press gt to display the VARS Y VARS menu 2 Select the type of variable such as 2 Zoom from the VARS menu or 3 Polar from the VARS Y VARS menu A secondary menu is displayed 3 If you selected 1 Window 2 Zoom or 5 Statistics from the VARS menu you can press gt or to display other secondary menus 4 Select a variable name from the menu It is pasted to the cursor location Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 28 Equation Operating System EOS Order of Evaluation The Equation Operating System EOS defines the order in which functions in expressions are entered and evaluated on the TIl 84 Plus EOS lets you enter numbers and functions in a simple straightforward sequence EOS evaluates the functions in an expression in this order Order Number Function 1 Functions that precede the argument such as sin or log 2 Functions that are entered after the argument such as a a 1 and conversions k Powers and roots such as 2 or 5 32 4 Permutations nPr and combinations nCr 5 Multiplication implied multiplication and division 6 Addition and subtraction T Relational functions such as gt or lt 8 Logic operator and 9 Logic operators or and xor Note Within a priority level EOS evaluates functions fr
309. mode graph the unit circle and the sine curve to show the relationship between them Any function that can be plotted in Func mode can be plotted in Par mode by defining the X component as T and the Y component as F T Procedure 1 Press MODE Select Par Simul and the default settings 2 Press WINDOW Set the viewing window Tmin 0 Xmin 2 Ymin 3 Tmax 27 Xmax 7 4 Ymax 3 Tstep 1 Xscl n 2 Yscl 1 3 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the expressions to define the unit circle centered on 0 0 Floti Flekte Floks Sait boos To YirdsincTa saet BT YerBsincTa 4 Enter the expressions to define the sine curve Floti Fleke Floks Sait oos 7 2 YirBsincTa shet BT YerBsincTa 5 Press TRACE As the graph is plotting you may press to pause and again to resume graphing as you watch the sine function unwrap from the unit circle nip castTy V1 Hone TI Note You can generalize the unwrapping Replace sin T in Y2T with any other trig function to unwrap that function Chapter 17 Activities 315 e You can graph the functions again by turning the functions off and then turning them back on on the Y editor or by using the FuncOFF and FuncON commands on the home screen Finding the Area between Curves Problem Find the area of the region bounded by f x 300x x 625 g x 3cos 1x X AS Procedure 1 Press MODE Select the default mode settings 2 Press WINDOW Set the view
310. mode screen Sets to 0 the dimension of all lists in memory Clears all drawn elements from a graph or drawing Clears the home screen Sets to 0 the dimension of one or more Jistnames Clears all values from the table Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number or list of complex numbers Sets connected plotting mode resets all Y editor graph style settings to Turns off cursor coordinate value display Turns on cursor coordinate value display Returns cosine of a real number expression or list Returns arccosine of a real number expression or list Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd MEM MEMORY 3 Clear Entries 2nd CATALOG ClockOff 2nd CATALOG ClockOn 2nd MEM MEMORY 4 CIrAllLists 2nd DRAW DRAW 1 CirDraw jj I O 8 ClrHome STAT EDIT 4 ClrList t I O 9 CirTable CPX 1 conj T MODE Connected t FORMAT CoordOff t FORMAT CoordOn COS 2nd cos Returns hyperbolic cosine of a real number expression or 2nd CATALOG list Returns hyperbolic arccosine of a real number expression or list Fits a cubic regression model to X istname and Ylistname with frequency freglist and stores the regression equation to regequ cosh CATALOG cosh STAT CALC 6 CubicReg Appendix A Functions and Instructions 356 Function or Instruction Arguments cumSum list cumSum matrix dayOfWk year month day
311. mpare the values of Y1 and Y2 Press Y Turn off Y1 and Y2 and then enter the numerical derivative of the integral of 1 X and the function 1 X Set the graph style for Y3 to line and Y4 to thick Floti Flok Flok S o i wYeRlntaa VSB Daeg Chapter 17 Activities 319 6 Press TRACE Again use the cursor keys to compare the values of the two graphed functions Y3 and Y4 Tosnberivi Yin H 3 1902979 T 3126663 H 3 1902979 Y 21266621 Problem 2 Explore the functions defined by Ani 29 ae y t dt tdt and tdt J fa J J Procedure 2 1 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Use a list to define these three functions simultaneously Store the function in Y5 Floti Flott Floks Tob LIP rte VSB Daeg E 2 ea T d 2 Press 6 to select 6 ZStandard The graphs are displayed as each calculation of the integral and derivative occurs at the pixel point which may take some time Press TRACE Notice that the functions appear identical only shifted vertically by a constant Press Y Enter the numerical derivative of Y5 in Y6 Floti Figke Floks A sYa Ve 3 acy VY H Chapter 17 Activities 320 5 Press TRACE Notice that although the three graphs defined by Y5 are different they share the same derivative Ye nDer ive An n 1 914894 Y 3 66608175 Computing Areas of Regular N Sided Polygons Problem Use the equation solver to store a formula
312. mpdf 246 355 y2cdf 355 y2pdf 355 Fcdf 244 375 Fpdf 243 376 geometcdf 248 361 geometpdf 248 361 invNorm 243 363 normalcdf 242 366 normalpdf 242 366 poissoncdf 247 368 poissonpdf 247 368 distribution shading instructions Shade_t 249 374 Shadey 250 374 Shadek 250 374 ShadeNorm 249 374 division 36 381 AList 171 364 DMS degrees minutes seconds entry notation 60 382 Dot plotting mode 17 358 dot graph style 71 dot pixel mark 132 210 dr d operation on a graph 101 DRAW menu 122 Draw output option 218 220 DRAW POINTS menu 131 DRAW STO draw store menu 134 DrawF draw a function 127 358 drawing on a graph circles Circle 128 functions and inverses DrawF Drawlnv 127 line segments Line 124 lines Horizontal Line Vertical 125 points Pt Change Pt Off Pt On 131 tangents Tangent 126 text Text 129 using Pen 130 Drawlnv draw inverse 127 358 DS lt decrement and skip 286 358 DuplicateName menu 350 dx dt operation on a graph 89 96 dy dx operation on a graph 89 96 101 E exponent 12 15 358 e exponential 37 358 edit keys table 13 Else 282 End 283 359 Eng engineering notation mode 15 359 ENTRY last entry key 22 entry cursor 8 EOS Equation Operating System 29 eqn equation variable 42 EqubString equation to string conversion 270 359 equal to relational test 62 380 Equation Operating System EOS 29 Equation Solver
313. n n n 1 n 2 1 2 7 if n 1 2 is an integer gt 0 n is an error if neither n nor n 1 2 is an integer gt 0 The variable n equals value in the syntax description above randint randint random integer generates and displays a random integer within a range specified by lower and upper integer bounds To generate a list of random numbers specify an integer gt 1 for numtrials number of trials if not specified the default is 1 randInt ower upper numtrials randNorm randNorm random Normal generates and displays a random real number from a specified Normal distribution Each generated value could be any real number but most will be within the interval u 3 o ut 3 o To generate a list of random numbers specify an integer gt 1 for numtrials number of trials if not specified the default is 1 randNorm 0 numtrials Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 58 134 84 PR19S6 Sr randBin randBin random Binomial generates and displays a random integer from a specified Binomial distribution numtrials number of trials must be 1 prob probability of success must be gt 0 and lt 1 To generate a list of random numbers specify an integer gt 1 for numsimulations number of simulations if not specified the default is 1 randBin numtrials prob numsimulations randBincSs 22 randBintr s 4 1639 to 2 1 AA we Note The seed value stored to rand also affects ran
314. n Displays this message when you attempt you turn on the unit to download an application batteries Message A Message B Appendix C Service and Warranty Information 400 After Message A is first displayed you can expect the batteries to function for about one or two weeks depending on usage This one week to two week period is based on tests with alkaline batteries the performance of other types of batteries may vary If Message B is displayed you must replace the batteries immediately to successfully download an application Effects of Replacing the Batteries Do not remove both types of batteries AAA and backup at the same time Do not allow the batteries to lose power completely If you follow these guidelines and the steps for replacing batteries you can replace either type of battery without losing any information in memory Battery Precautions Take these precautions when replacing batteries e Do not leave batteries within reach of children e Do not mix new and used batteries Do not mix brands or types within brands of batteries e Do not mix rechargeable and nonrechargeable batteries e Install batteries according to polarity and diagrams e Do not place nonrechargeable batteries in a battery recharger e Properly dispose of used batteries immediately Do not leave them within the reach of children Do not incinerate or dismantle batteries Disposing of used batteries safely and properly Do
315. n Link 346 Selecting Items to Send LINK SEND Menu To display the LINK SEND menu press LINK SEND RECEIVE Ee ALE n Displays all items as selected including RAM and Flash applications 2 AELS Displays all items as deselected Sh PEO Displays all program names Ae GLS Displays all list names 51 Lists to Displays list names L1 through L6 POL 3 68 gt GDBia Displays all graph databases To Piece Displays all picture data types Oo Matx Displays all matrix data types 9 Real Displays all real variables Ors COPIE Displays all complex variables As Y VarS Displays all Y variables Be SUring s Displays all string variables Cx Apps Displays all software applications D AppVars Displays all software application variables Et Groups Displays all grouped variables F Sendid Sends the Calculator ID number immediately You do not need to select SEND G Sendos Sends operating system updates to another TI 84 Plus Silver Edition or Tl 84 Plus You can not send the operating system to the TI 83 Plus product family Het Back Up Selects all RAM and mode settings no Flash applications or archived items for backup to another Tl 84 Plus Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition TI 83 Plus Silver Edition or to a TI 83 Plus When you select an item on the LINK SEND menu the corresponding SELECT screen is displayed Note Each SELECT screen except All is initially displayed with nothing pre selected All is
316. n displays a list of items received Press QUIT to exit the receive mode DuplicateName Menu During transmission if a variable name is duplicated the DuplicateName menu is displayed on the receiving unit DuplicateName 1 Rename Prompts to rename receiving variable 2 Overwrite Overwrites data in receiving variable Se Oma Skips transmission of sending variable A OUTE Stops transmission at duplicate variable When you select 1 Rename the Name prompt is displayed and alpha lock is on Enter a new variable name and then press ENTER Transmission resumes When you select 2 Overwrite the sending unit s data overwrites the existing data stored on the receiving unit Transmission resumes Chapter 19 Communication Link 350 When you select 3 Omit the sending unit does not send the data in the duplicated variable name Transmission resumes with the next item When you select 4 Quit transmission stops and the receiving unit exits receive mode Receiving from a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition or Tl 84 Plus The TI 84 Plus Silver Edition and the Tl 84 Plus are totally compatible Keep in mind however that the Tl 84 Plus has less Flash memory than a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition You cannot send memory backups between the TI 84 Plus product family and the TI 83 Plus product family Receiving from a TI 83 Plus Silver Edition or Tl 83 Plus The Tl 84 Plus product family and the TI 83 Plus product family are compatible with a few
317. n flight and the vertical and horizontal component vectors of the motion Note To simulate the ball flying through the air set graph style to animate for X1T and Y1T Floti Flott Floks ns s i costa virol sint Aati WET aT Ploti Filokz Flak SS1TESAToos 257 3 Yar BShTsint 2 F H i Ploti Flokz Flot SA1TESAT cos 257 3 Yar BshTsint 2s sret BA zTtTBitil LET Ploti Flokz Flot Sei ThseTooscy 3 WirHseTsint 2s eT Be WerBYir Sa sTBAdit Yt Be Ploti Flokz Flot 47117 BS Tcos i257 3 WirHshsint 257 ob d T BE Wer Bait Weer Gait Yt Be WIHNOOW TIster amin i AMax 14 Asc l SH 1 Hi z Ymin 7S Ymax 15 Yec1l 14 Chapter 4 Parametric Graphing 92 12 Press TRACE to obtain numerical results and Hipes0T cost M1 sOTsinte_ answer the questions at the beginning of this section Tracing begins at Tmin on the first parametric equation X1T and Y1T As you press gt to trace va assuey veg uptaaee the curve the cursor follows the path of the ball over time The values for X distance Y height and T time are displayed at the bottom of the screen Defining and Displaying Parametric Graphs TI 84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities The steps for defining a parametric graph are similar to the steps for defining a function graph Chapter 4 assumes that you are familiar with Chapter 3 Function Graphing Chapter 4 details aspects of parametric graphin
318. nal value is cleared automatically when you enter the first digit e Place the cursor on the digit you want to change and then enter a value or press to delete it Using ZOOM MEMORY Menu Items from the Home Screen or a Program From the home screen or a program you can store directly to any of the user defined ZOOM variables S42 8M 1A OFZ Ana d From a program you can select the ZoomSto and ZoomRcl instructions from the ZOOM MEMORY menu Chapter 3 Function Graphing 86 Using the CALC Calculate Operations CALCULATE Menu To display the CALCULATE menu press CALC Use the items on this menu to analyze the current graph functions CALCULATE I value Calculates a function Y value for a given X 2 Zero Finds a zero x intercept of a function 3 minimum Finds a minimum of a function 4 maximum Finds a maximum of a function 3 intersect Finds an intersection of two functions 6 dy dx Finds a numeric derivative of a function 7 JE x ax Finds a numeric integral of a function value value evaluates one or more currently selected functions for a specified value of X Note When a value is displayed for X press to clear the value When no value is displayed press to cancel the value operation To evaluate a selected function at X follow these steps 1 Select 1 value from the CALCULATE menu The graph is displayed with X in the bottom left corner Enter a real value which can be an expression for X between Xm
319. nches DS pram Executes a program as a subroutine ES Return Returns from a subroutine Bre GLOP Stops execution G DelVar Deletes a variable from within program He GraphStyte Designates the graph style to be drawn Le QOpenii bs No longer used wer Bee lab No longer used These menu items direct the flow of an executing program They make it easy to repeat or skip a group of commands during program execution When you select an item from the menu the name is pasted to the cursor location on a command line in the program To return to the program editor without selecting an item press CLEAR Controlling Program Flow Program control instructions tell the Tl 84 Plus which command to execute next in a program If While and Repeat check a defined condition to determine which command to execute next Conditions frequently use relational or Boolean tests Chapter 2 as in Chapter 16 Programming 281 If A lt 7 At1 gt A or If N 1 and M 1 Goto Z If Use If for testing and branching If condition is false zero then the command immediately following If is skipped If condition is true nonzero then the next command is executed If instructions can be nested If condition command if true command Program Output PROGRAM COUMT A A If Then Then following an If executes a group of commands if condition is true nonzero End identifies the end of the group of commands If condition
320. nd 10000 Compare your results with n6 the area of a circle with radius 6 which is approximately 113 097 m T To il 7 Enter B 6 To find the area A move the cursor onto A and then press SOLVE Find A for N 10 then N 100 then N 150 then N 1000 and finally N 10000 Notice that as N gets large the area A approaches mB Now graph the equation to see visually how the area changes as the number of sides gets large 8 Press MODE Select the default mode settings Chapter 17 Activities 322 9 Press WINDOW Set the viewing window Xmin 0 Ymin 0 Xres 1 Xmax 200 Ymax 150 Xscl 10 Yscl 10 10 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the equation for the area Use X in place of N Set the graph styles as shown Plotki Flokz Flot sY BSB SINTA AIG CW 11 Press TRACE After the graph is plotted press 100 to trace to X 100 Press 150 ENTER Press 188 ENTER Notice that as X increases the value of Y converges to 167 which is approximately 113 097 Y2 nB the area of the circle is a horizontal asymptote to Y1 The area of an N sided regular polygon with r as the distance from the center to a vertex approaches the area of a circle with radius r mr as N gets large Verne SSM Tec see n LBr 22404 f 112 07611 H LBr 2 s404 Y 113 09734 Computing and Graphing Mortgage Payments Problem You are a loan officer at a mortgage company and you recently closed on a 30 year home mortgag
321. nd displays a random integer within a range specified by ower and upper integer bounds for a specified number of trials numtrials Returns a random ordered list of integers from a lower integer to an upper integer which may include the lower integer and upper integer Returns a random matrix of rows 1 99 x columns 1 99 Generates and displays a random real number from a specified Normal distribution specified by u and o fora specified number of trials numtrials Sets the mode to polar complex number mode rei Sets mode to display complex results only when you enter complex numbers Returns the real part of a complex number or list of complex numbers Restores all settings stored in the graph database variable GDB Displays the graph and adds the picture stored in Picn ANGLE 8 P gt Ry STAT CALC 5 QuadReg STAT CALC 7 QuartReg MODE Radian PRB 1 rand PRB 7 randBin PRB 5 randint PRB 8 randintNoRep 2nd MATRIX MATH 6 randM PRB 6 randNorm MODE re i MODE Real CPX 2 real 2nd DRAW STO 4 RecallGDB 2nd DRAW STO 2 RecallPic Appendix A Functions and Instructions 370 Function or Instruction Arguments complex value Rect RectGC ref matrix remainder dividend divisor remainder Jist divisor remainder dividend list remainder Jist list Repeat condition commands End commands Return rou
322. nd value decimals row value matrix row row matrix rowA rowB rowt value matrix rowA rowB rowSwap matrix rowA rowB Result Displays complex value or list in rectangular format Sets rectangular graphing coordinates format Returns the row echelon form of a matrix Reports the remainder as a whole number from a division of two whole numbers where the divisor is not zero Reports the remainder as a whole number from a division of two lists where the divisor is not zero Reports the remainder as a whole number from a division of two whole numbers where the divisor is a list Reports the remainder as a whole number from a division of two lists Executes commands until condition is true Returns to the calling program Returns a number expression list or matrix rounded to decimals lt 9 Returns a matrix with row of matrix multiplied by value and stored in row Returns a matrix with rowA of matrix added to rowB and stored in rowB Returns a matrix with rowd of matrix multiplied by value added to rowB and stored in rowB Returns a matrix with rowd of matrix swapped with rowB Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item CPX 6 gt Rect t FORMAT RectGC 2nd MATRIX MATH A ref NUM 0 remainder NUM 0 remainder NUM 0 remainder NUM 0 remainder t CTL 6 Repeat t CTL E Return NUM 2 round 2nd MATRIX MATH E r
323. nential regression fits the model equation y ab to the data using a least squares fit and transformed values x and In y It displays values for a and b when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays values for r and r Chapter 12 Statistics 202 ExpReg XJistname Ylistname freqlist regequ BEERS mlisteli WlistiLle FreaListi Store Fe Ell Calculate PwrReg ax PwrReg power regression fits the model equation y ax to the data using a least squares fit and transformed values In x and In y It displays values for a and b when DiagnosticOn is set it also displays values for r and r PwrReg XJistname Ylistname freqlist regequ GEE mlistili Wlistile FreaListi Store ResaEi Calculate Logistic c 1 a e gt Logistic fits the model equation y c 1 a e PX to the data using an iterative least squares fit It displays values for a b and c Logistic X istname Ylistname freqlist regequ mlist Lli WlistiLe FresaListi Store Fea Etli Calculate SinReg a sin bx c d SinReg sinusoidal regression fits the model equation y a sin bx c d to the data using an iterative least squares fit It displays values for a b c and d At least four data points are required At least two data points per cycle are required in order to avoid aliased frequency estimates Chapter 12 Statistics 203 SinReg iterations Xlistname Ylistname period regequ Sink 3 Iterations 3 mlisteli Ylist
324. next garbage collection gon 4 variable a After you unarchive R they continue to take BGG Sector 2 up space Sector 1 Z ae variable oe A eee es Sector 3 If the MEMORY Screen Shows Enough Free Space Even if the MEMORY screen shows enough free space to archive a variable or store an application you may still get a Garbage Collect message or an ERR ARCHIVE FULL message When you unarchive a variable the Archive free amount increases immediately but the space is not actually available until after the next garbage collection If the Archive free amount shows enough available space for your variable there probably will be enough space to archive it after garbage collection depending on the usability of any empty blocks The Garbage Collection Process The garbage collection process e Deletes unarchived variables Sector 1 from the user data archive e Rearranges the remaining variables into consecutive blocks Sector 2 Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 341 Note Power loss during garbage collection may cause all memory RAM and Archive to be deleted Using the GarbageCollect Command You can reduce the number of automatic garbage collections by periodically optimizing memory This is done by using the GarbageCollect command To use the GarbageCollect command follow these steps 1 From the HOME screen press CATALOG to display the CATALOG 2 Press or 4 to scroll the CA
325. ng window to concentrate on this portion of the graph Tmin 1 Xmin 0 Ymin 10 Tmax 3 Xmax 23 5 Ymax 25 5 Tstep 03 Xscl 10 Yscl 10 Press TRACE After the graph is plotted press gt to move near the point on the ferris wheel where the paths cross Notice the values of X Y and T nip Locest Pipa ide ose Nss06 Y 19 526615 Press to move to the path of the ball Notice the values of X and Y T is unchanged Notice where the cursor Is located This is the position of the ball when the ferris wheel passenger passes the intersection Did the ball or the passenger reach the intersection first hepeeenee Pe pec TSN HBese T 19 97649 You can use to in effect take snapshots in time and explore the relative behavior of two objects in motion Chapter 17 Activities 318 Demonstrating the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus Problem 1 Using the functions fnint and nDeriv from the FUNC shortcut menu or the MATH menu to graph functions defined by integrals and derivatives demonstrates graphically that Procedure 1 1 2 Press MODE Select the default settings Press WINDOW Set the viewing window Xmin 01 Ymin 1 5 Xres 3 Xmax 10 Ymax 2 5 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 Press Y Turn off all functions and stat plots Enter the numerical integral of 1 T from 1 to X and the function In X Set the graph style for Y1 to line and Y2 to path Floti Filgke Floks Press TRACE Press 4 4 gt and to co
326. ngs saved in memory If a program stores a new value to a variable list matrix or string the program changes the value in memory during execution You can call another program as a subroutine Executing a Program To execute a program begin on a blank line on the home screen and follow these steps 1 Press to display the PRGM EXEC menu 2 Select a program name from the PRGM EXEC menu prgmname is pasted to the home screen for example prgmCYLINDER 3 Press to execute the program While the program is executing the busy indicator is on Last Answer Ans is updated during program execution Last Entry is not updated as each command is executed Chapter 1 The Tl 84 Plus checks for errors during program execution It does not check for errors as you enter a program Breaking a Program To stop program execution press ON The ERR BREAK menu is displayed e To return to the home screen select 1 Quit e To go where the interruption occurred select 2 Goto Editing Programs Editing a Program To edit a stored program follow these steps 1 Press gt to display the PRGM EDIT menu 2 Select a program name from the PRGM EDIT menu Up to the first seven lines of the program are displayed Note The program editor does not display a 4 to indicate that a program continues beyond the screen 3 Edit the program command lines e Move the cursor to the appropriate location and then delete overwrite or insert
327. nguage 2nd CATALOG program AsmPrgm augment matrixA Returns a matrix which is matrixB appended to matrixA as _ 2nd MATRIX matrixB new columns MATH 7 augment Appendix A Functions and Instructions 354 Function or Instruction Arguments Result augment ist4 istB Returns a list which is istB8 concatenated to the end of listA AUTO Answer Displays answers in a similar format as the input AxesOff Turns off the graph axes AxesOn Turns on the graph axes atbi Sets the mode to rectangular complex number mode at bi bal npmd roundvalue Computes the balance at npmt for an amortization schedule using stored values for PV 1 and PMT and rounds the computation to roundvalue binomcdf numtrials p Computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete x binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability p of success on each trial binompdf numtrials p Computes a probability at x for the discrete binomial x distribution with the specified numtrials and probability p of success on each trial checkTmr starttime Returns the number of seconds since you used startTmr to start the timer The starttime is the value displayed by startTmr edf lowerbound Computes the 2 distribution probability between upperbound df lowerbound and upperbound for the specified degrees of freedom df y pdf x d Computes the probability density function pdf for the y distribution at a specified
328. nit Circle ccesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeaaaeseeeeeeeeesenseaaaaaseeseeees 137 USNS OIE S Ch oE ora N Aa A E a a R 138 FIOMZ HOFIZOM TAN SPISTE eisa a A a 139 G T Graph Table Split Sireen cccccceseseseseesseeeeeceeceeeeeaueesseseeceeeeeeeessaauauseseceeeeeessessaaaaseeeeeeeees 140 TI 84 Plus Pixels in Horiz ANd G T Modes ccccecccecteteeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaaasaaeseeeeeeeeesesseanaaaeeeeeeeeees 141 Chapter 10 Matrices aanere aE Ea 143 Getting Started Using the MTRX Shortcut Menu sssssssssssssssssssrsrnnnrrrreesesrrrnrnnrrrrnesesnnrnnnnnrennennne 143 Getting Started Systems of Linear Equations cccccccccssseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaeeeaeeeeeeeseeesssessesseeseeeees 144 DS TITANIC Ze MATIX Jassen a tesed wander act ndatdenancenoteian Datedenmaren vane dete aa tente 145 Viewing and Editing Matrix Elements ccccccecceeeeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaanaaaaasees 146 Using Matrices WithiEX Dr GSSIONS sau vreuiietostececd cy eraatstuehen ude soush sa det eenotin Coat Ai 148 Displaying and Copying Matrices sis cscc tests toadedecud ve ceini cud cdvwuderousenen delta dsceaudeveua Nes easeeadede 149 Using Math Functions with Matrices sisirain a araa aE aaa na 151 Using the MATRX MATH Operations cceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeasaaaeeeeeeeeeessseeeaaaaaaeeeeeeesseessaaeaaaees 154 Chapter 11 RISES Git acnuneaauant aaneanabaasenneaaauasuueawamnauasnsedcnnastansedutanauateuanaeusa sasiuamaea
329. nnuity due where payments occur at the beginning of each payment period Specifies an ordinary annuity where payments occur at the end of each payment period Computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with specified mean wu Computes a probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean wu Sets polar graphing mode Displays complex value in polar format Sets polar graphing coordinates format Executes the program name Computes the sum rounded to roundvalue of the principal amount between pmt and pmt2 for an amortization schedule Returns product of list elements between start and end Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item t STAT PLOT STAT PLOTS 1 Plot1 2 Plot2 3 Plot3 t STAT PLOT STAT PLOTS 1 Plot1 2 Plot2 3 Plot3 2nd STAT PLOT STAT PLOTS 4 PlotsOff 2nd STAT PLOT STAT PLOTS 5 PlotsOn 1 Finance CALC F Pmt_Bgn 1 Finance CALC E Pmt_End 2nd DISTR DISTR D poissoncdf 2nd DISTR DISTR C poissonpdf t Pol CPX 7 gt Polar t FORMAT PolarGC t CTRL D prgm 1 Finance CALC 0 2Prn 2nd LIST MATH 6 prod Appendix A Functions and Instructions 368 Function or Instruction Arguments Prompt variableA variableB variable n 1 PropZInt x n confidence level 2 PropZInt x n x2 n2 confidence level 1 PropZTest p0 x n alternative drawflag 2 Prop
330. not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard used batteries according to local regulations Replacing the Batteries To replace the batteries follow these steps 1 Turn off the graphing calculator Replace the slide cover over the keyboard to avoid inadvertently turning on the graphing calculator Turn the back of the unit toward you 2 Hold the graphing calculator upright push downward on the latch on the top of the battery cover and then pull the cover toward you Note To avoid loss of information stored in memory you must turn off the graphing calculator Do not remove the AAA batteries and thebackup battery simultaneously 3 Replace all four AAA alkaline batteries simultaneously Or replace the backup battery e To replace the AAA alkaline batteries remove all four discharged AAA batteries and install new ones according to the polarity and diagram in the battery compartment Appendix C Service and Warranty Information 401 e To replace thebackup battery remove the screw from the backup battery cover and then remove the cover Install the new battery side up Replace the cover and secure it with the screw 4 Replace the battery compartment cover Turn the graphing calculator on and adjust the display contrast if necessary by pressing a or In Case of Difficulty Handling a Difficulty To handle a difficulty fo
331. nother string from begin to length Returns the sum of elements of list from start to end Displays the MathPrint summation entry template and returns the sum of elements of list from start to end where start lt end Returns the tangent of a real number expression or list Returns the arctangent of a real number expression or list Draws a line tangent to expression at X value Returns hyperbolic tangent of a real number expression or list Returns the hyperbolic arctangent of a real number expression or list Computes the Student t distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified degrees of freedom df Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd CATALOG STATWIZARD OFF 2nd CATALOG STATWIZARD ON 2nd LIST MATH 7 stdDev t CTL F Stop 2nd DRAW STO 3 StoreGDB 2nd DRAW STO 1 StorePic 2nd CATALOG String gt Equ 2nd CATALOG sub 2nd LIST MATH 5 sum MATH NUM 0 summation TAN 2nd TAN DRAW DRAW 5 Tangent CATALOG tanh 2nd CATALOG tanh 2nd DISTR DISTR 6 tcdf Appendix A Functions and Instructions 375 Function or Instruction Arguments Text vow column textl text2 text n Then See If Then Time timeCnv seconds TiInterval istname freqlist confidence level Data list input Tinterval X Sx n confidence level Summary stats input tpdf x d
332. o enter the first height value As you enter it it is displayed on the bottom line Press ENTER The value is displayed in the first row and the rectangular cursor moves to the next row HGHT Enter the other nine height values the same way Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 215 4 Press 4 to display the STAT TESTS menu T CALC WAE Ta ra kiai Test and then press until 8 TInterval is highlighted Se ee SameT Test Prore Test oe Interval 5 Press to select 8 TInterval The inferential stat editor for Tinterval is displayed If Data is not selected for Inpt press 4 to select Data Press LIST and press until HGHT is highlighted and then press ENTER Press 99 to enter a 99 percent confidence level at the C Level prompt 6 Press to move the cursor onto Calculate and then press ENTER The confidence interval is calculated and the Tinterval results are displayed on the home screen Interpreting the results The first line 159 74 173 94 shows that the 99 percent confidence interval for the population mean is between about 159 74 centimeters and 173 94 centimeters This is about a 14 2 centimeters spread The 99 confidence level indicates that in a very large number of samples we expect 99 percent of the intervals calculated to contain the population mean The actual mean of the population sampled is 165 1 centimeters which
333. o highlight ZA and then press to paste it to the entry line AnstF rO p BY 4AC E 4 Press 4 until the cursor is on the sign in the formula Press to edit the quadratic formula expression to become p Je uac ZA 5 Press to find the other solution for the quadratic equation 2x2 11x 14 0 Displaying Complex Results Now solve the equation 2x 6x 5 0 When you set a bi complex number mode the Tl 84 Plus displays complex results 1 Press l 6 times and then press gt to highlight atbi Press ENTER to select a bi complex number mode REST 4 2 Press QUIT to return to the home screen and then press to clear it Chapter 17 Activities 298 9 y ress 2 STO ALPHA A ALPHA 6 ALPHA B ALPHA 5 STO ALPHA C NTER m o O v The coefficient of the x term the coefficient of the X term and the constant for the new equation are stored to A B and C respectively 4 Enter the quadratic formula using Classic Paar 66 50 entry Q O ALPHA B nd v ALPHA B J 2 4 ALPHA A ALPHA coama e Je aac cert AD Because the solution is a complex number you have to enter the formula using the division operation instead of using the n d shortcut template Complex numbers are not valid in the n d template in input or output and will cause Error Data Type to display 5 Press to find one solution f
334. o set the eer EG fixed decimal mode setting to 2 Press D to feng iWs45e7 4 select Par graphing mode REST 4 2 Press to display the TVM Solver Chapter 14 Applications 209 10 Press 360 to enter number of payments Press 8 to enter the interest rate Press gt 800 to enter the payment amount Press 0 to enter the future value of the mortgage Press 12 to enter the payments per year which also sets the compounding periods per year to 12 Press to select PMT END Move the cursor to the PV prompt and then press SOLVE to solve for the present value Press to display the parametric Y editor Turn off Floti Flet Flot all stat plots Press to define X1T as T Press o oe 9 to define Y1T as bal T Press to display the window variables Enter the values below Tmin 0 Xmin 0 Ymin 0 Tmax 360 Xmax 360 Ymax 125000 Tstep 12 Xscl 50 Yscl 10000 Press to draw the graph and activate the trace PITEbANT cursor Press gt and 4 to explore the graph of the outstanding balance over time Press a number and then press to view the balance at a specific time T T i n le0 SSE 4s 4g Press TBLSET and enter the values below TbIStart 0 ATbl 12 Press TABLE to display the table of outstanding balances Y1T Press and select G T split screen mode so that the graph and table are displayed simultaneously Press to display X1T time and Y1T balance in the
335. o set up and perform financial calculations on the home screen TVM Solver TVM Solver displays the TVM Solver Calculating Time Value of Money TVM Calculating Time Value of Money Use time value of money TVM functions menu items 2 through 6 to analyze financial instruments such as annuities loans mortgages leases and savings Each TVM function takes zero to six arguments which must be real numbers The values that you specify as arguments for TVM functions are not stored to the TVM variables Note To store a value to a TVM variable use the TVM Solver or use and any TVM variable on the FINANCE VARS menu If you enter less than six arguments the Tl 84 Plus substitutes a previously stored TVM variable value for each unspecified argument If you enter any arguments with a TVM function you must place the argument or arguments in parentheses Chapter 14 Applications 255 tvm_Pmt tvm_Pmt computes the amount of each payment tvm_Pmt N 1 PV FV P Y C Y tum Prt 765 91 tem Pmt i366 9 5 840 55 WH 3 4 PS PMT Fils Peay bey PMT Ji BEGIH Note In the example above the values are stored to the TVM variables in the TVM Solver The payment tvm_Pmt is computed on the home screen using the values in the TVM Solver Next the interest rate is changed to 9 5 to illustrate the effect on the payment amount tvm_1 tvm_I computes the annual interest rate tvm_ 1 N PV PMGFV P Y C Y
336. o variable Displays Strz and stores entered value to variable Returns the character position in string of the first character of substring beginning at start Returns the largest integer lt a real or complex number expression list or matrix Computes the sum rounded to roundvalue of the interest amount between pmt and pmt2 for an amortization schedule Computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area under the normal distribution curve specified by u and o Computes the inverse cumulative student t probability function specified by degree of freedom df for a given area under the curve Returns the integer part of a real or complex number expression list or matrix Returns the interest rate at which the net present value of the cash flow is equal to zero Identifies if clock is ON or OFF Returns 1 if the clock is ON Returns 0 if the clock is OFF Increments variable by 1 skips commandaA if variable gt value Identifies the next one to five characters as a user created list name Turns off axes labels Turns on axes labels Creates a label of one or two characters Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item t I O 1 Input t I O 1 Input 2nd CATALOG inString NUM 5 int 1 Finance CALC A 2Int 2nd DISTR DISTR 3 invNorm 2nd DISTR DISTR 4 invT NUM 3 iPart 1 Finance CALC 8 irr 2nd CATAL
337. ode or an ellipses Classic mode indicate that the list continues beyond the screen 4 Press L1 to store the data to the list name L1 You then can use the data for another activity such as plotting a histogram Chapter 12 MathPrint randBincifs 5 48 Note Since randBin generates random numbers your 5 5 746653 list elements may differ from those in the example Hne Li ae oO Be We ge Classic Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 35 Keyboard Math Operations Using Lists with Math Operations Math operations that are valid for lists return a list calculated element by element If you use two lists in the same expression they must be the same length L1 4eti4 43 5 ao 11s Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division You can use addition Subtraction multiplication x and division with real and complex numbers expressions lists and matrices You cannot use with matrices If you need to input A 2 enter this as A 1 2 or A 5 valueAt valueB valueA valueB valueA valueB valueA valueB Trigonometric Functions You can use the trigonometric trig functions sine SIN cosine COS and tangent TAN with real numbers expressions and lists The current angle mode setting affects interpretation For example sin 30 in radian mode returns 9880316241 in degree mode it returns 5 sin value cos value tan value You can use the inverse tr
338. of the current graph display to any of 10 graph picture variables Pic1 through Pic9 and Pic0 Chapter 8 Then you can superimpose one or more stored pictures onto the current graph Setting the Graph Modes Checking and Changing the Graphing Mode To display the mode screen press MODE The default settings are highlighted below To graph functions you must select Func mode before you enter values for the window variables and before you enter the functions Uned AnSHERS DEC FRAC GOTO FORMAT GRAFH YES STAT OLAGHOZTIC of STATHICARO Qi OFF SET CLOCK eRe TA Bn REST 4 The TIl 84 Plus has four graphing modes e Func function graphing e Par parametric graphing Chapter 4 e Pol polar graphing Chapter 5 e Seq Sequence graphing Chapter 6 Other mode settings affect graphing results Chapter 1 describes each mode setting e Float or 0123456789 fixed decimal mode affects displayed graph coordinates e Radian or Degree angle mode affects interpretation of some functions e Connected or Dot plotting mode affects plotting of selected functions e Sequential or Simul graphing order mode affects function plotting when more than one function is selected Setting Modes from a Program To set the graphing mode and other modes from a program begin on a blank line in the program editor and follow these steps 1 Press to display the mode settings 2 Press gt L9 and 4 to place the cursor on the mode t
339. oint on that plot not the nearest pixel The ExprOn ExprOff format setting applies to stat plots Chapter 3 When ExprOn is selected the plot number and plotted data lists are displayed in the top left corner Statistical Plotting in a Program Defining a Stat Plot in a Program To display a stat plot from a program define the plot and then display the graph To define a stat plot from a program begin on a blank line in the program editor and enter data into one or more lists then follow these steps Chapter 12 Statistics 212 Press STAT PLOT to display the STAT PLOTS menu TYPE MARK otir ote Press STAT PLOT gt to display the STAT TYPE menu PLUTS a MARE Pape er xYLine 5tHistogram 4 fodboxe lot os Boxe 1 ot 6 HormProbF lot Select the type of plot which pastes the name of the plot type to the cursor location Press Enter the list names separated by commas Press L STAT PLOT 4 to display the STAT PLOT MARK menu This step is not necessary if you selected 3 Histogram or 5 Boxplot in step 4 Select the type of mark O or or for each data point The selected mark symbol is pasted to the cursor location Press ENTER to complete the command line Chapter 12 Statistics 213 Displaying a Stat Plot from a Program To display a plot from a program use the DispGraph instruction Chapter 16 or any of the ZOOM instructions Chapter 3 Chapter 12 Stati
340. oints selected The linear function is displayed The Manual Fit Line equation displays in the form of Y mX b The current value of the first parameter m is highlighted in the symbolic expression Modify parameter values Press the cursor navigation keys L49 gt to move from the first parameter m or b the second parameter You can press and type a new parameter value Press to display the new parameter value When you edit the value of the selected parameter the edit can include insert delete type over or mathematical expression TSS 3484 The screen dynamically displays the revised parameter value Press to complete the modification of the selected parameter save the value and refresh the displayed graph The Chapter 12 Statistics 205 system displays the revised parameter value in the symbolic expression Y mX B and refreshes the graph with the updated Manual Fit Line Select QUIT to finish the Manual Fit function The calculator stores the current mX b expression into Y1 and makes that function active for graphing You can also select Manual Fit while on the Home screen You can then enter a different Y Var such as Y4 and then press ENTER This takes you to the Graph screen and then pastes the Manual Fit equation in the specified Y Var In this example Y4 Statistical Variables The statistical variables are calculated and stored as indicated below To access these variables for use in expressions press
341. om left to right Calculations within parentheses are evaluated first Implied Multiplication The TIl 84 Plus recognizes implied multiplication so you need not press x to express multiplication in all cases For example the Tl 84 Plus interprets 27 4sin 46 5 1 2 and 2 5 7 as implied multiplication Note Tl 84 Plus implied multiplication rules although like the TI 83 differ from those of the TI 82 For example the Tl 84 Plus evaluates 1 2X as 1 2 X while the Tl 82 evaluates 1 2X as 1 2 X Chapter 2 Parentheses All calculations inside a pair of parentheses are completed first For example in the expression 4 1 2 EOS first evaluates the portion inside the parentheses 1 2 and then multiplies the answer 3 by 4 dri 4d 14 23 Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 29 Negation To enter a negative number use the negation key Press and then enter the number On the TI 84 Plus negation is in the third level in the EOS hierarchy Functions in the first level such as squaring are evaluated before negation Example X evaluates to a negative number or 0 Use parentheses to square a negative number TES 24H 4 Fi e A 4 4 Hae Note Use the key for subtraction and the key for negation If you press to enter a negative number as in 9 x 7 or if you press to indicate subtraction as in 9 7 an error occurs If you press A B it is inte
342. omplete list of applications that came with your graphing calculator Visit education ti com quides for additional Flash application guidebooks For details refer to Chapter 14 CATALOG The CATALOG is a convenient alphabetical list of all functions and instructions on the TI 84 Plus You can paste any function or instruction from the CATALOG to the current cursor location For details refer to Chapter 15 Programming You can enter and store programs that include extensive control and input output instructions For details refer to Chapter 16 Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 32 Archiving Archiving allows you to store data programs or other variables to user data archive where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently Archiving also allows you to free up RAM for variables that may require additional memory Archived variables are indicated by asterisks to the left of the variable names For details refer to Chapter 16 Communication Link The Tl 84 Plus has a USB port using a USB unit to unit cable to connect and communicate with another Tl 84 Plus or Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition The Tl 84 Plus also has an I O port using an I O unit to unit cable to communicate with a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition a Tl 84 Plus a Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition a Tl 83 Plus a Tl 83 a TI 82 a TI 73 CBL 2 ora CBR System With TI Connect software and a USB computer cable you can also link the TI 84 Plus to
343. on a menu is displayed e To return to the home screen select 1 Quit e To go to the location of the interruption select 2 Goto When you interrupt a graph a partial graph is displayed e To return to the home screen press or any non graphing key e To restart graphing press a graphing key or select a graphing instruction TI 84 Plus Edit Keys Keystrokes Result gt or 4 Moves the cursor within an expression these keys repeat 4 or Moves the cursor from line to line within an expression that occupies more than one line these keys repeat Moves the cursor from term to term within an expression in MathPrint mode these keys repeat On the home screen scrolls through the history of entries and answers 4 Moves the cursor to the beginning of an expression gt Moves the cursor to the end of an expression a On the home screen moves the cursor out of a MathPrint expression In the Y editor moves the cursor from a MathPrint expression to the previous Y var 2nd In the Y editor moves the cursor from a MathPrint expression to the next Y var ENTER Evaluates an expression or executes an instruction CLEAR On a line with text on the home screen clears the current line On a blank line on the home screen clears everything on the home screen In an editor clears the expression or value where the cursor is located it does not store a zero Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Ed
344. onal menu 62 TEST LOGIC Boolean menu 63 Text instruction 129 142 376 placing on a graph 129 142 Then 282 362 thick graph style 71 TI Connect 346 TI 84 Plus key code diagram 292 keyboard 1 Time axes format 107 376 time value of money TVM C Y variable number of compounding periods per year 263 calculating 255 formulas 387 FV variable future value 263 I variable annual interest rate 263 N variable number of payment periods 263 P Y variable number of payment periods per year 263 PMT variable payment amount 263 PV variable present value 263 TVM Solver 253 tvm_FV future value 257 376 tvm_l interest rate 376 tvm_I interest rate 256 tvm_N payment periods 256 376 tvm_Pmt payment amount 256 376 tvm_PV present value 256 376 variables 262 timeCnv convert time 376 TInterval one sample confidence interval 376 TInterval one sample confidence interval 229 tpdf student z distribution probability density function 243 376 TRACE cursor 79 entering numbers during 79 96 100 108 expression display 76 79 Trace instruction in a program 80 376 transmitting error conditions 352 from a TI 83 351 from a TI 83 Plus Silver Edition or TI 83 Plus 351 from a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition or TI 84 Plus 351 stopping 348 to a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition or TI 84 Plus 348 transpose matrix 155 379 trigonometric functions 36 T Test one sample test 224 376 413 turn clock off ClockOff
345. oot 36 381 O pixel mark 132 210 di plot type histogram 209 minutes notation 60 382 parentheses 29 plot type normal probability 210 ZInt sum of interest 363 Prn sum of principal 368 multiplication 36 381 LE plot type modified box 209 f x dx operation on a graph 90 row 160 371 row 371 addition 36 381 concatenation 270 381 pixel mark 132 210 LIF plot type box 209 division 36 381 1 inverse 380 colon 278 lt less than 62 380 equal to relational test 62 380 gt greater than 62 380 matrix indicator 148 power 36 380 381 lt less than or equal to 380 gt greater than or equal to 62 380 2 square 36 380 3 cube 39 380 EV cube root 39 380 string indicator 267 Dec to decimal conversion 39 357 gt DMS to degrees minutes seconds 61 358 gt Eff to effective interest rate 261 Frac to fraction 39 360 Nom to nominal interest rate 261 366 Polar to polar 56 368 Rect to rectangular 56 371 y2pdf chi square pdf 244 y2 Test chi square test 233 234 245 ATbl table step variable 116 AX window variable 74 AY window variable 74 Fcdf 245 Fpdf 245 1 inverse 37 list indicator 163 Numerics 104 power of ten 381 1 PropZInt one proportion z confidence interval 232 369 1 PropZTest one proportion z te
346. opZint _ Test 7 GOF Test LinRegTInt and LinRegTTest do not e Select Data to enter the data lists as input e Select Stats to enter summary statistics such as x Sx and n as input To select Data or Stats move the cursor to either Data or Stats and then press ENTER Entering the Values for Arguments Inferential stat editors require a value for every argument If you do not know what a particular argument symbol represents see the Inferential Statistics Input Descriptions tables When you enter values in any inferential stat editor the Tl 84 Plus stores them in memory so that you can run many tests or intervals without having to reenter every value Selecting an Alternative Hypothesis lt gt Most of the inferential stat editors for the hypothesis tests prompt you to select one of three alternative hypotheses e The first is a alternative hypothesis such as u u0 for the Z Test e The second is a lt alternative hypothesis such as u1 lt wu2 for the 2 SampTTest Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 219 e The third is a gt alternative hypothesis such as p1 gt p2 for the 2 PropZTest To select an alternative hypothesis move the cursor to the appropriate alternative and then press ENTER Selecting the Pooled Option Pooled 2 SampTTest and 2 SampTInt only specifies whether the variances are to be pooled for the calculation e Select No if you do not want the variances pooled Popu
347. orthe aAr s66 56C equation 2x 6x 5 0 z p Je aAc c2A 1 5 5i 6 Press 4 to highlight the quadratic z formula expression and then press e4Je aarc cor to paste it to the entry line l a Di 7 Press 4 until the cursor is on the sign p e sAc Jc ar in the formula Press to edit the E Di quadratic formula expression to become e Je aac l ceny 8 Press to find the other solution for the quadratic equation 2x 6x 5 0 Box with Lid Defining a Function Take a 20 cm x 25 cm sheet of paper and cut X x X squares from two corners Cut X x 1272 cm rectangles from the other two corners as shown in the diagram below Fold the paper into a box with a lid What value of X would give your box the maximum volume V Use the table and graphs to determine the solution Chapter 17 Activities 299 Begin by defining a function that describes the volume of the box From the diagram 2X A 20 2X 2B 25 V A B X Substituting V 20 2X 25 2 X X 1 Press Y to display the Y editor which is where you define functions for tables and graphing 2 Press LJ 20 2 25 Foti ADA Fietz Fi 1 2 DJE XT 2 n D X 7 n ENTER to sy EC20 2K 4 E i define the volume function as Y1 in terms of X lets you enter X quickly without having to press ALPHA The highlighted sign indicates that Y1 is selected Defining a Table of Values The table feature of the Tl 84 Plus displ
348. ory Backup Complete When the backup is complete both the sending graphing calculator and receiving graphing calculator display a confirmation screen MENOR BACKUP Done Error Conditions A transmission error occurs after one or two seconds if A cable is not attached to the sending unit A cable is not attached to the receiving unit Note If the cable is attached push it in firmly and try again The receiving unit is not set to receive transmission You attempt a backup between a TI 73 TI 82 Tl 83 TI 83 Plus or Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition You attempt a data transfer from a TI 84 Plus to a TI 83 Plus Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition TI 83 TI 82 or Tl 73 with variables or features not recognized by the TI 83 Plus Tl 83 Plus Silver Edition Tl 83 Tl 82 or TI 73 New variable types and features not recognized by the TI 83 Tl 83 Plus Tl 82 or TI 73 include applications application variables grouped variables new variable types or programs with new features in them such as Archive UnArchive SendID SendOS Asm AsmComp AsmPrgm checkTmr ClockOff ClockOn dayOfWk getDate getDtFmt getDtStr getTime getTmFmt getTmStr isClockOn randintNoRep setDate setDtFmt setTime setTmFmt startTmr summation timeCnv and fractions You attempt a data transfer from a T 84 Plus to a TI 82 with data other than real lists L1 through L6 or without using menu item 5 Lists to T182 You attempt a data transfer from a TI 84
349. oth variables and applications To reset all or part of user data archive memory follow these steps 1 From the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu press gt to display the ARCHIVE menu RAM EAN ALL Wars HEF S Both 2 Select one of the following 1 Vars to display the RESET ARC VARS menu fin Feset Resetting Wars erases all data and Programs from Archive 2 Apps to display the RESET ARC APPS menu fin Feset fram Archive 3 Read the message below the menu e To cancel the reset and return to the HOME screen press ENTER e To continue with the reset select 2 Reset A message indicating the type of archive memory cleared will be displayed on the HOME screen Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 335 Resetting All Memory When resetting all memory on the Tl 84 Plus RAM and user data archive memory is restored to factory settings All nonsystem variables applications and programs are deleted All system variables are reset to default settings Before you reset all memory consider restoring sufficient available memory by deleting only selected data To reset all memory on the TI 84 Plus follow these steps 1 From the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu press gt gt to display the ALL menu ie ARCHIVE EEE MBAL Memory 2 Select 1 All Memory to display the RESET MEMORY menu 5 IG Resetting ALL Will delete all data Programs amp HEres from RAM amp Archive
350. ow 2nd MATRIX MATH D row 2nd MATRIX MATH F row 2nd MATRIX MATH C rowSwap 371 Function or Instruction Arguments rref matrix R gt Pr x y R gt PO x y 2 SampF Test istname1 listname freqlistl freqlist2 alternative drawflag Data list input 2 SampF Test Sx n Sx2 n2 alternative drawflag Summary stats input 2 SampTint istname listname2 freglistl freqlist2 confidence level pooled Data list input 2 SampTint X Sx n X2 Sx2 n2 confidence level pooled Summary stats input 2 SampT Test istname listname freqlistl freqlist2 alternative pooled drawflag Data list input 2 SampT Test X Sx J n v2 Sx2 n2 alternative pooled drawflag Summary stats input 2 SampZInt o4 02 istnamel listname2 freqglistl freqlist2 confidence level Data list input 2 SampZInt o4 09 X1 n1 X2 n2 confidence level Summary stats input Result Returns the reduced row echelon form of a matrix Returns R given rectangular coordinates x and y or a list of rectangular coordinates Returns 9 given rectangular coordinates x and y or a list of rectangular coordinates Performs a two sample F test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Performs a two sample F test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is g
351. phing calculator 1 Firmly insert either end of the USB unit to unit cable into the USB port 2 Insert the other end of the cable into the other graphing calculator s USB port I O Unit to Unit Cable The TI 84 Plus I O link port is located at the d ae top left edge of the graphing calculator eee ae 1 Firmly insert either end of the I O i sss SEQ unit to unit cable into the port S6500 S85800 OOGO Ogg S0005 S805 2 Insert the other end of the cable into the zsz 22 DOODT other graphing calculator s I O port Ce eae TI 84 Plus to a TI 83 Plus using I O Unit to Unit Cable The TI 84 Plus I O link port is located at the top left edge of the graphing calculator The TI 83 Plus I O link port is located at the bottom edge of the graphing calculator 1 Firmly insert either end of the I O unit to unit cable into the port 2 Insert the other end of the cable into the other graphing calculator s I O port Linking to the CBL CBR System The CBL 2 system and the CBR system are optional accessories that also connect to a TI 84 Plus with the I O unit to unit cable With a CBL 2 system or CBR system and a TI 84 Plus you can collect and analyze real world data Linking to a Computer With TI Connect software and the USB computer cable that is included with your TI 84 Plus you can link the graphing calculator to a personal computer Chapter 19 Communicatio
352. play SELECT the TRANSMIT menu Transat 14 On the sending unit press 1 to select 1 Transmit and begin transmission The receiving unit displays the message Done Receiving When the items are transmitted both units display the name and type of each transmitted variable TI 84 Plus LINK This chapter describes how to communicate with compatible TI units The TI 84 Plus has a USB port to connect and communicate with another Tl 84 series calculator A USB unit to unit cable is included with the Tl 84 Plus The Tl 84 Plus also has an I O port using a I O unit to unit cable to communicate with e TI 83 Plus Silver Edition e TIl 82 e TI 83 Plus TI 73 TI 83 e CBL2 ora CBR You can send items from a calculator with an older OS to a calculator with OS 2 53MP and higher However you may receive a version error if you send items from a calculator with OS 2 53MP or higher to a calculator with an older OS Transferring files between calculators works best if both calculators have the latest operating system software installed For example if you send a list that contains fractions OS 2 53MP and higher to a calculator with OS 2 43 a version error displays because OS 2 43 does not support fractions Chapter 19 Communication Link 345 Connecting Two Graphing Calculators with a USB Unit to Unit Cable or an I O Unit to Unit Cable USB Unit to Unit Cable The Tl 84 Plus USB link port is located at the top right edge of the gra
353. play Contrast You can adjust the display contrast to suit your viewing angle and lighting conditions As you change the contrast setting a number from O0 lightest to 9 darkest in the top right corner indicates the current level You may not be able to see the number if contrast is too light or too dark Note The TI 84 Plus has 40 contrast settings so each number O through 9 represents four settings The TI 84 Plus retains the contrast setting in memory when it is turned off To adjust the contrast follow these steps gt Press a to darken the screen one level at a time gt Press to lighten the screen one level at a time Note If you adjust the contrast setting to 0 the display may become completely blank To restore the screen press a until the display reappears When to Replace Batteries When the batteries are low a low battery message is displayed when you turn on the graphing calculator To replace the batteries without losing any information in memory follow the steps in Appendix C Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 4 Generally the graphing calculator will continue to operate for one or two weeks after the low battery message is first displayed After this period the Tl 84 Plus will turn off automatically and the unit will not operate Batteries must be replaced All memory should be retained Note e The operating period following the first low battery message could be longer than t
354. plit screen mode Sets horizontal split screen mode Draws a horizontal line at y Returns a complex number Returns the identity matrix of dimension rows x dimension columns If condition O false skips commandaA Executes commands from Then to End if condition 1 true Executes commands from Then to Else if condition 1 true from Else to End if condition 0 false Returns the imaginary nonreal part of a complex number or list of complex numbers Sets table to ask for independent variable values Sets table to generate independent variable values automatically Displays graph Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item t CTL H GraphStyle t FORMAT GridOff t FORMAT GridOn t G T T MODE Horiz 2nd DRAW DRAW 3 Horizontal 2nd li 2nd MATRIX MATH 5 identity t CTL 1 If t CTL 2 Then ii CTL 3 Else CPX 3 imag t TBLSET Indpnt Ask t TBLSET Indpnt Auto t I O 1 Input Appendix A Functions and Instructions 362 Function or Instruction Arguments Input variable Input text variable Input Strz variable inString string substring start int value LInt pmt1 pmt2 roundvalue invNorm area U 0 invT area df iPart value irr CF0 CFList CFFreq isClockOn 1S gt variable value commandA lt commands Llistname LabelOff LabelOn Lbl abel Result Prompts for value to store t
355. portflagz 0 use USB port if connected portflag 1 use USB port portflag 2 use O port Note GetCalc does not work between TI 82 and TI 83 Plus or a Tl 82 and TI 84 Plus calculators Get Send Get gets data from the CBL 2 or CBR and stores it to variable on the receiving Tl 84 Plus variable can be a real number list element list name matrix element matrix name string Y variable graph database or picture Get variable Note If you transfer a program that references the Get command to the TI 84 Plus from a Tl 82 the Tl 84 Plus will interpret it as the Get described above Use GetCalc to get data from another TI 84 Plus Send sends the contents of variable to the CBL 2 or CBR You cannot use it to send to another TI 84 Plus variable can be a real number list element list name matrix element matrix name string Y variable graph database or picture variable can be a list of elements Send variable PROGRAM GET SOUND Note This program gets sound data and time in Sendi 132 HHI seconds from CBL 2 l 6 B H 6 133 setili sGetcLe2 Note You can access Get Send and GetCalc from the CATALOG to execute them from the home screen Chapter 15 Calling Other Programs as Subroutines Calling a Program from Another Program On the TI 84 Plus any stored program can be called from another program as a subroutine Enter the name of the program to use as a subroutine on a line by itself
356. program that is called as a subroutine Within the main program Return stops execution and returns to the home screen Stop Stop stops execution of a program and returns to the home screen Stop is optional at the end of a program DelVar DelVar deletes from memory the contents of variable DelVar variable PROGFAMN DELMATR Delar A F Chapter 16 Programming 287 GraphStyle GraphStyle designates the style of the graph to be drawn function is the number of the Y function name in the current graphing mode graphstyle is a number from 1 to 7 that corresponds to the graph style as shown below 1 line 5 i path 2 thick 6 f animate 4 shade above 7 dot GraphStyle function graphstyle For example GraphStyle 1 5 in Func mode sets the graph style for Y1 to i path 5 Not all graph styles are available in all graphing modes For a detailed description of each graph style see the Graph Styles table in Chapter 3 PRGM 1 O Input Output Instructions PRGM I O Menu To display the PRGM I O program input output menu press gt from within the program editor only CEL IZO EXEC LE input Enters a value or uses the cursor 2 Prompt Prompts for entry of variable values 32 DISP Displays text value or the home screen 4 DispGraph Displays the current graph 5 DispTable Displays the current table 62 Output Displays text at a specified position 7 getKey Checks the
357. quation from Y1 Press 4 to turn on plot 1 Press gt to turn off plot 2 Press 9 to select 9 ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu The window variables are adjusted automatically and the original scatter plot of time versus length data plot 1 is displayed Press gt A to select A PwrReg from the STAT CALC menu PwrReg is pasted to the home screen Press 2nd L1 nd L2 J F4 z to highlight Calculate Note You can also use the VARS Y VARS FUNCTION menu gt 1 to select Y1 Press to calculate the power regression Values for a and b are displayed on the home screen The power regression equation is stored in Y1 Residuals are calculated and stored automatically in the list name RESID 1 2 Press GRAPH The regression line and the scatter plot are displayed Chapter 12 Statistics 182 522 The new function y 192x 44 appears to fit the data well To get more information examine a residual plot 28 Press Y to display the Y editor Flot ELE Plots Press 4 to deselect Y1 SY 19220206215 Press 4 to turn off plot 1 Press gt to turn on plot 2 Note Step 19 defined plot 2 to plot residuals RESID versus string length L1 29 Press 9 to select 9 ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu The window variables are adjusted automatically and plot 2 is displayed This is a scatter plot of the residuals The new residual plot shows that the residuals are random in sign with the resi
358. quence function 103 Web axes format 107 377 web plots 109 While 283 377 window variables function graphing 73 parametric graphing 95 polar graphing 99 X Xf root 379 XFact zoom factor 86 x intercept of a root 88 xor Boolean exclusive or operator 63 377 xth root 40 xyLine plot type 208 Y Y editor function graphing 68 parametric graphing 93 polar graphing 98 sequence graphing 103 YFact zoom factor 86 Y VARS menu Function 28 On Off 28 Parametric 28 Polar 28 Z ZBox 81 377 ZDecimal 82 377 zero operation on a graph 88 Zinteger 83 378 ZiInterval one sample z confidence interval 229 378 zoom 80 81 82 83 85 86 cursor 81 factors 86 function graphing 80 parametric graphing 96 polar graphing 101 sequence graphing 108 Zoom In zoom in 82 378 ZOOM MEMORY menu 85 ZOOM menu 80 Zoom Out zoom out 82 378 ZoomFit zoom to fit function 83 378 414 ZoomRcl recall stored window 86 378 ZSquare set square pixels 82 379 ZoomStat statistics Zoom 83 378 ZStandard use standard window 83 379 ZoomsSto store zoom window 85 378 Z Test one sample z test 223 379 ZPrevious use previous window 379 ZTrig trigonometric window 83 379 415
359. quired you can use an expression to enter a value f1i 33 WI THD aMiln 1e 21111111111 ay eon i g Chapter 1 Operating the TIl 84 Plus Silver Edition 11 Entering an Expression To create an expression you enter numbers variables and functions using the keyboard and menus An expression is completed when you press ENTER regardless of the cursor location The entire expression is evaluated according to Equation Operating System EOQS rules and the answer is displayed according to the mode setting for Answer Most Tl 84 Plus functions and operations are symbols comprising several characters You must enter the symbol from the keyboard or a menu do not spell it out For example to calculate the log of 45 you must press 45 Do not enter the letters L O and G If you enter LOG the TI 84 Plus interprets the entry as implied multiplication of the variables L O and G Calculate 3 76 7 9 y5 2 log 45 3 CJ 76 JG 7 LJ 9 vert F7 g4j5 0 Bereet r od Coos Vv 5 2 45 2642575252 VASAS t eae ENTER 7 MathPrint Classic Multiple Entries on a Line To enter two or more expressions or instructions on a line separate them with colons ALPHA All instructions are stored together in last entry ENTRY ISH 246 AB Za Entering a Number in Scientific Notation 1 Enter the part of the number that precedes the exponent This value can be an expression Press EE E is pasted to the cursor loca
360. r 4 if necessary to move the cursor to the first function and then press ENTER Second curve Is displayed in the bottom left corner Press or 4 if necessary to move the cursor to the second function and then press ENTER Press gt or 4 to move the cursor to the point that is your guess as to location of the intersection and then press ENTER The cursor is on the solution and the coordinates are displayed even if CoordOff format is selected Intersection is displayed in the bottom left corner To restore the free moving cursor press 4 4 DJ or dy dx dy dx numerical derivative finds the numerical derivative slope of a function at a point with 1E 3 To find a function s slope at a point follow these steps Select 6 dy dx from the CALCULATE menu The current graph is displayed Press 4 or to select the function for which you want to find the numerical derivative Press 4 or gt or enter a value to select the X value at which to calculate the derivative and then press ENTER The cursor is on the solution and the numerical derivative is displayed To move to the same x value for other selected functions press 4 or To restore the free moving cursor press 4 or gt Chapter 3 Function Graphing 89 f x dx f x dx numerical integral finds the numerical integral of a function in a specified interval It uses the fnint function with a tolerance of 1E
361. r Graphing 97 Defining and Displaying Polar Graphs TI 84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities The steps for defining a polar graph are similar to the steps for defining a function graph Chapter 5 assumes that you are familiar with Chapter 3 Function Graphing Chapter 5 details aspects of polar graphing that differ from function graphing Setting Polar Graphing Mode To display the mode screen press MODE To graph polar equations you must select Pol graphing mode before you enter values for the window variables and before you enter polar equations Displaying the Polar Y Editor After selecting Pol graphing mode press Y to display the polar Y editor Floti Fioke Floks Pi c In this editor you can enter and display up to six polar equations r4 through r6 Each is defined in terms of the independent variable 9 Selecting Graph Styles The icons to the left of r1 through r6 represent the graph style of each polar equation The default in Pol graphing mode is line which connects plotted points Line thick path animate and dot styles are available for polar graphing Defining and Editing Polar Equations To define or edit a polar equation follow the steps in Chapter 3 for defining a function or editing a function The independent variable in a polar equation is In Pol graphing mode you can enter the polar variable 0 in either of two ways e Press X T 0 n e Press ALPHA 0 S
362. r from the MATH menu to display the equation editor EQUATION SOLVER earn H 2 Enter the expression in any of three ways e Enter the expression directly into the equation solver e Paste a Y variable name from the YVARS shortcut menu ALPHA F4 to the equation solver e Press RCL paste a Y variable name from the YVARS shortcut menu and press ENTER The expression is pasted to the equation solver The expression is stored to the variable eqn as you enter it EMUAT ION SOLVER SHER S tPe 1Les 3 Press or The interactive solver editor is displayed Gs Pe 125 n Q6 P bournd Leo 1 e The equation stored in eqn is set equal to zero and displayed on the top line e Variables in the equation are listed in the order in which they appear in the equation Any values stored to the listed variables also are displayed Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 42 e The default lower and upper bounds appear in the last line of the editor bound 1E99 1E99 e A J is displayed in the first column of the bottom line if the editor continues beyond the screen Note To use the solver to solve an equation such as K 5MV enter eqn 0 K 5MV in the equation editor Entering and Editing Variable Values When you enter or edit a value for a variable in the interactive solver editor the new value is stored in memory to that variable You can enter an expression for a variable value It is evaluated w
363. r than gt 62 380 greater than or equal to 62 380 greatest common divisor gcd 48 greatest common divisor gcd 360 greatest integer int 47 154 greatest integer int 363 GridOff 75 362 GridOn 75 362 grouping 336 G T graph table split screen mode 17 140 362 H Histogram plot type dim 209 home screen 5 scrolling 5 22 Horiz horizontal split screen mode 17 139 362 Horizontal draw line 125 362 hyperbolic functions 273 hypothesis tests 223 i complex number constant 52 I annual interest rate variable 253 263 identity 156 362 If instructions If 282 362 If Then 282 362 If Then Else 282 362 imag imaginary part 55 362 imaginary part imag 55 imaginary part imag 362 implied multiplication 29 increment and skip IS gt 286 increment and skip IS gt 363 independent variable 116 118 362 IndpntAsk 116 118 362 IndpntAuto 116 118 362 inferential stat editors 218 inferential statistics alternative hypotheses 219 bypassing editors 220 calculating test results Calculate 220 confidence interval calculations 220 data input or stats input 219 entering argument values 219 graphing test results Draw 220 input descriptions table 239 pooled option 220 STAT TESTS menu 221 test and interval output variables 240 inferential statistics See stat tests 36 Input 289 362 insert cursor 8 Installing New Faceplates 9 Installing new faceplates 9 inString in string 271 363 inst
364. r the 2 distribution specified 2nd DISTR by degrees of freedom df and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound Draws the density function for the F distribution specified by numerator df and denominator df and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound Draws the normal density function specified by u and o and shades the area between owerbound and upperbound Draws the density function for the Student t distribution specified by degrees of freedom df and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound Sets mode to graph functions simultaneously Returns the sine of a real number expression or list Returns the arcsine of a real number expression or list Returns the hyperbolic sine of a real number expression or list Returns the hyperbolic arcsine of a real number expression or list Attempts iterations times to fit a sinusoidal regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname using a period guess and stores the regression equation to regequ Solves expression for variable given an initial guess and lower and upper bounds within which the solution is sought Sorts elements of istname in ascending order Sorts elements of keylistname in ascending order then sorts each dependlist as a dependent list Sorts elements of istname in descending order Sorts elements of keylistname in descending order then sorts each dependlist as a dependent list Starts the clock timer Store or not
365. ransfer any file to the disabled calculator or use TI Connect software to download a file from your computer to your TI 84 Plus To transfer a file from another TI 84 Plus 1 On the receiving unit press LINK and then select RECEIVE 2 On the sending calculator Press LINK 3 Selecta file to send by selecting a category and then selecting a file to send 4 Select TRANSMIT to send the file SELECT ee IHT ransmi Contrast Feature If the contrast setting is too dark set to 9 or too dim set to 0 the unit may appear as if it is malfunctioning or turned off To adjust the contrast press and release 2nd and then press and hold 4 or Appendix B Reference Information 392 TI 84 Plus Identification Code Your graphing calculator has a unique identification ID code that you should record and keep You can use this 14 digit ID to register your calculator at education ti com or identify your calculator in the event that it is lost or stolen A valid ID includes numbers 0 through 9 and the letters A through F You can view the calculator s Operating System Product Number ID and Certificate Revision Number from the About screen To display the About screen press MEM and then select 1 About TI B4 Flus Silver Edition FROD 0 2 02 37 Helk education Ei com Your unique product ID code Backups Your TI 84 Plus is similar to a computer in that it stores files and Apps that are import
366. raph database Storing a Graph Picture You can store up to 10 graph pictures each of which is an image of the current graph display in picture variables Pic1 through Pic9 or Pic0 Later you can superimpose the stored picture onto a displayed graph from the home screen or a program A picture includes drawn elements plotted functions axes and tick marks The picture does not include axes labels lower and upper bound indicators prompts or cursor coordinates Any parts of the display hidden by these items are stored with the picture To store a graph picture follow these steps 1 Select 1 StorePic from the DRAW STO menu StorePic is pasted to the current cursor location 2 Enter the number from 1 to 9 or 0 of the picture variable to which you want to store the picture For example if you enter 3 the Tl 84 Plus will store the picture to Pic3 ii 3 Note You also can select a variable from the PICTURE secondary menu VARS 4 The variable is pasted next to StorePic 3 Press to display the current graph and store the picture Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 134 Recalling Graph Pictures Pic Recalling a Graph Picture To recall a graph picture follow these steps 1 Select 2 RecallPic from the DRAW STO menu RecallPic is pasted to the current cursor location 2 Enter the number from 1 to 9 or 0 of the picture variable from which you want to recall a picture For example if you enter 3 the Tl 84 Plus will r
367. rd window variables define the viewing window as shown Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax define the boundaries of the display Xscl and Yscl define the distance between tick marks on the X and Y axes Xres controls resolution Press 0 to define Xmin AM n e Press 20 2 to define Xmax using an amax 26 2 expression omer Note For this example the division sign Ve is used for the calculation However you Lates 1 can use n d entry format where fraction output can be experienced depending on mode settings Chapter 17 Activities 302 4 Press ENTER The expression is evaluated and 10 is stored in Xmax Press to accept Xscl as 1 5 Press 0 500 100 1 to define the remaining window variables Displaying and Tracing the Graph Yscl 16h5 Lares 1 Now that you have defined the function to be graphed and the window in which to graph it you can display and explore the graph You can trace along a function using the TRACE feature 1 Press to graph the selected function in the viewing window The graph of Y1 20 2X 25 2 X xX is displayed 2 Press gt to activate the free moving graph cursor The X and Y coordinate values for the position of the graph cursor are displayed on the bottom line 3 Press gt 4 and to move the free moving cursor to the apparent maximum of the function As you move the cursor the X and Y coordinate values are updated continually 4 Press TRACE The
368. reen For example abs pastes the absolute value template on the home screen instead of abs MathPrint Classic Entering and Using Strings What Is a String A string is a sequence of characters that you enclose within quotation marks On the TI 84 Plus a string has two primary applications e It defines text to be displayed in a program e It accepts input from the keyboard in a program Characters are the units that you combine to form a string e Each number letter and space counts as one character e Each instruction or function name such as sin or cos counts as one character the T1 84 Plus interprets each instruction or function name as one character Entering a String To enter a string on a blank line on the home screen or in a program follow these steps Press to indicate the beginning of the string 2 Enter the characters that comprise the string e Use any combination of numbers letters function names or instruction names to create the string e To enter a blank space press Pe e To enter several alpha characters in a row press A LOCK to activate alpha lock 3 Press to indicate the end of the string string 4 Press ENTER On the home screen the string is displayed on the next line without quotations An ellipsis indicates that the string continues beyond the screen To scroll to see the entire string press gt and 4 Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions
369. reen The items in this table appear in the same order as they appear in the CATALOG T indicates either keystrokes that are valid in the program editor only or ones that paste certain instructions when you are in the program editor Some keystrokes display menus that are available only in the program editor Others paste mode format or table set instructions only when you are in the program editor Function or Key or Instruction Arguments Result Keys Menu or Screen Item abs value Returns the absolute value of a real number expression list or matrix NUM 1 abs abs complex value Returns the magnitude of a complex number or list CPX 5 abs valueA and valueB Returns 1 if both valueA and valueB are 0 valueA and 2nd TEST valueB can be real numbers expressions or lists LOGIC 1 and angle value Returns the polar angle of a complex number or list of complex numbers CPX 4 angle ANOVA Jist list2 Performs a one way analysis of variance for comparing the STAT Jist3 list20 means of two to 20 populations TESTS H ANOVA Ans Returns the last answer 2nd ANS Archive Moves the specified variables from RAM to the user data 2nd MEM archive memory 5 Archive Asm assemblyprgmname Executes an assembly language program CATALOG Asm AsmComp premASM1 Compiles an assembly language program written in ASCII 2nd CATALOG prgmASM2 and stores the hex version AsmComp AsmPrgm Must be used as the first line of an assembly la
370. remental n value for graphing only PlotStep does not affect sequence evaluation it only designates which points are plotted on the graph If you specify PlotStep 2 the sequence is evaluated at each consecutive integer but it is plotted on the graph only at every other integer Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 106 Selecting Axes Combinations Setting the Graph Format To display the current graph format settings press FORMAT Chapter 3 describes the format settings in detail The other graphing modes share these format settings The axes setting on the top line of the screen is available only in Seq mode Time Web uv Vw uw Type of sequence plot axes RectGC Polar GC Rectangular or polar output CoordOn COOrdOre Cursor coordinate display on off GridoOff GridOn Grid display off or on AxesOn AxesOff Axes display on or off Lableoff LabelOn Axes label display off or on ExprOn Exproft Expression display on or off Setting Axes Format For sequence graphing you can select from five axes formats The table below shows the values that are plotted on the x axis and y axis for each axes setting Axes Setting X axis y axis Time n u n v n w n Web u n 1 v n 1 w n 1 u n v n w n uv u n v n VW v n w n uw u n w n Displaying a Sequence Graph To plot the selected sequence functions press GRAPH As a graph is plotted the TI 84 Plus updates X Y and n Smart Graph applies to sequence graphs Chapter 3 Exploring Sequen
371. riable may or may not be archived If not you can unarchive some variables and try again Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary The user data archive is divided into sectors When you first begin archiving variables are stored consecutively in sector 1 This continues to the end of the sector An archived variable is stored in a continuous block within a single sector Unlike an application stored in user data archive an archived variable cannot cross a sector boundary If there is not enough space left in the sector the next variable is stored at the beginning of the next sector Typically this leaves an empty block at the end of the previous sector Sector 1 Empty block ee ae variable D Depending on its size variable D is stored in one of these locations Sector 2 Sector 3 Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 340 Each variable that you archive is stored in the first empty block large enough to hold tt This process continues to the end of the last sector Depending on the size of individual variables the empty blocks may account for a significant amount of space Garbage collection occurs when the variable you are archiving is larger than any empty block How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process When you unarchive a variable it is copied to RAM but it is not actually deleted from user data archive memory Unarchived variables are marked for deletion meaning they will be deleted during the
372. rix editor displays up to seven rows and three columns of a matrix showing the values of the elements in abbreviated form if necessary The full value of the current element which is indicated by the rectangular cursor is displayed on the bottom line MATRIACA amp x4 iz Lee ee 0 bes T 0 2141592655 This is an 8 x 4 matrix Ellipses in the left or right column indicate additional columns or 4 in the right column indicate additional rows Deleting a Matrix To delete matrices from memory use the MEMORY MANAGEMENTI DELETE secondary menu Chapter 18 Viewing a Matrix The matrix editor has two contexts viewing and editing In viewing context you can use the cursor keys to move quickly from one matrix element to the next The full value of the highlighted element is displayed on the edit line Chapter 10 Matrices 146 Select the matrix from the MATRX EDIT menu and then enter or accept the dimensions MATRIACA amp x4 2141597635 Using Viewing Context Keys Key Ld or z or 4 ENTER CLEAR Any entry character 2nd INS DEL Function Moves the cursor within the current row Moves the cursor within the current column on the top row 4 moves the cursor to the column dimension on the column dimension moves the cursor to the row dimension Switches to editing context activates the edit cursor on the bottom line Switches to editing context clears the value on the botto
373. rmation 402 If the graphing calculator does not seem to work at all be sure the alkaline batteries are fresh and that they are installed properly If the Tl 84 Plus does not function even though you are sure that the batteries are fresh you can try manually resetting it e Remove all of the AAA batteries from the graphing calculator e Press and hold the key for ten seconds e Replace the batteries e Turn on the unit When you reset your graphing calculator the contrast sometimes changes If the screen is faded or blank adjust the contrast by pressing and releasing 4 or If the above solutions do not work you can reset all of the memory The RAM user data archive memory and system variables are restored to factory settings when you reset all memory All nonsystem variables applications Apps and programs are deleted e Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu e Select 7 Reset to display the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu e Press gt gt to display the ALL menu e Select 1 All Memory to display the RESET MEMORY menu e To continue with the reset select 2 Reset The message Mem cleared is displayed on the home screen Appendix C Service and Warranty Information 403 index Symbols gt dim assign dimension 169 degrees notation 379 negation 30 37 381 subtraction 36 381 factorial 379 gt Store 20 375 gt dim assign dimension 155 358 not equal to 380 square r
374. rough Previous Entries on the Home Screen You can scroll up through previous entries and answers on the home screen even if you have cleared the screen When you find an entry or answer that you want to use you can select it and paste it on the current entry line Note List and matrix answers cannot be copied and pasted to the new entry line However you can copy the list or matrix command to the new entry line and execute the command again to display the answer gt Press 4 or to move the cursor to the entry or answer you want to copy and then press ENTER The entry or answer that you copied is automatically pasted on the current input line at the cursor location Note If the cursor is in a MathPrint expression press a to move the cursor out of the expression and then move the cursor to the entry or answer you want to copy gt Press or to delete an entry answer pair After an entry answer pair has been deleted it cannot be displayed or recalled again ENTRY Last Entry Storage Area Using ENTRY Last Entry When you press on the home screen to evaluate an expression or execute an instruction the expression or instruction is placed in a storage area called ENTRY last entry When you turn off the TI 84 Plus ENTRY is retained in memory To recall ENTRY press ENTRY The last entry is pasted to the current cursor location where you can edit and execute it On the home screen or in an editor the current line
375. row det det determinant returns the determinant a real number of a Square matrix det matrix Transpose i transpose returns a matrix in which each element row column is swapped with the corresponding element column row of matrix mana A A T 1 3 2 ai z i Accessing Matrix Dimensions with dim dim dimension returns a list containing the dimensions rows columns Of matrix dim matrix Chapter 10 Matrices 155 Note dim matrix gt Ln Ln 1 returns the number of rows dim matrix gt Ln Ln 2 returns the number of columns Creating a Matrix with dim Use dim with to create a new matrixname of dimensions rows X columns with O as each element rows columns gt dim matrixname 22 2e4dinm E L2 2t E la al Redimensioning a Matrix with dim Use dim with to redimension an existing matrixname to dimensions rows X columns The elements in the old matrixname that are within the new dimensions are not changed Additional created elements are zeros Matrix elements that are outside the new dimensions are deleted rows columns gt dim matrixname Fill Fill stores value to every element in matrixname Fill value matrixname identity identity returns the identity matrix of dimension rows X dimension columns identity dimension Chapter 10 Matrices 156 randM randM create random matrix returns a rows X columns random matrix of integers gt 9 and lt 9
376. rpreted as implied multiplication A B Special Features of the TI 84 Plus Flash Electronic Upgradability The Tl 84 Plus uses Flash technology which lets you upgrade to future software versions without buying a new graphing calculator As new functionality becomes available you can electronically upgrade your T 84 Plus from the Internet Future software versions include maintenance upgrades that will be released free of charge as well as new applications and major software upgrades that will be available for purchase from the TI Web site education ti com For details refer to Chapter 19 1 5 Megabytes of Available Memory 1 5 MB of available memory are built into the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition and 0 5 MB for the TI 84 Plus About 24 kilobytes K of RAM random access memory are available for you to compute and store functions programs and data About 1 5 M of user data archive allow you to store data programs applications or any other variables to a safe location where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently You can also free up RAM by archiving variables to user data For details refer to Chapter 18 Applications Many applications are preloaded on your Tl 84 Plus and others can be installed to customize the TI 84 Plus to your needs The 1 5 MB archive space lets you store up to 94 applications at one time on the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition Applications can also be stored on a computer for later use or linked uni
377. rsor on the TVM variable for which you want to solve Press SOLVE The answer is computed displayed in the TVM Solver and stored to the appropriate TVM variable An indicator square in the left column designates the solution variable Using the Financial Functions Entering Cash Inflows and Cash Outflows When using the Tl 84 Plus financial functions you must enter cash inflows cash received as positive numbers and cash outflows cash paid as negative numbers The TI 84 Plus follows this convention when computing and displaying answers FINANCE CALC Menu To display the FINANCE CALC menu press ENTER CALC VARS 1 TVM Solver Displays the TVM Solver 2 tvm Pmt Computes the amount of each payment 3 tvm_ I Computes the interest rate per year 4 tvm PV Computes the present value 5 tvm N Computes the number of payment periods 6 tvm_FV Computes the future value Tan UPV Computes the net present value Chapter 14 Applications 254 CALC VARS Oe er Computes the internal rate of return 9 bal Computes the amortization sched balance 0s 2Prin Computes the amort sched princ sum A ZiInt Computes the amort sched interest sum B bNom Computes the nominal interest rate Cs PEELE Computes the effective interest rate D dbd Calculates the days between two dates Ee Pinte End Selects ordinary annuity end of period Fe Pmt Bon Selects annuity due beginning of period Use these functions t
378. ruction definition of 13 int greatest integer 47 154 363 integer part iPart 47 154 integer part iPart 363 integral See numerical integral 36 interest rate conversions Eff Compute effective interest rate 261 gt Nom compute nominal interest rate 261 calculating 261 formula 390 internal rate of return irr 258 internal rate of return irr 363 intersect operation on a graph 89 inverse 1 37 380 inverse cumulative normal distribution invNorm 243 inverse cumulative normal distribution invNorm 363 inverse trig functions 36 invNorm inverse cumulative normal distribution 243 363 invT inverse Student T distribution 243 iPart integer part 47 154 363 irr internal rate of return 258 363 IS gt increment and skip 286 363 isClockOn is clock on 363 408 K keyboard layout 1 math operations 36 key code diagram 292 L L user created list name symbol 174 LabelOff 76 363 LabelOn 76 363 labels graph 76 363 program 285 363 Last Entry 22 Lbl label 285 363 Icm least common multiple 48 364 least common multiple Icm 48 least common multiple Icm 364 length of string 271 364 less than lt 62 380 less than or equal to lt 62 380 line graph style 71 line segments drawing 124 Line draw line 125 364 lines drawing 125 LINK RECEIVE menu 350 LINK SEND menu 347 linking receiving items 350 to a CBL 2 or CBR 346 to a PC or Macintosh 346 to a TI 84 Pl
379. s 1 Press MATRIX to display the MATRX NAMES menu 2 Select the name of the matrix you want to copy 3 Press STO 4 Press MATRIX again and select the name of the new matrix to which you want to copy the existing matrix 5 Press to copy the matrix to the new matrix name Accessing a Matrix Element On the home screen or from within a program you can store a value to or recall a value from a matrix element The element must be within the currently defined matrix dimensions Select matrix from the MATRX NAMES menu matrix row column Chapter 10 Matrices 150 Using Math Functions with Matrices Using Math Functions with Matrices You can use many of the math functions on the Tl 84 Plus keypad the MATH menu the MATH NUM menu and the MATH TEST menu with matrices However the dimensions must be appropriate Each of the functions below creates a new matrix the original matrix remains the same Addition Subtraction Multiplication To add or subtract matrices the dimensions must be the same The answer is a matrix in which the elements are the sum or difference of the individual corresponding elements matrixA matrixB matrixA matrixB To multiply two matrices together the column dimension of matrixA must match the row dimension Of matrixB matrixA matrixB Multiplying a matrix by a value or a value by a matrix returns a matrix in which each element of matrix is multiplied by value matrix value
380. s The variables below are reserved for use by the Tl 84 Plus You cannot store to them n X Sx ox minX maxX Gy Ly xy a b c RegEQ x1 x2 y1 z t F x2 Dp X1 Sx1 n1 lower upper r R and other statistical variables Statistics Formulas This section contains statistics formulas for the Logistic and SinReg regressions ANOVA 2 SampF Test and 2 SampTTest Logistic The logistic regression algorithm applies nonlinear recursive least squares techniques to optimize the following cost function N 2 d z i 1 l ae which is the sum of the squares of the residual errors where x the independent variable list y the dependent variable list N the dimension of the lists This technique attempts to estimate the constants a b and c recursively to make J as small as possible SinReg The sine regression algorithm applies nonlinear recursive least squares techniques to optimize the following cost function N J a asin bx c d y i 1 which is the sum of the squares of the residual errors where x the independent variable list y the dependent variable list N the dimension of the lists This technique attempts to recursively estimate the constants a b c and d to make J as small as possible Appendix B Reference Information 384 ANOVA The ANOVA F statistic is FactorMS ErrorMS The mean squares MS that make up F are FactorMS EALS Factordf ErrorMS Lordo Errordf
381. s Complex numbers A B Z 9 Matrices A B C J lists L4 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 anduser defnednames Parametric equations X1TandY4T X6TandY6T ss Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 19 Variable Type Polar functions Sequence functions Stat plots Graph databases Graph pictures Strings Apps AppVars Groups System variables Notes about Variables Names r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 u V W Plot1 Plot2 Plot3 GDB1 GDBz2 GDB9 GDBO Pict Pic2 Pic9 PicO Str1 Str2 Str9 Str0 Applications Application variables Grouped variables Xmin Xmax and others e You can create as many list names as memory will allow Chapter 11 e Programs have user defined names and share memory with variables Chapter 16 e From the home screen or from a program you can store to matrices Chapter 10 lists Chapter 11 strings Chapter 15 system variables such as Xmax Chapter 1 TblStart Chapter 7 and all Y functions Chapters 3 4 5 and 6 e From an editor you can store to matrices lists and Y functions Chapter 3 e From the home screen a program or an editor you can store a value to a matrix element or a list element e You can use DRAW STO menu items to store and recall graph databases and pictures Chapter 8 e Although most variables can be archived system variables including r T X Y and 0 cannot be archived Chapter 18 Apps are
382. s 127 Shading Areas on a Graph Shading a Graph To shade an area on a graph select 7 Shade from the DRAW menu The instruction is pasted to the home screen or to the program editor Shade owerfunc upperfunc Xleft Xright pattern patres Shadel s os 1 7 Shade K 3 8H ae Done Shadel x 2 47 o oF Done E MathPrint Classic Shade draws Jowerfunc and upperfunc in terms of X on the current graph and shades the area that is specifically above owerfunc and below upperfunc Only the areas where lowerfunc lt upperfunc are shaded Xleft and Xright if included specify left and right boundaries for the shading X eft and Xright must be numbers between Xmin and Xmax which are the defaults pattern specifies one of four shading patterns pattern 1 vertical default pattern 2 horizontal pattern 3 negative slope 45 pattern 4 positive slope 45 patres specifies one of eight shading resolutions patres 1 shades every pixel default patres 2 shades every second pixel patres 3 shades every third pixel patres 4 shades every fourth pixel patres 5 shades every fifth pixel patres 6 shades every sixth pixel patres 7 shades every seventh pixel patres 8 shades every eighth pixel Drawing Circles Drawing a Circle Directly on a Graph To draw a circle directly on a displayed graph using the cursor follow these steps 1 Select 9 Circle from the DRAW menu Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 128 2 Place th
383. s are filled by O e Elements in the old list that are outside the new dimension are deleted Chapter 11 Lists 169 length dim listname 14 35 6 4L14 Sedimebla 3 l i4 5 6l 4 dimclis Li 4 i4 5 6l Li 1466 BF Fill Fill replaces each element in Jistname with value Fill value listname 324 574L2 Fill 44 31 L 3 io 4 33 Done Fillt8 L 3 Lz i Done 4431 4431 44377 E io 8 gL Note dim and Fill are the same as dim and Fill on the MATRX MATH menu Chapter 10 seq seq Sequence returns a list in which each element is the result of the evaluation of expression with regard to variable for the values ranging from begin to end at steps of increment variable need not be defined in memory increment can be negative the default value for increment is 1 seq is not valid within expression Complex lists are not valid A wizard will open to assist the entry of the syntax Note seq is the only function in LIST OPS that has a wizard seq expression variable begin end increment sey A t A 1 11 32 a lt 1 16 459 aa Warlable A starts l end ii cumSum cumSum cumulative sum returns the cumulative sums of the elements in ist starting with the first element ist elements can be real or complex numbers cumSum list Chapter 11 Lists 170 CuMSuUM Tlo 2 3 4 at 3 f1 3 6 16 153 AList AList returns a list containing the differences between consecutive elements in ist AList subtracts
384. s from a List You can clear all elements from a list in any of five ways Use ClrList to clear specified lists In the stat list editor press 4 to move the cursor onto a list name and then press CLEAR ENTER In the stat list editor move the cursor onto each element and then press one by one On the home screen or in the program editor enter 0 gt dim istname to set the dimension of listname to O Chapter 11 Use CIrAllLists to clear all lists in memory Chapter 18 Editing a List Element To edit a list element follow these steps 1 2 Move the cursor onto the element you want to edit Press to move the cursor to the entry line Note If you want to replace the current value you can enter a new value without first pressing ENTER When you enter the first character the current value is cleared automatically Edit the element in the entry line e Press one or more keys to enter the new value When you enter the first character the current value is cleared automatically You can use the shortcut menus to enter values When you use n d to enter a fraction it is not displayed as a stacked fraction in the list Instead the fraction has a thick bar separating the numerator and denominator Thick bar fraction on the list editor entry line FEMS 2 5 Thin bar fraction on the home screen regular division 2 3 Note Order of operations applies to fractions For example Letvi 1 275 evaluates to z becau
385. s selected then the function is displayed In RectGC format TRACE updates and displays the values of X Y and T if CoordOn format is on In PolarGC format X Y R 8 and T are updated if CoordOn format is selected R 8 and T are displayed The X and Y or R and 8 values are calculated from T To move five plotted points at a time on a function press lt or gt If you move the cursor beyond the top or bottom of the screen the coordinate values at the bottom of the screen continue to change appropriately Quick Zoom is available in parametric graphing panning is not Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid T Value To move the trace cursor to any valid T value on the current function enter the number When you enter the first digit a T prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen You can enter an expression at the T prompt The value must be valid for the current viewing window When you have completed the entry press to move the cursor Floti Flote Plots aiThsin T3 YirGy niy sintTs nip sintTs N9e9R4s e ZOOM ZOOM operations in parametric graphing work the same as in Func graphing Only the X Xmin Xmax and Xscl and Y Ymin Ymax and Yscl window variables are affected The T window variables Tmin Tmax and Tstep are only affected when you select ZStandard The VARS ZOOM secondary menu ZT Z9 items 1 ZTmin 2 ZTmax and 3 ZTstep are the zoom memory variabl
386. s sent from user data archive flash of the sending unit are transmitted to user data archive flash of the receiving unit After all selected items have been transmitted the message Done is displayed on both calculators Press 4 and to scroll through the names Sending to a TI 84 Plus Silver Edition or TI 84 Plus You can transfer variables all types programs and Flash applications to another Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition or Tl 84 Plus You can also backup the RAM memory of one unit to another Note Keep in mind that the T l 84 Plus has less Flash memory than the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition Chapter 19 Communication Link 348 e Variables stored in RAM on the sending TI 84 Plus Silver Edition will be sent to the RAM of the receiving Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition or Tl 84 Plus e Variables and applications stored in the user data archive of the sending Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition will be sent to the user data archive of the receiving Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition or T 84 Plus After sending or receiving data you can repeat the same transmission to additional Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition or Tl 84 Plus units from either the sending unit or the receiving unit without having to reselect data to send The current items remain selected However you cannot repeat transmission if you selected All or All To send data to an additional TI 84 Plus Silver Edition or a TI 84 Plus Use a USB unit to unit cable to link two units together On th
387. s to the home screen or the program editor The pixel instructions are not interactive ro s944 saab acca Turning On and Off Pixels with Pxl On and Pxl Off Pxl On pixel on turns on the pixel at vow column where row is an integer between 0 and 62 and column is an integer between 0 and 94 Pxl Off turns the pixel off Pxl Change toggles the pixel on and off Pxl On vow column Pxl Off 7ow column Pxl Change row column Using pxl Test pxl Test pixel test returns 1 if the pixel at row column is turned on or O if the pixel is turned off on the current graph row must be an integer between 0 and 62 column must be an integer between 0 and 94 pxl Test row column Split Screen On a Horiz split screen the maximum value for row is 30 for Pxl On Pxl Off Pxl Change and pxl Test On a G T split screen the maximum value for row is 50 and the maximum value for column is 46 for Pxl On Pxl Off Pxl Change and pxl Test Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 133 Storing Graph Pictures Pic DRAW STO Menu To display the DRAW STO menu press DRAW 4 When you select an instruction from the DRAW STO menu the TI 84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor The picture and graph database instructions are not interactive DRAW POINTS STO Le StorePic Stores the current picture 2 RecallPic Recalls a saved picture 3 StoreGDB Stores the current graph database 4 Recal1lGDB Recalls a saved g
388. se the order of operations dictates that division is performed before addition To evaluate 12 enter Let23 1 25 3 with parentheses around the numerator e Press gt to move the cursor to the character before which you want to insert press INS and then enter one or more characters e Press gt to move the cursor to a character you want to delete and then press to delete the character To cancel any editing and restore the original element at the rectangular cursor press CLEAR ENTER Chapter 12 Statistics 187 AEC SY ot 1 A Note You can enter expressions and variables for elements Press ENTER 4 or to update the list If you entered an expression it is evaluated If you entered only a variable the stored value is displayed as a list element ABC S E When you edit a list element in the stat list editor the list is updated in memory immediately Attaching Formulas to List Names Attaching a Formula to a List Name in Stat List Editor You can attach a formula to a list name in the stat list editor and then display and edit the calculated list elements When executed the attached formula must resolve to a list Chapter 11 describes in detail the concept of attaching formulas to list names To attach a formula to a list name that is stored in the stat list editor follow these steps 1 Press to display the stat list editor Press 4 to move the cursor to the top line Press 4 or
389. sert cursor is displayed Steps 2 and 3 are interchangeable 4 Press repeatedly to rotate through the graph styles The seven styles rotate in the same order in which they are listed in the table above 5 Press gt 4 or when you have selected a style Chapter 3 Function Graphing 71 Shading Above and Below When you select or amp for two or more functions the TI 84 Plus rotates through four shading patterns e Vertical lines shade the first function with a or amp graph style e Horizontal lines shade the second e Negatively sloping diagonal lines shade the third e Positively sloping diagonal lines shade the fourth e The rotation returns to vertical lines for the fifth or amp function repeating the order described above When shaded areas intersect the patterns overlap the four shading patterns rotate for each member of the family of curves Setting a Graph Style from a Program To set the graph style from a program select H GraphStyle from the PRGM CTL menu To display this menu press while in the program editor function is the number of the Y function name in the current graphing mode graphstyle is an integer from 1 to 7 that corresponds to the graph style as shown below 1 line 5 i path 2 thick 6 animate 3 above 7 dot 4 below GraphStyle function graphstyle For example when this program is executed in Func mode GraphStyle 1 3 se
390. ses and Suggested Remedies You attempted to use a system variable inappropriately See Appendix A e A singular matrix determinant 0 is not valid as the argument for 1 e The SinReg instruction or a polynomial regression generated a singular matrix determinant 0 because it could not find a solution or a solution does not exist This error is not returned during graphing The TI 84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph expression in the solve function or the equation solver contains a singularity a point at which the function is not defined Examine a graph of the function If the equation has a solution change the bounds or the initial guess or both You attempted a stat calculation with lists that are not appropriate e Statistical analyses must have at least two data points e Med Med must have at least three points in each partition e When you use a frequency list its elements must be 0 e Xmax Xmin Xscl must be lt 47 for a histogram You attempted to display a graph when a stat plot that uses an undefined list is turned on The command contains a syntax error Look for misplaced functions arguments parentheses or commas Appendix A displays the arguments and punctuation needed to execute the function or instruction For example stdDev lis freglist is a function of the Tl 84 Plus The arguments are shown in italics The arguments in brackets are optional and you need not type them You must
391. sion 202 359 expression 11 converting from string expr 270 converting from string expr 359 turning on and off ExprOn 76 359 ExprOff expression off 76 359 ExprOn expression on 76 359 F Faceplates 8 factorial 379 family of curves 77 Fill 156 359 FINANCE CALC menu 254 FINANCE VARS menu 262 financial functions amortization schedules 258 cash flows 257 days between dates 261 interest rate conversions 261 payment method 262 time value of money TVM 255 Fix fixed decimal mode 16 359 fixed decimal mode Fix 16 359 Float floating decimal mode 16 359 floating decimal mode Float 16 359 fMax function maximum 360 fMin function minimum 40 360 fnint function integral 41 360 FnOff function off 70 360 FnOn function on 70 360 For 283 360 format settings 74 107 formulas amortization 389 ANOVA 385 cash flow 389 days between dates 390 interest rate conversions 390 logistic regression 384 sine regression 384 time value of money 387 two sample F Test 385 two sample t test 386 fPart fractional part 47 154 360 fractions n d 18 50 Un d 18 50 free moving cursor 78 frequency 199 Full full screen mode 17 360 full screen mode Full 17 360 Func function graphing mode 16 360 function graphing accuracy 78 CALC calculate menu 87 defining and displaying 66 defining in the Y editor 68 defining on the home screen in a program 68 deselecting 69 displaying 66 73 76 AX and A
392. specific digit and then edit it 3 Press ENTER or 4 If you entered an expression the TI 84 Plus evaluates it The new value is stored Note Xmin lt Xmax and Ymin lt Ymax must be true in order to graph Storing to a Window Variable from the Home Screen or a Program To store a value which can be an expression to a window variable begin on a blank line and follow these steps Chapter 3 Function Graphing 73 Enter the value you want to store Press STO Press to display the VARS menu Select 1 Window to display the Func window variables X Y secondary menu a oe IN e Press gt to display the Par and Pol window variables T secondary menu e Press gt gt to display the Seq window variables U V W secondary menu 5 Select the window variable to which you want to store a value The name of the variable is pasted to the current cursor location 6 Press to complete the instruction When the instruction is executed the Tl 84 Plus stores the value to the window variable and displays the value 144eMax 14 AX and AY The variables AX and AY items 8 and 9 on the VARS 1 Window X Y secondary menu AX is also on the Window screen define the distance from the center of one pixel to the center of any adjacent pixel on a graph graphing accuracy AX and AY are calculated from Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax when you display a graph AX Xmax Xmin AY Ymax Ymin 94 62 You can store val
393. splayed on the bottom of the screen along with the equation of the tangent line In all other modes the dy dx value is displayed n 1 96249C4 VE SHLBRs seo sent ore Change the fixed decimal setting on the mode screen if you want to see fewer digits displayed for X and the equation for Y n 1 96 5 ti a AEE Drawing a Tangent Line from the Home Screen or a Program Tangent tangent line draws a line tangent to expression in terms of X such as Y1 or x at point X value X can be an expression expression is interpreted as being in Func mode Chapter 8 Draw Instructions 126 Tangent expression value Tangent iYi 330 Drawing Functions and inverses Drawing a Function DrawF draw function draws expression as a function in terms of X on the current graph When you select 6 DrawF from the DRAW menu the Tl 84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor DrawF is not interactive DrawF expression o f Note You cannot use a list in expression to draw a family of curves Drawing an Inverse of a Function Drawinv draw inverse draws the inverse of expression by plotting X values on the y axis and Y values on the x axis When you select 8 Drawlnv from the DRAW menu the TI 84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor DrawInv is not interactive Drawinv works in Func mode only Drawlnv expression s Note You cannot use a list of expressions with Drawlnv Chapter 8 Draw Instruction
394. ss each CATALOG item from a menu or the keyboard except e The six string functions e The six hyperbolic functions e The solve instruction without the equation solver editor Chapter 2 e The inferential stat functions without the inferential stat editors Chapter 13 Note The only CATALOG programming commands you can execute from the home screen are GetCalc Get and Send Selecting an Item from the CATALOG To select a CATALOG item follow these steps 1 Press CATALOG to display the CATALOG The gt in the first column is the selection cursor 2 Press or 4 to scroll the CATALOG until the selection cursor points to the item you want To jump to the first item beginning with a particular letter press that letter alpha lock is on e Items that begin with a number are in alphabetical order according to the first letter after the number For example 2 PropZTest is among the items that begin with the letter P e Functions that appear as symbols such as 1 lt and follow the last item that begins with Z To jump to the first symbol press 6 3 Press to paste the item to the current screen abs cll Chapter 15 CATALOG Strings Hyperbolic Functions 266 Note e From the top of the CATALOG menu press 4 to move to the bottom From the bottom press to move to the top e When your TI 84 Plus is in MathPrint mode many functions will paste the MathPrint template on the home sc
395. st 227 369 1 Var Stats one variable statistics 200 377 2 PropZint two proportion z confidence interval 232 369 2 PropZTest two proportion z test 228 369 2 SampFk Test two sample F Test 235 372 2 SampTInt two sample confidence interval 231 372 2 SampTTest two sample test 226 373 2 SampZInt two sample z confidence interval 230 372 2 SampZTest two sample z test 225 372 2 Var Stats two variable statistics 200 377 A a bi rectangular complex mode 17 50 355 about 326 above graph style 71 abs absolute value 46 55 152 354 accuracy information computational and graphing 398 function limits and results 399 graphing 78 addition 36 381 alpha cursor 8 alpha lock 14 alternative hypothesis 219 amortization xInt sum of interest 363 Prn sum of principal 368 bal amortization balance 258 355 calculating schedules 258 formula 389 and Boolean operator 63 354 ANGLE menu 59 angle modes 16 angle 55 354 animate graph style 71 ANOVA one way variance analysis 238 354 385 Ans last answer 24 329 354 APD Automatic Power Down 3 applications See examples applications 36 Apps 20 328 AppVars 20 328 arccosine cos 36 Archive 21 330 354 archive full error 343 394 garbage collection 340 memory error 340 archived variables 383 arcsine sin 1 36 arctangent tan7 36 Asm 294 354 AsmComp 294 354 AsmPrgm 294 354 assembly language programs 294 augment 1
396. st and Interval Output Variables The inferential statistics variables are calculated as indicated below To access these variables for use in expressions press 5 5 Statistics and then select the VARS menu listed in the last column below Variables Tests Intervals ANOVA Menu p value p p TEST test statistics z t 2 F t F TEST degrees of freedom df df df TEST sample mean of x values for X1 X2 X1 X2 TEST sample 1 and sample 2 sample standard deviation of x for Sx1 Sx1 TEST sample 1 and sample 2 Sx2 Sx2 number of data points for sample 1 n1 n2 n1 n2 TEST and sample 2 pooled standard deviation SxP SxP SxP TEST LinRegTTest VARS Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 240 LinRegT Test VARS Variables Tests Intervals ANOVA Menu estimated sample proportion pp TEST population 1 estimated sample proportion for p2 p2 TEST population 2 confidence interval pair lower TEST upper mean of x values X X XY sample standard deviation of x Sx Sx XY number of data points n n XY standard error about the line S TEST regression fit coefficients a b EQ correlation coefficient r EQ coefficient of determination r2 EQ regression equation 2 RegEQ EQ Note The variables listed above cannot be archived Distribution Functions DISTR menu Note Selection of any of the DISTR functions will take the user to a wizard screen for that function To display the DISTR menu press DISTR DISTR DRAW 1 normalpd
397. st be a letter from A to Z or 8 The second through eighth characters can be letters numbers or 0 Enter zero to seven letters numbers or to complete the new program name Press ENTER The program editor is displayed Enter one or more program commands Press QUIT to leave the program editor and return to the home screen Managing Memory and Deleting a Program To check whether adequate memory is available for a program you want to enter Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu Select 2 Mem Mgmt Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE menu Chapter 18 Select 7 Prgm to display the PRGM editor The Tl 84 Plus expresses memory quantities in bytes You can increase available memory in one of two ways You can delete one or more programs or you can archive some programs To increase available memory by deleting a specific program 1 Press MEM and then select 2 Mem Mgmt Del from the MEMORY menu Out Shem Momt Del Clear Entries ClrAllLists Archive UnArchive Reset Select 7 Prgm to display the PRGM editor Chapter 18 Chapter 16 Programming 217 3 Press 4 and to move the selection cursor gt next to the program you want to delete and then press DEL The program is deleted from memory Note You will receive a message asking you to confirm this delete action Select 2 yes to continue To leave the PRGM editor screen without deleting anything press QUIT which displays the
398. stics 214 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions Getting Started Mean Height of a Population Getting Started is a fast paced introduction Read the chapter for details Suppose you want to estimate the mean height of a population of women given the random sample below Because heights among a biological population tend to be normally distributed a t distribution confidence interval can be used when estimating the mean The 10 height values below are the first 10 of 90 values randomly generated from a normally distributed population with an assumed mean of 165 1 centimeters and a standard deviation of 6 35 centimeters randNorm 165 1 6 35 90 with a seed of 789 Height in centimeters of Each of 10 Women 169 43 168 33 159 55 169 97 159 79 181 42 171 17 162 04 167 15 159 53 1 Press to display the stat list editor Press 4 to move the cursor onto L1 and then press INS to insert a new list The Name prompt is displayed on the bottom line The fi cursor indicates that alpha lock is on The existing list name columns shift to the right Note Your stat editor may not look like the one pictured here depending on the lists you have already stored 2 Enter H G H T at the Name prompt and then press to create the list to store the women s height data Press to move the cursor into the first row of the list HGHT 1 is displayed on the bottom line NGITI Press ENTER 3 Press 169 43 t
399. sum of the principal during a specified period for an amortization schedule using stored values for I PV and PMT pmt is the starting payment pmt2 is the ending payment in the range pmt and pmt2 must be positive integers lt 10 000 roundvalue specifies the internal precision the calculator uses to calculate the principal if you do not specify roundvalue the T 84 Plus uses the current Float Fix decimal mode setting Note You must enter values for I PV PMT and before computing the principal LPrn pmt pmt2 roundvalue xXInt computes the sum of the interest during a specified period for an amortization schedule using stored values for 1 PV and PMT pmt1 is the starting payment pmt2 is the ending payment in the range pmt1 and pmt2 must be positive integers lt 10 000 roundvalue specifies the internal precision the calculator uses to calculate the interest if you do not specify roundvalue the T 84 Plus uses the current Float Fix decimal mode setting LInt pmt1 pmt2 roundvalue 1H RE PH 2 oH IBGHE BE 768 914PNT D 0 7 765 91 B a4 68 914PMNT 12 r6S 91 EPrnti 123 Fo WS 124P 4 Amortization Example Calculating an Outstanding Loan Balance You want to buy a home with a 30 year mortgage at 8 percent APR Monthly payments are 800 Calculate the outstanding loan balance after each payment and display the results in a graph and in the table 1 Press MODE Press gt gt D t
400. t drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Computes a two sample t confidence interval pooled 1 pools variances pooled 0 does not pool variances Computes a two sample confidence interval pooled 1 pools variances pooled 0 does not pool variances Computes a two sample test a ternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt pooled 1 pools variances pooled 0 does not pool variances drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Computes a two sample test alternative 1 is lt alternative 0 is alternative 1 is gt pooled 1 pools variances pooled 0 does not pool variances drawflag 1 draws results drawflag 0 calculates results Computes a two sample z confidence interval Computes a two sample z confidence interval Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd MATRIX MATH B rref 2nd ANGLE ANGLE 5 R gt Pr 2nd ANGLE ANGLE 6 R gt PO t STAT TESTS E 2 SampF Test t STAT TESTS E 2 SampF Test t STAT TESTS 0 2 SampTiInt t STAT TESTS 0 2 SampTint t STAT TESTS 4 2 SampT Test t STAT TESTS 4 2 SampT Test t STAT TESTS 9 2 SampZiInt t STAT TESTS 9 2 SampZInt Appendix A Functions and Instructions 372 Function or Key or Instruction Arguments Result Keys Menu or Screen Item 2 SampZTest o4 02 Computes a two sample z test alternative 1 is lt t STAT distname listname2 alternative 0 is
401. t press 4 or gt Five plotted points on a function Xres press 4 or gt affects this To any valid X value on a function enter a value and then press ENTER From one function to another press 4 or When the trace cursor moves along a function the Y value is calculated from the X value that is Y Yn X If the function is undefined at an X value the Y value is blank Trace cursor on the curve n 2974894 Y 6 1184709 If you move the trace cursor beyond the top or bottom of the screen the coordinate values at the bottom of the screen continue to change appropriately Moving the Trace Cursor from Function to Function To move the trace cursor from function to function press and 4 The cursor follows the order of the selected functions in the Y editor The trace cursor moves to each function at the same X value If ExprOn format is selected the expression is updated Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid X Value To move the trace cursor to any valid X value on the current function enter the value When you enter the first digit an X prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen You can enter an expression at the X prompt The value must be valid for the current viewing window When you have completed the entry press to move the cursor Note This feature does not apply to stat plots Chapter 3 Function Graphing 19 Panning to the Left or Right
402. t is automatically stored However when you enter a matrix directly on the home screen or in an expression it is not automatically stored but you can store it In MathPrint mode you could also use the MTRX shortcut menu to enter this kind of matrix 1 Press F3 gt D to define the matrix dimension 2 Press1 0 2 2p 4D 5 6 D to define the matrix 3 Press to perform the calculation Displaying and Copying Matrices Displaying a Matrix To display the contents of a matrix on the home screen select the matrix from the MATRX NAMES menu and then press ENTER A In MathPrint mode e An arrow at the left or right indicates additional columns e An arrow at the top or bottom indicates additional rows In Classic mode e Ellipses in the left or right column indicate additional columns Chapter 10 Matrices 149 e torJin the right column indicate additional rows In either mode press gt L9 and 4 to scroll the matrix You can scroll the matrix after you press to calculate the matrix If you cannot scroll the matrix press 4 to repeat the calculation 46 HERE 116 BEBE 49 HERE wos HEE 2 ARE Ar AAAA 3 BAAG MathPrint Classic Note e You cannot copy a matrix output from the history e Matrix calculations are not saved when you change from MathPrint mode to Classic mode or vice versa Copying One Matrix to Another To copy a matrix follow these step
403. t of value h Returns x voot of list elements Appendix A Functions and Instructions Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item T MEMORY 1 ZPrevious ZOOM A ZQuadrant1 t ZOOM 5 ZSquare t ZOOM 6 ZStandard t TESTS 1 Z Test t TESTS 1 Z Test t ZOOM 7 ZTrig PRB 4 PRB 4 2nd ANGLE ANGLE 1 ANGLE ANGLE 3 2nd MATRIX MATH 2 1 MATH 5 MATH 5 379 Function or Instruction Arguments list value list N listB Cube ue Cube root 3 value Equal valueA valueB Not equal valueA valueB Less than valueA lt valueB Greater than valueA gt valueB Less than or equal valueA lt valueB Greater than or equal valueA valueB Inverse alie Inverse list Inverse matrix Square value Square list Square matrix Powers value power Result Returns ist roots of value Returns istA roots of listB Returns the cube of a real or complex number expression list or Square matrix Returns the cube root of a real or complex number expression or list Returns 1 if valueA valueB Returns 0 if valueA valueB valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers expressions lists or matrices Returns 1 if valueA valueB Returns 0 if valueA valueB valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers expressions lists or matrices Returns 1 if valueA lt valueB Returns 0 if valueA valueB valueA and valueB can be rea
404. t to unit There are 30 App slots for the Tl 84 Plus For details refer to Chapter 18 Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 30 Archiving You can store variables in the Tl 84 Plus user data archive a protected area of memory separate from RAM The user data archive lets you e Store data programs applications or any other variables to a safe location where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently e Create additional free RAM by archiving variables By archiving variables that do not need to be edited frequently you can free up RAM for applications that may require additional memory For details refer to Chapter 18 Other TI 84 Plus Features The Tl 84 Plus guidebook that is included with your graphing calculator has introduced you to basic Tl 84 Plus operations This guidebook covers the other features and capabilities of the T 84 Plus in greater detail Graphing You can store graph and analyze up to 10 functions up to six parametric functions up to six polar functions and up to three sequences You can use DRAW instructions to annotate graphs The graphing chapters appear in this order Function Parametric Polar Sequence and DRAW For graphing details refer to Chapters 3 4 5 6 8 Sequences You can generate sequences and graph them over time Or you can graph them as web plots or as phase plots For details refer to Chapter 6 Tables You can create function evaluation tables to ana
405. ta archive You must delete the group in user data archive to remove it Garbage Collection Garbage Collection Message lf you use the user data archive extensively you may see a Garbage Collect message This occurs if you try to archive a variable when there is not enough free contiguous archive memory Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 339 The Garbage Collect message lets you know an archive will take longer than usual It also alerts you that the archive will fail if there is not enough memory The message can also alert you when a program is caught in a loop that repetitively fills the user data archive Select No to cancel the garbage collection process and then find and correct the errors in your program When YES is selected the Tl 84 Plus will attempt to rearrange the archived variables to make additional room Responding to the Garbage Collection Message e To cancel select 1 No e If you select 1 No the message ERR ARCHIVE FULL will be displayed e To continue archiving select 2 Yes e Ifyou select 2 Yes the process message Garbage Collecting or Defragmenting will be displayed Note The process message Defragmenting is displayed whenever an application marked for deletion is encountered Garbage collection may take up to 20 minutes depending on how much of archive memory has been used to store variables After garbage collection depending on how much additional space is freed the va
406. table Chapter 14 Applications 260 Calculating Interest Conversion Calculating an Interest Conversion Use the interest conversion functions menu items B and C to convert interest rates from an annual effective rate to a nominal rate Nom or from a nominal rate to an annual effective rate vEff gt Nom gt Nom computes the nominal interest rate effective rate and compounding periods must be real numbers compounding periods must be gt 0 gt Nom effective rate compounding periods Home 15 S7 4a 13 Eff Eff computes the effective interest rate nominal rate and compounding periods must be real numbers compounding periods must be gt 0 gt bEff nominal rate compounding periods FETE CRs 123 2 3H Finding Days between Dates Defining Payment Method dbd Use the date function dbd menu item D to calculate the number of days between two dates using the actual day count method date and date2 can be numbers or lists of numbers within the range of the dates on the standard calendar Note Dates must be between the years 1950 through 2049 dbd date date2 You can enter datel and date2 in either of two formats e MM DDYY United States e DDMM YY Europe Chapter 14 Applications 261 The decimal placement differentiates the date formats ae dbdti2 3198 12 3 rol e 1923 rol HH MathPrint Classic Defining the Payment Method Pmt_End and Pmt_Bgn menu items E
407. tep 2 already was stored in another stat list editor column then the list and its elements if any move to the current column from the previous column Remaining list names shift accordingly Creating a Name in the Stat List Editor To create a name in the stat list editor follow these steps 1 Display the Name prompt 2 Press letter from A to Z or 0 to enter the first letter of the name The first character cannot be a number 3 Enter zero to four letters 8 or numbers to complete the new user created list name List names can be one to five characters long 4 Press or to store the list name in the current column of the stat list editor The list name becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu Chapter 11 Removing a List from the Stat List Editor To remove a list from the stat list editor move the cursor onto the list name and then press DEL The list is not deleted from memory it is only removed from the stat list editor Notes e To delete a list name from memory use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT DELETE secondary menu Chapter 18 e If you archive a list it will be removed from the stat list editor Removing All Lists and Restoring L1 through L6 You can remove all user created lists from the stat list editor and restore list names L1 through L6 to columns 1 through 6 in either of two ways e Use SetUpEditor with no arguments e Reset all memory Chapter 18 Chapter 12 Statistics 186 Clearing All Element
408. the count of successes in each sample x4 and x gt and the count of observations in each sample n4 and no The computed confidence interval depends on the user specified confidence level NpUL E Frorzint 1 ni wot rit C Level 95 Calculate Calculated results Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 232 y Test y Test chi square test item C computes a chi square test for association on the two way table of counts in the specified Observed matrix The null hypothesis H 0 for a two way table is no association exists between row variables and column variables The alternative hypothesis is the variables are related Before computing a y Test enter the observed counts in a matrix Enter that matrix variable name at the Observed prompt in the y Test editor default A At the Expected prompt enter the matrix variable name to which you want the computed expected counts to be stored default B Matrix MATRIFIA I K Note Press gt gt 1 to editor rs qgon 149 000 select 1 A from the MATRX EDIT C B bih 16 000 didih 13 000 menu Input ni Test Observed A Expected E Calculate Oraw Note Press 2nd MATRX ENTER to display matrix B Calculated wa Te T results X 3 3758 F 1658 See Drawn results 223 375 F 185 Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 233 _ GOF Test y GOF Test Chi Square Goodness of
409. the first element in ist from the second element subtracts the second element from the third and so on The list of differences is always one element shorter than the original isz list elements can be a real or complex numbers AList Jis i246 38 45 7634 0 IST 24H 36 45 res alist L DIST L146 13 253 Select Select selects one or more specific data points from a scatter plot or xyLine plot only and then stores the selected data points to two new lists x istname and ylistname For example you can use Select to select and then analyze a portion of plotted CBL 2 CBL or CBR data Select x istname ylistname Note Before you use Select you must have selected turned on a scatter plot or xyLine plot Also the plot must be displayed in the current viewing window Before Using Select Before using Select follow these steps 1 Create two list names and enter the data 2 Turn on a stat plot select scatter plot or L xyLine and enter the two list names for Xlist and Ylist Chapter 12 3 Use ZoomStat to plot the data Chapter 3 MathPrint Chapter 11 Lists 171 Classic Using Select to Select Data Points from a Plot To select data points from a scatter plot or xyLine plot follow these steps 1 Press LIST gt 8 to select 8 Select from the LIST OPS menu Select is pasted to the home screen Enter x istname press enter ylistname and then press
410. the number in the top right corner specifies which function is being traced Displaying Graphs Displaying a New Graph To display the graph of the selected function or functions press GRAPH TRACE ZOOM instructions and CALC operations display the graph automatically As the Tl 84 Plus plots the graph the busy indicator is on As the graph is plotted X and Y are updated Pausing or Stopping a Graph While plotting a graph you can pause or stop graphing e Press ENTER to pause then press ENTER to resume e Press to stop then press GRAPH to redraw Smart Graph Smart Graph is a Tl 84 Plus feature that redisplays the last graph immediately when you press GRAPH but only if all graphing factors that would cause replotting have remained the same since the graph was last displayed If you performed any of the following actions since the graph was last displayed the Tl 84 Plus will replot the graph based on new values when you press GRAPH e Changed a mode setting that affects graphs e Changed a function in the current picture e Selected or deselected a function or stat plot Chapter 3 Function Graphing 76 e Changed the value of a variable in a selected function e Changed a window variable or graph format setting e Cleared drawings by selecting CirDraw e Changed a stat plot definition Overlaying Functions on a Graph On the TI 84 Plus you can graph one or more new functions without replotting existing functions
411. the prompts for the end of each whisker Q1 Med median and Q3 define the box Box plots are plotted with respect to Xmin and Xmax but ignore Ymin and Ymax When two box plots are plotted the first one plots at the top of the screen and the second plots in the middle When three are plotted the first one plots at the top the second in the middle and the third at the bottom Boxplot Boxplot LAE regular box plot plots one variable data The whiskers on the plot extend from the minimum data point in the set minX to the first quartile Q1 and from the third quartile Q3 to the maximum point maxX The box is defined by Q1 Med median and Q3 Box plots are plotted with respect to Xmin and Xmax but ignore Ymin and Ymax When two box plots are plotted the first one plots at the top of the screen and the second plots in the middle Chapter 12 Statistics 209 When three are plotted the first one plots at the top the second in the middle and the third at the bottom NormProbPlot NormProbPlot L lt normal probability plot plots each observation X in Data List versus the corresponding quantile z of the standard normal distribution If the plotted points lie close to a straight line then the plot indicates that the data are normal Enter a valid list name in the Data List field Select X or Y for the Data Axis setting e f you select X the Tl 84 Plus plots the data on the x axis and the z values on the y axis
412. the selected functions centered on the cursor location 5 Zoom in on the graph again in either of two ways e To zoom in at the same point press ENTER e To zoom in at a new point move the cursor to the point that you want as the center of the new viewing window and then press ENTER To zoom out on a graph select 3 Zoom Out and repeat steps 3 through 5 To cancel Zoom In or Zoom Out press CLEAR ZDecimal ZDecimal replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values as shown below These values set AX and AY equal to 0 1 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place Xmin 4 7 Ymin 3 1 Xmax 4 7 Ymax 3 1 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 ZSquare ZSquare replots the functions immediately It redefines the viewing window based on the current values of the window variables It adjusts in only one direction so that AX AY which makes the graph of a circle look like a circle Xscl and Yscl remain unchanged The midpoint of the current graph not the intersection of the axes becomes the midpoint of the new graph Chapter 3 Function Graphing 82 ZStandard ZStandard replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to the standard values shown below Xmin 10 Ymin 10 Xres 1 Xmax 10 Ymax 10 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 ZTrig ZTrig replots the functions immediately It updates the window variables to preset values that are appropriate for plotting trig functions Those preset values in Radi
413. the stat plots off press 2nd STAT PLOT and then select 4 PlotsOff e You specified a list dimension as something other than an integer between 1 and 999 e You specified a matrix dimension as something other than an integer between 1 and 99 e You attempted to invert a matrix that is not square e The solve function or the equation solver has exceeded the maximum number of permitted iterations Examine a graph of the function If the equation has a solution change the bounds or the initial guess or both e irr has exceeded the maximum number of permitted iterations e When computing 1 the maximum number of iterations was exceeded The label in the Goto instruction is not defined with a Lbl instruction in the program The calculator has been disabled for testing To restore full functionality use TI Connect software to download a file to your calculator from your computer or transfer any file to your calculator from another T1I 84 Plus See the instructions under Important Things to Know about your TI 84 Plus earlier in this chapter Memory is insufficient to perform the instruction or function You must delete items from memory before executing the instruction or function Recursive problems return this error for example graphing the equation Y1 Y1 Branching out of an If Then For While or Repeat loop with a Goto also can return this error because the End statement that terminates the loop is never reache
414. the value of b imaginary component and press i constant real component or imaginary component i 4 21 l dti Polar Complex Mode Polar complex mode recognizes and displays a complex number in the form re 8 i where r is the magnitude e is the base of the natural log 8 is the angle and i is a constant equal to 1 Ine ola Se 14 asvesde rc 1 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 52 To enter a complex number in polar form enter the value of r magnitude press lex exponential function enter the value of 6 angle press i constant and then press magnitudee anglei 1047497504 e j MathPrint lhe Ome 31 J l e ri i 64719755 Classic Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 53 MATH CPX Complex Operations MATH CPX Menu To display the MATH CPX menu press D gt D gt MATH NUM CPX PRB ee Cong Returns the complex conjugate 26 real Returns the real part 32 imagi Returns the imaginary part 4 angle Returns the polar angle 5 abs Returns the magnitude modulus 6 bRect Displays the result in rectangular form 7 bPolar Displays the result in polar form conj conj Conjugate returns the complex conjugate of a complex number or list of complex numbers conj atbi returns a bi in atbi mode conj re 0i returns re 97 in re 0i mode MathPrint Classic Corie S 41 2 E cori S 41 2 T conil ze J zpi BBPLBE SOE F condi Sete
415. tion Enter the exponent which can be one or two digits Note If the exponent is negative press and then enter the exponent 123 456 2 1 43445 When you enter a number in scientific notation the Tl 84 Plus does not automatically display answers in scientific or engineering notation The mode settings and the size of the number determine the display format Functions A function returns a value For example and log are the functions in the example on the previous page In general the first letter of each function is lowercase on the TI 84 Plus Most functions take at least one argument as indicated by an open parenthesis following the name For example sin requires one argument sin value Chapter 1 Operating the Tl 84 Plus Silver Edition 12 Note The Catalog Help App contains syntax information for most of the functions in the catalog Instructions An instruction initiates an action For example CirDraw is an instruction that clears any drawn elements from a graph Instructions cannot be used in expressions In general the first letter of each instruction name is uppercase Some instructions take more than one argument as indicated by an open parenthesis at the end of the name For example Circle requires three arguments Circle X Y radius Interrupting a Calculation To interrupt a calculation or graph in progress which is indicated by the busy indicator press ON When you interrupt a calculati
416. to confirm this delete action Select 2 Yes to continue To leave any variable screen without deleting anything press aUIT which displays the home screen You cannot delete some system variables such as the last answer variable Ans and the statistical variable RegEQ Clearing Entries and List Elements Clear Entries Clear Entries clears the contents of the ENTRY last entry on home screen storage area To clear the ENTRY storage area follow these steps 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu 2 Select 3 Clear Entries to paste the instruction to the home screen 3 Press to clear the ENTRY storage area Clear Entries one To cancel Clear Entries press CLEAR Chapter 18 Memory and Variable Management 329 Note If you select 3 Clear Entries from within a program the Clear Entries instruction is pasted to the program editor and the Entry last entry is cleared when the program is executed ClrAllLists ClrAllLists sets the dimension of each list in RAM to 0 To clear all elements from all lists follow these steps 1 Press MEM to display the MEMORY menu 2 Select 4 CIrAllLists to paste the instruction to the home screen 3 Press to set the dimension of each list in memory to 0 ClrAllLists one To cancel CIrAllLists press CLEAR ClrAllLists does not delete list names from memory from the LIST NAMES menu or from the stat list editor Note If you select 4 CIrAllLists from within a program the
417. to designate list names into which you want the selected data to be stored Select lt Li Lz i Press ENTER The graph screen is displayed with Left Bound in the bottom left corner Left Eound oo uzi tt 15 Ww Press 4 or if more than one stat plot is selected to move the cursor onto the stat plot from which you want to select data points Press 4 and gt to move the cursor to the stat plot data point that you want as the left bound FA DI gt T TIRE Lert Bound no A ee S 1 1 Press ENTER A gt indicator on the graph screen shows the left bound Right Bound is displayed in the bottom left corner Chapter 11 Lists 172 7 Press or gt to move the cursor to the stat plot point that you want for the right bound and then press ENTER The x values and y values of the selected points are stored in x istname and ylistname A new stat plot of x istname and ylistname replaces the stat plot from which you selected data points The list names are updated in the stat plot editor Li 4567 89 Fe Lz gre eek ate Note The two new lists x istname and ylistname will include the points you select as left bound and right bound Also left bound x value lt right bound x value must be true augment augment concatenates the elements of ist4 and JistB The list elements can be real or complex numbers augment ist4 istB f1 17 2134L i1 oir 21s augment Les to F lf 41
418. trials and probability of success p on each trial x can be a real number or a list of real numbers O lt p lt 1 must be true numtrials must be an integer gt 0 If you do not specify x a list of cumulative probabilities is returned binomcdf numtrials p x binomcd iS 6 03 Ree AE 24 545 ee C C cae Fe ORS aaeeee x Yealue i3 q4 5 Paste a poissonpdf poissonpdf computes a probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean u which must be a real number gt 0 x can be an integer or a list of integers The probability density function pdf is fix e pw x x 0 1 2 poissonpdf u x Polssonredf 6 160 Foissonr del nosed S Faste poissoncdf poissoncdf computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean u which must be a real number gt 0 x can be a real number or a list of real numbers poissoncdf u x cadre ord AD 126 46468 9 xo Waeluet1s 2333 Paste Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 247 geometpdf geometpdf computes a probability at x the number of the trial on which the first success occurs for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p O lt p lt 1 must be true x can be an integer or a list of integers The probability density function pdf is fix pA pT x 1 2 geometpdf p x ae EE eT 1 T5 H geometcd
419. tributions 224 2 SampZTest 2 SampZTest two sample z test item 3 tests the equality of the means of two populations u4 and u2 based on independent samples when both population standard deviations o and o gt are known The null hypothesis Ho 4 9 is tested against one of the alternatives below Ha pq u2 u1 u2 Ha u4 lt u2 u1 lt u2 Ha Wy He u1 gt u2 In the example LISTA 154 109 137 115 140 LISTB 108 115 126 92 146 Data Stats Input EEA ata BHEE 3 5 Ol 17 4 4 Hii e fae Hiie one Calculate Dram Calculate Draw Calculated TEF results Ld Fhe 7 1 4 9464 958 P 0695054675 w1 131 wz 17 b5e1 15 6145185 S 1941 nz 5 ni 5 E nz 5 h v Drawn results Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 225 2 SampT Test 2 SampTTest two sample z test item 4 tests the equality of the means of two populations u4 and us based on independent samples when neither population standard deviation o4 or 69 is known The null hypothesis Ho 4 9 is tested against one of the alternatives below Ha pq u2 u1 u2 Ha u4 lt u2 u1 lt u2 Ha Wy He u1 gt u2 In the example SAMP1 12 207 16 869 25 05 22 429 8 456 10 589 SAMP2 11 074 9 686 12 064 9 351 8 182 6 642 Data Stats Input en SdMeT Test 1 C istz fre Freq Tee Ge sg Peete Calculate Oraw wit uF sp Pooled Wes Calculate Oraw Calculated 2
420. ts niput E sampzInt Tnet EE Stats alii g2 13 5 Listi LISTC List 2iLIsSTo Frealil LF rea i C Level 99 C Level 99 Calculate Calculate Calculated results I H I H pi p k T e i nz 5 Hew a Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 230 2 SampTint 2 SampTInt two sample confidence interval item 0 computes a confidence interval for the difference between two population means u4 u2 when both population standard deviations 04 and o gt are unknown The computed confidence interval depends on the user specified confidence level In the example SAMP1 12 207 16 869 25 05 22 429 8 456 10 589 SAMP2 11 074 9 686 12 064 9 351 8 182 6 642 Data Stats Input Calculate C Level 95 Pooled Wes Calculate Calculated results Chapter 13 Inferential Statistics and Distributions 231 1 PropZInt 1 PropZInt One proportion z confidence interval item A computes a confidence interval for an unknown proportion of successes It takes as input the count of successes in the sample x and the count of observations in the sample n The computed confidence interval depends on the user specified confidence level Input Calculated results n 4ade HAAA 2 PropZint 2 PropZInt two proportion z confidence interval item B computes a confidence interval for the difference between the proportion of successes in two populations p4 p72 It takes as input
421. ts Y1 to above PEOGRAM SHADE a te i ae Grarhstyulecis 33 OU1isP6rarh Chapter 3 Function Graphing 72 Setting the Viewing Window Variables The TI 84 Plus Viewing Window The viewing window is the portion of the coordinate plane defined by Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax Xscl X scale defines the distance between tick marks on the x axis Yscl Y scale defines the distance between tick marks on the y axis To turn off tick marks set Xscl 0 and Yscl 0 res 1 ati 71FPeogsre Displaying the Window Variables To display the current window variable values press WINDOW The window editor above and to the right shows the default values in Func graphing mode and Radian angle mode The window variables differ from one graphing mode to another Xres sets pixel resolution 1 through 8 for function graphs only The default is 1 e At Xres 1 functions are evaluated and graphed at each pixel on the x axis e At Xres 8 functions are evaluated and graphed at every eighth pixel along the x axis Note Small Xres values improve graph resolution but may cause the Tl 84 Plus to draw graphs more slowly Changing a Window Variable Value To change a window variable value from the window editor follow these steps 1 Press or 4 to move the cursor to the window variable you want to change 2 Edit the value which can be an expression e Enter a new value which clears the original value e Move the cursor to a
422. uently e You can rename a program by copying its contents into a new program Note You also can copy all the command lines from one existing program to another existing program using RCL Scrolling the PRGM EXEC and PRGM EDIT Menus The Tl 84 Plus sorts PRGM EXEC and PRGM EDIT menu items automatically into alohanumerical order Each menu only labels the first 10 items using 1 through 9 then 0 To jump to the first program name that begins with a particular alpha character or 6 press letter from A to Z or 9 Note From the top of either the PRGM EXEC or PRGM EDIT menu press 4 to move to the bottom From the bottom press to move to the top To scroll the cursor down the menu seven items press To scroll the cursor up the menu seven items press 4 Chapter 16 Programming 280 PRGM CTL Control Instructions PRGM CTL Menu To display the PRGM CTL program control menu press from the program editor only CIL I O EXEC Li TE Creates a conditional test 2 Then Executes commands when If is true 3 Else Executes commands when If is false 4 For Creates an incrementing loop 5 While Creates a conditional loop 6 Repeat Creates a conditional loop vs end Signifies the end of a block 8 Pause Pauses program execution Ja DOL Defines a label 0 Goto Goes to a label A IS gt Increments and skips if greater than Be DS lt i Decrements and skips if less than C Menu Defines menu items and bra
423. ues to AX and AY If you do Xmax and Ymax are calculated from AX Xmin AY and Ymin Note The ZFrac ZOOM settings Zfrac1 2 ZFrac1 3 ZFrac1 4 ZFrac1 5 ZFrac1 8 ZFrac1 10 change AX and AY to fractional values If fractions are not needed for your problem you can adjust AX and AY to suit your needs Setting the Graph Format Displaying the Format Settings To display the format settings press FORMAT The default settings are highlighted below Note You can also go to the Format Graph screen from the Mode screen by selecting YES at the GoTo Format Graph prompt After you make changes press to return to the Mode screen RectGC PolarGC Sets cursor coordinates CoordOn CoordOff Sets coordinates display on or off GridOff GridOn Sets grid off or on Chapter 3 Function Graphing 14 AxesOn AxesOff Sets axes on or off LabelOff LabelOn Sets axes label off or on ExprOn ExprOff Sets expression display on or off Format settings define a graph s appearance on the display Format settings apply to all graphing modes Seq graphing mode has an additional mode setting Chapter 6 Changing a Format Setting To change a format setting follow these steps 1 Press gt 4 and 4 as necessary to move the cursor to the setting you want to select 2 Press to select the highlighted setting RectGC PolarGC RectGC rectangular graphing coordinates displays the cursor location as rectangular coordinates X and Y Po
424. ular box plot 209 defining 210 from a program 212 Histogram 209 ModBoxplot modified box plot 209 NormProbPlot normal probability plot 210 tracing 212 turning on off stat plots 70 212 viewing window 212 xyLine 208 Statistical variables table 206 Stats input option 218 219 stdDev standard deviation 176 375 Stop 287 375 Store gt 20 375 StoreGDB 135 375 StorePic 134 375 storing graph databases GDBs 135 graph pictures 134 variable values 20 StringbEqu string to equation conversions 271 375 strings concatenation 270 381 converting 270 defined 267 displaying contents 269 entering 267 functions in CATALOG 269 indicator 267 length length 271 length length 364 storing 268 variables 268 student z distribution probability tcdf 244 probability tcdf 375 student z distribution probability density function tpdf 243 probability density function tpdf 376 sub substring 272 375 subroutines 287 subtraction 36 381 sum summation 176 375 system variables 383 T T transpose matrix 155 379 TABLE SETUP screen 116 tables description 118 variables 116 117 tan tangent 36 375 tan arctangent 36 375 tangent tan 36 tangent tan 375 tangent lines drawing 126 Tangent draw line 126 375 tanh hyperbolic tangent 273 375 tanh hyperbolic arctangent 273 375 TblStart table start variable 116 tcdf student z distribution probability 244 375 TEST relati
425. us istB elements Returns matrixA elements plus matrixB elements Concatenates two or more strings Subtracts valueB from valued Subtracts list elements from value Appendix A Functions and Instructions 381 Function or Key or Instruction Arguments Result Keys Menu or Screen Item Subtraction Subtracts value from list elements list value Subtraction Subtracts istB elements from istA elements listA listB Subtraction Subtracts matrixB elements from matrixA elements matrixA matrixB Minutes Interprets minutes angle measurement as minutes 2nd ANGLE notation degrees minutes s ANGLE econds 2 Seconds notation Interprets seconds angle measurement as seconds ALPHA O 7 degrees minutes seconds Appendix A Functions and Instructions 382 Appendix B Reference Information Variables User Variables The TI 84 Plus uses the variables listed below in various ways Some variables are restricted to specific data types The variables A through Z and 9 are defined as real or complex numbers You may store to them The Tl 84 Plus can update X Y R 8 and T during graphing so you may want to avoid using these variables to store nongraphing data The variables list names L1 through L6 are restricted to lists you cannot store another type of data to them The variables matrix names A through J are restricted to matrices you cannot store another type of data to them T
426. us Silver Edition or TI 84 Plus 351 transmitting items 344 two TI 84 Plus units 348 Link Receive L1 or any file to Restore message 392 LinReg a bx linear regression 202 364 LinReg ax b linear regression 201 364 LinRegTTest linear regression test 236 364 LinReqTInt confidence interval for slope 237 LIST MATH menu 175 LIST NAMES menu 164 LIST OPS menu 168 List matr lists to matrix conversion 158 173 364 lists accessing an element 164 attaching formulas 165 166 188 clearing all elements 187 copying 163 creating 162 186 deleting from memory 164 329 detaching formulas 166 190 dimension 163 entering list names 165 185 indicator 163 naming lists 162 storing and displaying 163 using to graph a family of curves 77 164 using with math operations 36 167 In 37 364 LnReg logarithmic regression 202 364 log 37 364 Logistic regression 203 364 logistic regression formula 384 Manual Linear Fit 198 205 marked for deletion 340 MATH CPX complex menu 54 MATH menu 38 MATH NUM number menu 45 math operations 36 MATH PRB probability menu 56 Matrblist matrix to list conversion 157 174 365 matrices accessing elements 150 copying 150 defined 145 deleting from memory 146 dimensions 146 155 156 displaying a matrix 149 displaying matrix elements 146 editing matrix elements 147 indicator 148 math functions 151 matrix math functions det T dim Fill identity randM augment Matr
427. us entry Last Entry 22 prgm program name 287 368 PRGM CTL program control menu 281 PRGM EDIT menu 280 PRGM EXEC menu 280 PRGM NEW menu 277 probability 56 probability density function normalpdf 242 probability density function normalpdf 366 prod product 176 368 programming copying and renaming 280 creating new 277 defined 276 deleting 277 deleting command lines 280 editing 279 entering command lines 278 executing 279 inserting command lines 280 instructions 281 name prgm 287 368 renaming 280 running assembly language program 294 stopping 279 subroutines 293 Prompt 290 369 Pt Change 132 369 Pt Off 132 369 Pt On 131 369 PV present value variable 253 263 p value 240 PwrReg power regression 203 369 Pxl Change 133 369 Pxl Off 133 369 Pxl On 133 369 pxl Test 133 369 Q QuadReg quadratic regression 201 370 QuartReg quartic regression 202 370 Quick Zoom 80 Quit 338 351 r correlation coefficient 196 r radian notation 61 379 r2 R2 coefficients of determination 196 R gt Pr R PO rectangular to polar conversions 372 R gt Pr R PO rectangular to polar conversions 61 Radian angle mode 16 61 370 radian notation 61 379 RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu 333 rand random number 57 370 randBin random binomial 59 370 randIint random integer 58 370 randintNoRep 59 randM random matrix 157 370 randNorm random Normal 58 370 random seed 57 RCL recall 21 re46
428. use it is in parentheses and then it adds 2 1 and 3 Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 62 TEST LOGIC Boolean Operations TEST LOGIC Menu To display the TEST LOGIC menu press TEST gt This operator Returns a 1 true if TEST LOGIC Le and Both values are nonzero true 2 Oe At least one value is nonzero true a Or Only one value is zero false A not The value is zero false Boolean Operators Boolean operators are often used in programs to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph of the function over specific values Values are interpreted as zero false or nonzero true and or xor and or and xor exclusive or return a value of 1 if an expression is true or O if an expression is false according to the table below valueA and valueB can be real numbers expressions or lists valueA and valueB valueA or valueB valueA xor valueB valueA valueB and or xor 0 0 returns 1 1 0 0 0 returns 0 1 1 0 0 returns 0 1 1 0 0 returns 0 0 0 not not returns 1 if value which can be an expression is 0 not value Using Boolean Operations Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 63 Boolean logic is often used with relational tests In the following program the instructions store 4 into C PREOGFAM BOOLEARW 224A 338 lf A and B 3 Then 44 SsELlSe 540 End Chapter 2 Math Angle and Test Operations 64 Chapter 3 Function Grap
429. while condition is true Returns 1 if only valueA or valueB 0 valueA and valueB can be real numbers expressions or lists Displays a graph lets you draw a box that defines a new viewing window and updates the window Adjusts the viewing window so that AX 0 1 and AY 0 1 and displays the graph screen with the origin centered on the screen Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 1 if possible Sets AX and AY to 1 Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd MEM 6 UnArchive MATH NUM C Un d t FORMAT uv t FORMAT uw STAT CALC 1 1 Var Stats STAT CALC 2 2 Var Stats LIST MATH 8 variance DRAW DRAW 4 Vertical t FORMAT VW t FORMAT Web t CTL 5 While 2nd TEST LOGIC 3 xor t ZOOM 1 ZBox t ZOOM 4 ZDecimal ZOOM B ZFrac1 2 Appendix A Functions and Instructions 377 Function or Instruction Arguments ZFrac 1 3 ZFrac 1 4 ZFrac 1 5 ZFrac 1 8 ZFrac 1 10 Zinteger Zinterval o istname freqlist confidence level Data list input Zinterval X n confidence level Summary stats input Zoom In Zoom Out ZoomFit ZoomRcl ZoomStat ZoomSto Result Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 7 if possible Sets AX and AY to 7 Sets the window variables so that you can trace in increments of 1 if possible Sets AX and AY to x Sets the window variables so that you can trace
430. wo weeks if you use the graphing calculator infrequently e Always replace batteries before attempting to install a new operating system The Display Types of Displays The TI 84 Plus displays both text and graphs Chapter 3 describes graphs Chapter 9 describes how the TI 84 Plus can display a horizontally or vertically split screen to show graphs and text simultaneously Home Screen The home screen is the primary screen of the Tl 84 Plus On this screen enter instructions to execute and expressions to evaluate The answers are displayed on the same screen Most calculations are stored in the history on the home screen You can press 4 and to scroll through the history of entries on the home screen and you can paste the entries or answers to the current entry line Displaying Entries and Answers e When text is displayed the Tl 84 Plus screen can display a maximum of 8 lines with a maximum of 16 characters per line in Classic mode In MathPrint mode fewer lines and fewer characters per line may be displayed e Ifall lines of the display are full text scrolls off the top of the display To view previous entries and answers press 4 To copy a previous entry or answer and paste it to the current entry line move the cursor to the entry or answer you want to copy and press ENTER Note List and matrix outputs cannot be copied If you try to copy and paste a list or matrix output the cursor returns to the input lin
431. x 365 number of days MB to M1 DTI Y1 YB 4 Number of Days Il Y2 YB x 365 number of days MB to M2 DT2 Y2 YB 4 Appendix B Reference Information 390 where M1 month of first date DT1 day of first date y1 year of first date M2 month of second date DT2 day of second date Y2 year of second date MB base month January DB base day 1 YB base year first year after leap year Important Things You Need to Know About Your TI 84 Plus TI 84 Plus Results There may be a number of reasons that your Tl 84 Plus is not displaying the expected results however the most common solutions involve order of operations or mode settings Your calculator uses an Equation Operating System EOS which evaluates the functions in an expression in the following order Functions that precede the argument such as square root sin or log Functions that are entered after the argument such as exponents factorial r and conversions Powers and roots such as 2 5 or 5 square root 32 Permutations nPr and combinations nCr Multiplication implied multiplication and division Addition and subtraction Relational functions such as gt or lt Logic operator and SS St OY SS Logic operators or and xor Remember that EOS evaluates from left to right and calculations within parentheses are evaluated first You should use parentheses where the rules of algebra may not be clear In OS
432. x value for the specified degrees of freedom df 12 Test Py er PE A Performs a chi square test drawflag 1 draws results expectedmatrix drawflag 0 calculates results drawflag 1 GOF Test observedlist Performs a test to confirm that sample data is from a population that conforms to a specified distribution expectedlist df Circle X Y radius Draws a circle with center X Y and radius CLASSIC Displays inputs and outputs on a single line such as 1 2 3 4 Key or Keys Menu or Screen Item 2nd LIST OPS 9 augment Answers AUTO t FORMAT AxesOff t FORMAT AxesOn T MODE atbi 1 Finance CALC 9 bal 2nd DISTR DISTR B binomcdf 2nd DISTR DISTR A binompdf 2nd CATALOG checkTmr 2nd DISTR DISTR 8 7 cdf 2nd DISTR DISTR 7 77 pdf t STAT TESTS C y Test t STAT TESTS D 7GOF Test 2nd DRAW DRAW 9 Circle CLASSIC Appendix A Functions and Instructions 355 Function or Instruction Arguments Clear Entries ClockOff ClockOn CIrAllLists CirDraw ClrHome ClrList istnamel distnamed2 listname n CirTable conj value Connected CoordOff CoordOn cos value cos value cosh value cosh value CubicReg X istname Ylistname freglist regequ Result Clears the contents of the Last Entry storage area Turns off the clock display in the mode screen Turns on the clock display in the
433. y the main screen Quitting the EasyData App 1 To quit the EasyData App select Quit press GRAPH The Ready to quit screen is displayed which indicates that the collected data has been transferred to lists L1 through L4 on the T1I 84 Plus 2 Press OK press GRAPH to quit EasyData Settings Changing EasyData settings The EasyData App displays the most commonly used settings before data collection begins To change a predefined setting 1 From the main screen in the EasyData App choose Setup and select 2 Time Graph The current settings are displayed on the calculator Note If using a motion detector settings for 3 Distance Match and 4 Ball Bounce in the Setup menu are preset and cannot be changed 2 Select Next press Z00M to move to the setting you want to change Press to clear a setting 3 Repeat to cycle through the available options When the option is correct select Next to move to the next option To change a setting enter 1 or 2 digits and then select Next press Z00M When all the settings are correct select OK press GRAPH to return to the main menu Select Start press Z00M to begin collecting data Restoring the EasyData App to the default settings The default settings are appropriate for a wide variety of sampling situations If you are unsure of the best settings begin with the default settings and then adjust the settings for your specific activity
434. y the picture with the instruction RecallPic 6 Graphing Cobweb Attractors Problem Using Web format you can identify points with attracting and repelling behavior in sequence graphing Procedure 1 Press MODE Select Seq and the default mode settings Press FORMAT Select Web format and the default format settings 2 Press y Clear all functions and turn off all stat plots Enter the sequence that corresponds to the expression Y K X 1 X u n Ku n 1 1 u n 1 u nMin 01 Chapter 17 Activities 312 Press QUIT to return to the home screen and then store 2 9 to K Press WINDOW Set the window variables nMin 0 Xmin 0 Ymin 26 nMax 10 Xmax 1 Ymax 1 1 PlotStart 1 Xscl 1 Yscl 1 PlotStep 1 5 Press to display the graph and then press gt to trace the cobweb This is a cobweb with one attractor U hutsLiti utmeni BrB amp R T 668 8578 Change K to 3 44 and trace the graph to show a cobweb with two attractors Change K to 3 54 and trace the graph to show a cobweb with four attractors U hutsLiti utmni 1 669 T BB4Sooge Using a Program to Guess the Coefficients Setting Up the Program This program graphs the function A sin BX with random integer coefficients between 1 and 10 Try to guess the coefficients and graph your guess as C sin DX The program continues until your guess is correct Note This program changes the graph window and graph styles After you run the program
435. y valid n value on the current function enter the number When you enter the first digit an n prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen You can enter an expression at the n prompt The value must be valid for the current viewing window When you have completed the entry press to move the cursor UZUL il UZUL il ZOOM ZOOM operations in Seq graphing work the same as in Func graphing Only the X Xmin Xmax and Xscl and Y Ymin Ymax and Yscl window variables are affected PlotStart PlotStep nMin and nMax are only affected when you select ZStandard The VARS Zoom secondary menu ZU items 1 through 7 are the ZOOM MEMORY variables for Seq graphing CALC The only CALC operation available in Seq graphing is value Chapter 6 Sequence Graphing 108 e When Time axes format is selected value displays Y the u n value for a specified n value e When Web axes format is selected value draws the web and displays Y the u n value for a specified n value e When uv vw or uw axes format is selected value displays X and Y according to the axes format setting For example for uv axes format X represents u n and Y represents v n Evaluating u v and w To enter the sequence names u v or w press u v or w You can evaluate these names in any of three ways e Calculate the nth value in a sequence e Calculate a list of values in a sequence e Generate a sequen
436. you can change individual settings as needed or you can press MEM 7 2 2 to return to default settings Programs typically do not restore your settings in MODE Y WINDOW and other locations that were used by the program This is dependent on who created the program Program PROGRAM GUESS PLOCSOER Eure gt FnOff Radian ClrHome Chapter 17 Activities 313 gt Asin BX 9Y1 Define equations Csin DX PY2 L GraphStyle 1 1 Set line and path graph styles GraphStyle 2 5 L_ sFnOLrr 2 gt srandiInt 1 10 gt 3A srandint 1 10 B 0 gt C 0 gt D Initialize coefficients 20 gt Xmin 20 gt Xmax gt 1 2 gt Xscl 103Ymin 10 gt Ymax 1 gt yscl Set viewing window DispGraph Pase LL Display graph Fnon 2 Lbo1 Z Prompt C D Prompt for guess DispGraph Pause Display graph EIL CFA Texel IS ORK SLE re Text 1 1 C IS Display results WRONG gt If D B Text 1 50 DD Ts OF It DB Teele DO Le WRONG gt DispGraph Pause H Display graph gt If C A and D B ol oD H Quit if guesses are correct GOCO A Note The Guess My Coefficients App is an educational game that challenges you to enter the correct coeffiecients for graphs of linear quadratic and absolute value functions This app is available at education ti com Chapter 17 Activities 314 Graphing the Unit Circle and Trigonometric Curves Problem Using parametric graphing

TI-84 Plus and TI-84 Plus Silver Edition

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents